Home

Fujitsu N1800 User's Manual

1. LCD touch panel Central Item Function Admin Admin See Basic Advanced Tool c l Sai mode mode le Fax Fax Server Set the fax server NA A A A page 142 Network Folder Network Set the network A A A A page 143 Folder folders 5 File Names Set the file name NA A A A page 156 Save format used for when saving scanned data FTP Server Folder FTP Server Set the FTP NA A A A page 143 Folder server folders 5 File Names Set the file name NA A A A page 156 Save format used for when saving scanned data SharePoint Folder SharePoint Set the NA NA A A page 153 Folder SharePoint 5 folders File Names Set the file name NA NA A A page 156 Save format used for when saving scanned data Print Network Set the network A A A A page 159 Printer printers 5 A available NA not available 1 Operations can be performed in the Installation Wizard 2 Synchronization not possible 3 Contents of the SSL Certificate are not shown 4 Address and Port Number cannot be set 5 Printers folders and SharePoint folders that can be accessed from the Central Admin Server can be set 41 E Monitoring amp Management 1 3 User Types and Operations LCD touch panel Admin Central Item Function Basic Advanced Tool pena See mode mode eos Status Details System View the system A A A A page 170 Status status 1 Usa
2. Tab Item make settings become invalid invalid Basic Paper Size Auto Resolution 600dpi Carrier Sheet Long page mode Resolution 600dpi Carrier Sheet 300dpi and Auto Color Mode Text Recognition Auto Blank Page Skip Page Orientation Multifeed detection Other than Auto Carrier Sheet and long page mode Resolution 600dpi Text Recognition Carrier Sheet All Pages and Paper Size Pages Auto and long High Compression page mode for Color PDF Page Orientation other than Auto 300dpi and Auto Paper Size long page mode 150dpi and 200dpi Scan Mode Document Feed Direction Save File Format PDF C1 JPEG Text Recognition Color Mode PDF Password Auto or Black Compression High amp White TIFF Compression for a MTIFF Color PDF 358 Tab Item Settings which become invalid Conditions which make settings invalid Save 1 Text Recognition 2 First Page Paper Size long page mode Other than PDF file format All Pages Pages Paper Size long page mode Other than PDF file format Resolution 600dpi First marked section only All marked sections Brightness Contrast Background Removal Color Mode Grayscale and Black amp White Other than PDF file format Paper Size long page
3. ceeeeeeeeeees 489 Appendix D Scanner Specifications cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeees 492 D 1 Installation Specifications ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 493 D 2 Basic Scanner Specifications cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 494 D 3 Changing the Functions on the On Screen Keyboard sssed csc ces oxticeewecaveccuseesnis tact access napseaasenccarseeeees 495 D 3 1 Switching the Keyboard Layout c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 495 Appendix E Editing Using User Editor ccceeeseeeeeeeeeees 496 E 1 What is User Editor cccceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneees 497 E 2 System Requirements ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 498 E 2 1 Requirements for User Editor 0 c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 498 E22 Port Number Listei eeen renerne rert eu eer renea tKa 498 14 E 3 E 4 E 5 E 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 Pre settingS sisineecssscicecccousssssshevessvanies aaaea aaa iia 499 E 3 1 Installing User Editor i iesciiiininnenir roiroi 499 E 3 2 Uninstalling User Editor ec cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 502 Windows of User Editor ccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 503 Starting Exiting User Editor ccccccessesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 505 E Starting User Editor iwalec ite eek he eet 505 E Exiting User BQH Ol resis ccesterscoossenessenaeSeesuesdateeeescenseoussovenis 505 Viewing the Mail Address Book L
4. ccccecseseeeeeeseceeeseeesseeeeeseseeeeesenees 309 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenenees 324 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data ccciissccccnsinssctscsecaccssunnnaacsssedncesennsdasteteceenenancusenacateniine 333 6 7 Saving the Scanned Data to a Network Foldet cccccssssessssseeeesssseeeeeseees 344 6 8 Saving the Scanned Data to a SharePoint Folder c ccsccssssseeesessseeeeesenes 348 6 9 Setting the Scan OM tims acicrnidetesinccicionscivaicdentedtencetadecsionsedacntienaieaesiebocieienaens 356 6 10 Enabling Disabling the Scan Viewer ccccccceeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 395 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewe ceecsseesseeeeeeeeeeeeneees 398 6 12 Checking the User L0G ss cssscitasadacsossinaesessieeriixdenanaessasncavanctaasertiadateadensvas nianscunse 402 6 13 MaintenanCe sas enistiratesineeisiretantanaecereadnandesunnnalsnannieadinaedadovcentaebedexabtexsetsnededntuntinne 403 6 14 Processing a DOD isi eewsticawcins cciwenciestrruavnrentaasenaneis emaa aa aaeain aaa akasa sai wasaini 405 6 15 Changing a User PASS WOM eivissinectdncieduecervicietinstesidiazeniensunsessnidainteanticedeu sed iciects 414 296 6 1 Loading Documents This section describes how to load documents onto the scanner 6 1 1 How to Load Documents 1 Check the number of document sheets For document sheet limits refer to A 3 Maximu
5. 107 4 7 1 Setting the Login Settings cece cece ee eeeeeeetettttteeeeees 107 4 7 2 Setting the Time to Standby Mode eeeeeeereeeees 110 4 7 3 Changing the Admin Password eeeeeeeeeeetettttteeeeeees 112 Configuring the Network Settings ccceeeeeee 113 4 8 1 Giving the Scanner an IP Address 0eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 113 4 8 2 Setting the DNS Server c ccccecececeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteceeeeeeees 115 4 8 3 Setting the WINS Server ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 116 4 8 4 Setting the NTP Server 2 cccccceceeaseseseeeeseeeeeseeseeeeneceeeeeee 117 4 8 5 Setting the Proxy Server eeeeeeeeeeeeesessrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrereee 118 4 8 6 Checking the Network Connection with a Ping Test 119 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 8 7 Checking the Network Operating StatuS cee 121 E Checking the Network Status 2 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 E Setting the Link Speed Duplex Mode 000008 122 E Setting Wake On LAN siccicccavcrssteneetes tend ice xara ad otceerness 122 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteteteeees 123 4 8 9 Setting a Central Admin Servet cceeeeeeeeetteeeeeees 125 Configuring the LDAP Settings cccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 127 4 9 1 Setting the Login LDAP Servet cceeeeeeeeeeeeetttteeeeeees 127 E LDAP S
6. 263 5 10 Installing an Add in 3 In Add in Groups select a group to which the new Add in module is to be registered To cancel release of the Add in module press the Cancel button to delete the M module Registered Add in Module shows the details of the currently available Add in modules 4 Press the Add in Upload button The Add in Upload window appears Add in Upload r Installation Method Install after uninstalling all current Add ins Add in Upload Upload Module Add inName Back 5 Press the Browse button to specify the Add in module file 6 Press the Upload button to upload the Add in module To install the uploaded Add in module after uninstalling all Add in modules M installed in a scanner select the Install after uninstalling all current Add ins check box 7 Press the Back button The Add in Installs window appears 8 Select the Issue an Update Call check box to issue an update call When the check box is selected even if a scanner is not started or logged in to the Add in module is sent and applied to the scanner according to the Scanner Notification Schedule However if the update is released while the user is logged in to a scanner the update will be applied after the user is logged out If any other available updates are pending those are also applied at the same time 264
7. Login Window r l Login C m CTI Press Button 1 Press Button 2 No operation for set period Standby L PA LED Lit 1 Other than pressing the power button any of the following operations will startup the scanner from standby mode Loading the documents into the ADF paper chute Closing the top cover Pressing the power button Pressing the Scan button Touching the LCD touch panel The window displayed after a re startup varies according automatic login settings in the following way f automatic login is enabled the operation window is displayed f automatic login is disabled the login window in displayed 2 The Shutdown button is shown on the following windows Pressing the button shows a confirmation window from which the power can be turned off Shown on the login window if automatic login is not set Shown on the main menu or job menu if automatic login is set 59 2 2 Using the Scanner Buttons When the scanner is starting up or in standby mode be careful to never hold the power button down for 4 seconds as this will cause the scanner to shutdown If this happens saved scanned data may become unusable If the power button is accidentally held down too long causing the scanner to shutdown temporally detach the AC adaptor to ensure that the power is completely off After turning the power off wait for at least 10 seconds before turning the power bac
8. Valid from ai jo Se Ge ae Previous Cancel For Central Admin Console contents of the SSL Certificate are not shown 2 For SSL select whether or not to enable SSL 3 In Port Number enter a port number to be used by the scanner to communicate with the Admin Tool or Central Admin Server Port numbers 135 139 445 and numbers from 1025 to 1124 cannot be specified as they are already reserved in the scanner If port numbers other than HTTP 80 HTTPS 443 are to be specified it is recommended that numbers 5000 or above are used If a port number lower than 5000 is specified verify the Admin Tool connectivity with the port number first 4 Press the OK button gt The information entered is set 123 4 8 Configuring the Network Settings If the admin connection settings are changed using the Admin Tool the Admin Tool is disconnected from the scanner If any further actions are required the Admin Tool will need to be reconnected to the scanner If SSL is enabled SSL is also used for communication between the Central Admin Server and the scanner When Central Admin is enabled change the settings on the Central Admin Console Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window The following settings combinations are not possible Port Number 80 and SSL On Port Number 443 and SSL Off 124 4 8 9 Setting a Central Admin Server HA AdminTool If On is selected for Central Ad
9. cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 62 2 4 Using the On Screen Keyboard cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 63 E Showing Hiding the On Screen Keyboard 0066 63 E Using the On Screen Keyboard ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 E Keyboard Layout c cee eee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 Chapter 3 Administrator Operations Overview 0 66 3 1 Operating and Managing Scanners ccceessseeeeeeees 67 3 2 Required Scanner Function Settings cccccceeee 69 Chapter 4 Administrator Operations LCD Touch Panel and Admin Tool scceeeeeeeees 74 4 1 WIRKOWS iiiesiisisesccecteescsseucrasinndss tes ietes ister apaa EEr oeii 75 4 1 1 Administrator Windows via the LCD Touch Panel 15 4 1 2 Administrator Windows via the Admin TOol cree 76 4 2 Administrator LOg itt iciccsssciseeccccsssssscecccssssitascecceeevitieetiins 78 4 2 1 Administrator Login via the LCD Touch Panel 78 E When Automatic Login is Not Set cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 78 E When Automatic Login is Set oo ceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 2 2 Setting up for Administrator Access via the Admin Tool 80 E Checking the Internet Explorer Cache Settings 80 E Setting the Internet Explorer Trusted Sites 81 E Installing the Admin Tool jacnineneed tonsa dct mages 8
10. 192 4 16 5 Obtaining Technical Support Adminvoo If any problems occur when setting up or using the scanner technical support information can be collected to help determine the cause of the problem The information obtained should be sent to your FUJITSU scanner dealer along with the scanner when given for repair 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt Technical Support gt The Technical Support window appears Set the information output level for technical support Information Output Level T 0 5 echnical Support Technical Support Information 2 Press the Download button The File Download dialog box appears 3 Press the Save button Make sure there is enough free space on the disk where it is to be saved and M press the Save button If there is not enough free disk space an incomplete file may be saved The Save As dialog box appears 4 Name the file and specify where it should be saved 5 Press the Save button The technical information is downloaded 193 4 16 Maintaining the System 4 16 6 Setting the Destination for Alert Notifications An alert notification can be sent by e mail whenever a scanner alert situation occurs This section describes how to specify an e mail address as the destination for alert notification When the destination for alert notification is set an alert notification message is sent to the registered e mail address
11. 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration page 251 5 14 Viewing the Scanners Operating Status page 274 228 Function Used to See Job Mode Settings Share jobs between multiple scanners Job mode settings can be created and edited in the Central Admin Console 5 12 Setting the Job Mode page 269 User Data Roaming Share user information such as the e mail address book and scan settings between scanners 4 8 9 Setting a Central Admin Server page 125 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 Audit Log Collection Collect the scanner system and user logs in the Central Admin Server so that each operation performed by a scanner can be audited Collected logs can be exported using the audit log export command and output to an arbitrary folder 229 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 5 16 Collecting and Exporting Audit Logs page 277 5 2 5 2 Central Admin Console Window Central Admin Console Window The windows of the Central Admin Console are as follows When a button in the menu is pressed the corresponding window is shown Scanner Admin Operations window Scanner Operation Monitor window Scanner Config List window Event Log window You can set the Scanner Admin Operations window or Scanner Operation Monitor window as the Main window to be displayed after a Central Admin Console login
12. For Internet Explorer 6 0 On the General tab press the Delete Files button on the Temporary Internet Files For Internet Explorer 7 0 On the General tab press the Delete button on the Browsing history and press Delete Files button on Temporary Internet Files For Internet Explorer 8 0 On the General tab press the Delete button on the Browsing history then select the Temporary Internet Files check box and press Delete button The scanner is in standby mode E Action Press the power button to start the scanner A proxy server is being used E Action Set the proxy server to not be used 1 2 3 In Internet Explorer set the following settings in the Tools menu Internet Options Press the LAN settings button on the Connections tab Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN These settings will not apply to dial up or VPN connection check box There is an error with the connection protocol setting E Action Check if SSL is enabled on the Admin Connection window For details refer to 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection page 123 There is an error with the port number setting 457 8 2 Network Connection Troubleshooting E Action Check the specified port number on the Admin Connection window For details refer to 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection page 123 In Internet Explorer Tools menu Internet Options Advanced tab the Use SSL 3 0 chec
13. 35 1 2 Part Names and Functions E Removable Parts jl ADF paper chute mN VES Y iy Sr A Pick roller Part Name Function ADF paper chute Help to guide documents from the ADF paper chute to the Sheet guide stacker Pick roller Pad assy 36 1 3 User Types and Operations When you use the scanner login to the scanner as a user with the following operation right Regular user rights Operation rights given when you login to the scanner with a regular user account When you login to the scanner with these rights you are a regular user of the scanner A regular user can scan documents and then send print or save the resulting data Administrator rights Operation rights given when you login to the scanner with an administrator account When you login to the scanner with these rights you are an administrator of the scanner An administrator can setup and manage the scanner Note that the method of login to the scanner varies depending on the user type as follows Login method Operation rights 3 LCD touch panel Admin Tool D eA Regular user rights A NA NA Administrator rights A A A A available NA not available The following table lists the operations available for the administrator and regular users 37 1 3 1 Operations with Administrator Right E System Settings 1 3 User Types and Operation
14. The Admin Tool is started 2 Specify the Connect to of the scanner Enter the IP address scanner name or FQDN for the scanner to be setup or managed Network Scanner Admin Too lelak Exit 8 opan Salinas Job Menu Settings Download Manual About Help Seew7STIGP Connect to Specify the IP address scanner name or FQDN of the target scanner PortNumber 80 Use HTTPS If the port number was changed in 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection page 123 enter the port number changed in Port Number When trying to connect with a port number other than the specified number it takes up to 20 seconds before a connection error occurs To use SSL select the Use HTTPS check box If the Admin Tool is started while there is insufficient free memory a script error may occur Try again after ensuring that there is enough free memory 3 Press the Connect button The Login window appears 88 4 Enter a User Name and Password 5 Press the Login button If the user name and password are valid the System Settings window appears 89 4 3 Setting the System Settings with the Installation Wizard on the LCD Touch Panel 4 3 Setting the System Settings with the Installation Wizard on the LCD Touch Panel Using the Installation Wizard on the LCD touch panel you can set the following items Scanner Name Region Timezone Date Time Login Settings Admin Password IP Address
15. The following file names cannot be used LPTO to LPT9 and are used as delimiters in a folder path The following symbols cannot be used amp lt gt When the file format is changed in Scan Settings the file name set on the File Names Save window is reset in the Save As field 5 Press Le to select whether or not to overwrite an existing file with the same name Whether or not the file was successfully saved can be checked in the user log For more details about accessing the user log refer to 6 12 Checking the User Log page 402 6 Press The Document Splitting window appears Configure the settings to split a file of scanned data into multiple files when the file size exceeds the maximum file limit 350 7 In the Max File Size field enter the maximum file size at which a file is to be split into multiple files and press the OK button Document Splitting Ed Az A Scan data larger than 45MB needs to be split into multiple files for saving Specify the size of the split files Max File Size MB Approx Page Limits a Color Mode Pages RGB Color Grayscale Black amp White Cancel When the file size of a single page exceeds the specified maximum file size the page is saved as one file The file name format of split files is original_file_name file_number total_number_of_split_files File numbers and the total number of split files are added i
16. 157 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data 4 For Seq Number select a sequence number format If the file name which exceeds the maximum sequence number possible already exists in the target folder for saving the sequence numbers are not added correctly The following explains the way in which sequence numbers are added Sequence numbers start from 1 When there are files with file names containing sequence numbers sequence numbers following the largest value will be used For example if the file name is A sequence numbers are set to be added in 3 digits and A001 pdf and A004 pdf already exist subsequent file names are assigned in the following order A005 pdf A006 pdf A007 pdf A008 pdf File names A002 pdf and A003 pdf are skipped If the sequence number exceeds the setting in the Seq Number subsequent file names are assigned using the next digit For example if the file name is A sequence numbers are set to be added in 3 digits and A001 pdf to A998 pdf already exist subsequent file names are assigned in the following order A999 pdf A1000 pdf A1001 pdf A1002 pdf The maximum sequence number is 4294967295 If it is exceeded the skipped minimum number is used for the sequence number For example if the file name is A sequence numbers are set to be added in 3 digits and A001 pdf AO03 pdf and A4294967295 pdf already exist subsequent file names are assig
17. 26 Abbreviations Used in This Manual The following abbreviations are used in this manual Abbreviation esd Option Windows Windows operating system Windows XP Windows XP Professional operating system Windows XP Home Edition operating system Windows Vista Windows Vista Home Basic operating system Windows Vista Home Premium operating system Windows Vista Business operating system Windows Vista Enterprise operating system Windows Vista Ultimate operating system Windows 7 Windows 7 Starter operating system Windows 7 Home Premium operating system Windows 7 Professional operating system Windows 7 Enterprise operating system Windows 7 Ultimate operating system Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 Standard Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Windows Server 2008 Datacenter Exchange NET Framework Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 supported by 64 bit operating systems only Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 supported by 64 bit operating systems only Microsoft NET Framework SharePoint OpenSolaris Microsoft Office SharePoint Server 2007 Microsoft SharePoint Server 2010 supported by 64 bit operating systems only OpenSolaris 27 Abbre
18. The dialog box for saving a file appears Specify the directory and name of the file and press the Save button Mail address books or local accounts are saved in CSV format 520 E 11 User Editor Information Shown in User Log In the administrator or regular user User Log window user logs of User Editor can be viewed The user log items for User Editor are shown as follows Log Item Info options Description Operation Remote The User Editor loaded a mail address book Or the User Editor updated a mail address book Pages 0 This item is always shown as 0 For checking other items and detailed information on user logs refer to the following When the administrator checks the information on the User Log window Viewing the User Log Details page 173 When a regular user checks the information on the User Log window 6 12 Checking the User Log page 402 521 Appendix F Compatibility with Different Versions This appendix explains the compatibility with different versions of scanner systems and the Central Admin Server software F 1 Updating System Settings from the Central Admin Server ccsessseeeeee 523 F 2 Functional Compatibility Between the Scanner and Central Admin Server 524 F 3 Backing Up Restoring Data Between Different Versions of the Central Admin Server SoftWare ocina aeaa decensdbise iy chs caleccoctssied a aa aa aaa aei aa 525 F 4 Event Source Name Outpu
19. 8 3 Other Troubleshooting Quality of scanned data is poor E Check item Is the glass dirty E Action Clean the glass Scanned data is partially cut off E Check item Depending on the paper color of the document scanned data may be partially cut off because the paper boundary is not recognized correctly E Action Before scanning set the paper size to a standard one E Check item Is the document loaded correctly E Action Load the document correctly Scanned data is skewed E Check item Are the side guides aligned with the document width E Action Align the side guides with the paper size Pick roller may also cause this problem Refer to Check item and Action for Paper is not fed into the scanner Pick errors are frequent or document feed stops midway page 462 E Cannot Login Cannot login with administrator password E Check item Was the Caps Lock on when the password was entered E Action Turn off the Caps Lock and try logging in again If the password has been lost or forgotten contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider 464 The Login window is not displayed when connecting via the network E Check item Are the SSL settings correct E Action Close the window correct the settings and try connecting again E Check item Was the Yes button selected on the Security Warning dialog box when connecting with HTTPS E Action Clos
20. 9 In Scanner Notification Schedule set the schedule to notify Add in modules When issuing a call set a time that does not conflict with that set for Software Update Time Period Restrictions on the Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window 10 Press the Register button The uploaded Add in module is registered to the selected Add in group When a new Add in module is available it will only be not installed in a scanner if both the name and version match that of the current Add in Scanners are restarted twice when installing a new Add in once to uninstall the old Add in and once again after the new Add in has been installed Pending updates are performed in the following order 1 System Updates 2 Add in Installs 3 Scanner Settings 11 Press the Back button The Central Admin Console main window appears again 265 5 11 Updating the Scanner Settings 5 11 Updating the Scanner Settings The scanner settings can be updated by uploading new sets of scanner settings and setting update calls The new set of scanner settings will be released and applied to the scanners when one of the following occurs Scanner is started or resumed from the standby mode Scanner is logged out Scanner is notified of any update modules Scanner has an automatic update scheduled When update calls are set up updates can be applied to the scanners that are in power off or standby mode using Wake On LAN If
21. Command executable format AmInvestigate exe d OutputFolder p EncryptedPassword v The italic text represents variable character strings To show the status of the process specify v Return value 0 Succeeded Other than 0 Failed The information is output to the specified output folder for each type If an encrypted password is specified the technical support information is encrypted 284 5 17 4 Migrating Data to an Updated Version of the Central Admin Server Software When updating the Central Admin Server software version in order to use a different server as the Central Admin Server data from the previous version of the Central Admin Server software must be transferred to the new version The data can be migrated by executing the AmBackup exe and AmRestore exe commands in the computer in which the Central Admin Server software is installed If you back up data by executing AmBackup exe in the Bin folder from the installation folder of the previous version you cannot restore the data in the new version of the Central Admin Server f updating the version of the current Central Admin Server software you do not M need to migrate data Make sure to export audit logs in advance as they are not migrated by this operation 1 Copy the following folder in the new version of the Central Admin Server software to an arbitrary folder of the previous version AmManager Bin folder in the insta
22. FUJITSU ScanSnap N1800 Network Scanner Operator s Guide Contents SOD VMIGIAG saicastoucetcutreorteese ene sendiecuduace uniutancdoninedianicacmemececentae 18 rodu CHON sason ensauenicuan cnc soa ensnbascuneunensmocancerebeseeeaes 24 E About This Manual ccccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 25 E Opening Help ag cise ss dceepes tcenccenctuseaneneecacasssnandeccanesececesssciuns 28 Chapter 1 Overview giciisnississiesicutcatcantseusasnuerveateniiatiaianaunectvanteiau 30 1 1 Scanner Features ssssssssnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nennen 31 E Basic Uses for Scanned Data ccccceccceseeteeeeeeeeeeeees 31 E Configure and Manage with Ease eeen 32 E Advanced Security Measures ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 1 2 Part Names and Functions ccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 E Front VIEW serioen eorn s erre inienn rakion 34 E Rear View sicis se rasnncetnanicthxa cen daclwuctuciasonanannssanadinncesnrecapchuatcain 35 E Removable Pars a isis siecisn deriv cori snaviarden ilaxsionioasraw i Rumanian 36 1 3 User Types and Operations ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 1 3 1 Operations with Administrator Right eeeeeeeeeeeee 38 E System Settings seccina Rcsettaies 38 ME Network Settings cccccc cccccecccccccseeeceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 39 E Monitoring amp Management ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42 E Dev
23. Time Corresponds to the system log Time Type Corresponds to the system log Type Code Corresponds to the system log Code Message Corresponds to the system log Messages For details about accessing the system log refer to 4 14 5 Managing the System Log page 175 279 Audit log user 5 16 Collecting and Exporting Audit Logs This log contains the following output items Sequence_number Date Time User Code Operation Result Pages Description These items are defined as follows Log Item Description Sequence A file sequence number between 1 and number 4294967295 This number increments from 1 as files are added and resets to 0 indicating an overflow after 4294967295 Date Corresponds to the user log Date Time Corresponds to the user log Time User Corresponds to the user log User Code Corresponds to the user log Code Operation Corresponds to the user log Operation Result Corresponds to the user log Result Pages Corresponds to the user log Pages Description Corresponds to the user log Description For details about accessing the user log refer to 4 14 4 Managing the User Log page 173 280 5 17 Maintaining Central Admin Server Settings Central Admin Server settings set by the administrator can be backed up restored and obtained Q Audit logs are not backed up or restored by
24. XGA monitor or better LAN cable 48 1 4 4 Requirements for Related Servers For related servers the following requirements apply Server Operating System Function LDAP server Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Active Directory OpenSolaris Solaris10 Red Hat Enterprise Linux Suse Linux Enterprise Server OpenLDAP SMTP Server File Server Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 SMTP Exchange Windows Shared Folder Windows Server 2008 49 OpenSolaris Samba Solaris10 Red Hat Enterprise Linux Suse Linux Enterprise Server SharePoint Server Windows Server 2003 SharePoint Windows Server 2008 FTP Server Windows Server 2003 FTP Windows Server 2008 Print Server Windows Server 2003 Windows Shared Printer Windows Server 2008 DNS Server Windows Server 2003 DNS Windows Server 2008 WINS Server Windows Server 2003 WINS Windows Server 2008 DHCP Server Windows Server 2003 DHCP 1 4 System Requirements Server Operating System Function NTP Server Windows Server 2003 NTP Windows Server 2008 Red Hat Enterprise Linux Fax Server Windows Server 2003 RightFax Windows Server 2008 To use as network printer Windows XP compatible printer driver must be installed LDAP Server LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a pro
25. 6 5 2 Adding a Contact to the Fax Number List This section describes how to add a contact to the fax number list A maximum of 1 000 fax numbers can be stored in the fax number list You cannot add any more fax numbers if the list already contains 1000 fax numbers A Fax contact numbers added to the list are accessible to all users 1 Open the Fax Number List window in either of the following ways On the Send Fax window press Le On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button then on the Maintenance window press the Edit Fax Numbers button 2 Press Le Fax Number List E Search Position Head abc Search Target P Cancel gt The Add Fax Number window appears 329 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax 3 Enter the fax contact details Add Fax Number Ea ES Recipient 4 Press the OK button The contact is added to the fax number list 330 6 5 3 Editing a Contact in the Fax Number List Edited fax contact numbers are accessible to all users 1 Open the Fax Number List window in either of the following ways On the Send Fax window press Bj On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button then on the Maintenance window press the Edit Fax Numbers button 2 Select a fax number to be edited 3 Press L2 The Edit Fax Number window appears 4 Edit the information Ed
26. If the process is successful the text will change to This scanner s server side status is Registered For details about the settings required to use SSL for communication between the Central Admin Server and scanner refer to 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection page 123 When user roaming or job settings are enabled if communication with the Central Admin Server is not possible a confirmation message will appear at login If the OK button is selected the settings saved in the scanner are used Selecting the Cancel button returns to the login window 126 4 9 Configuring the LDAP Settings 4 9 1 Setting the Login LDAP Server UC aminTooi Cama Adi If a login LDAP server is set user authentication will be checked 1 Select Network Settings gt Authentication Server gt Login LDAP Server The Login LDAP Server window appears K Network Settings gt Authentication Server Authentication Server W Login LDAP Server e Mail LDAP Server Customize LDAP Search Previous 2 For Server Type set the connection settings for the login LDAP server Select Off if an LDAP server is not required for user logins No other settings can This server is used to authenticate user logins Server Type Off COIIHNICCLE IIl4 i SSL Off Address Port Number Search Base DN eo cn Users dc example dc com Search Timeout E LDAP Server Access Authoriz
27. If this message appears frequently with auxiliary code other than those mentioned above contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider Code Message Action 7A040018 Restore failed If this message appears with auxiliary code 7A041013 free disk space may be insufficient Ensure that there is enough free disk space available and try again If this message appears with auxiliary code 7A041008 a file in the restoration folder may be in use Check that the file is not in use and try again If this message appears with auxiliary code 7A041015 it is possible that the database file used in the Central Admin Server is being used with software other than the Central Admin Server software Stop using the database file and try again If this message appears without auxiliary code the contents of the problem are shown in the following format Problem details If this message appears frequently with auxiliary code other than those mentioned above contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider 7A040019 Backup or restore is already running Try again after finishing the backup or restoration 7A040020 Port number XXXX is already in use Port number XXXX is already in use by another application Change the settings of the application using XXXX and try restoring again 7A040021 Bac
28. Initial Use Numerical value YYYYMMDD hh mm ss Cumulative On Time Numerical value Last Audit Log Collected YYYYMMDD hh mm ss Security Update Version Syy nn 486 Item Value and Format Remarks Error Status 0 No When the 1 Yes Include Operating Status 0 Unreported Unregistered detailed 1 Offline ScAnngi 3 Free information 4 In use check box is selected Installed Options Serial Number 487 Appendix C Root Certification Authority This appendix provides an explanation of root certification authority 488 Root Certification Authority List SSL Secure Socket Layer encrypted communication may be used by the scanner for user authentication and save operations to the FTP server or a SharePoint folder With SSL trust certificates are exchanged to authenticate the communication opponents The following root certificate authorities are pre registered in the scanner but further root certificates may be imported For details about importing certificates refer to 4 5 6 Managing Certificates page 100 Valid until Issuer YYYY MM DD CA 1 2019 3 11 Certiposte Classe A Personne 2018 6 24 Certiposte Serveur 2018 6 24 Certisign Autoridade Certificadora AC2 2018 6 27 Certisign Autoridade Certificadora AC4 2018 6 27 Certisign Autoridade Certificadora AC1S 2018 6
29. Menu Tool Menu i Scanner Ciintral Admin Console 10 234 217 134 Exit Q About Ya Disconnect D Help Scanner Central Admin Server Settings Event Log Config List Operation Monitor Admin Operations Scanners Registered Unregistered Consumable Alerts 0 0 0 0 r Scanner Updates S Side Update Stat Update Type Server Side Data cannes een hears Zs Targeted Finished Pending Failed System Updates None 0 0 0 0 Add in Installs Available a 0 0 0 Scanner Settings None 0 0 a 0 lob Mode Settings None _ _ Events Date Time Origin Type Message lt Server gt Info 04011002 New Add in install Default has been releas lt Server gt Info 0A011016 Add in module lt Server gt Info 0A011002 New Add in install lt Server gt Info 0A011016 Add in module K lt Server gt Info 04011002 New Add in install lt Server gt Info 0A011016 Add in module Default release has been c lt Server gt Info 0A011002 New Add in install Default has been releas lt Server gt Error 7A013008 Error notification e mail could not be sent Details Error is For details about operations of each menu refer to the following Scanner Admin Operations window 5 8 Monitoring and Maintaining the Scanner Network page 260 Scanner Operation Monitor window 5 14 Viewing the Scanners Operating Status page 274 Scanner Config List window 5 7 Setting Scanner Configur
30. This scanner uses FTP over HTTP to save data in an FTP server folder via a Q proxy Specify the HTTP proxy server address for the FTP proxy server address 4 For HTTP Proxy Server set whether or not a proxy server is used for the SharePoint server connection or for the update check 5 When a proxy server is used set the address port number and exceptions 6 Press the OK button The information entered is set 118 4 8 6 Checking the Network Connection with a Ping Test Buch AdminToo Check the network connection using a ping test 1 Select Network Settings gt Basic gt Ping The Ping window appears fi Network Settings gt Basic Ping a target to check the network connection Ping Target Basic IP Address NTP Server Ping Network Status Previous Address 1 Result 2 For Address enter the IP address host name or FQDN for the server to be used to check the network connection 119 4 8 Configuring the Network Settings 3 Press the Ping button A ping test is performed and the results are displayed For details about the result refer to Checking Basic Network Operation with a Ping Test page 446 Network Settings gt Basic Basic Ping a target to check the network connection Ping Target IP Address Aadress n Result NTP Server Pinging with 32 bytes of data Reply from bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 255
31. When the power button is pressed the scanners start up from standby mode The window displayed after a re startup varies according automatic login settings in the following way f automatic login is enabled the operation window is displayed f automatic login is disabled the login window in displayed For window transitions refer to Using the Power Button page 59 1 Select System Settings gt Login Settings gt Standby Mode The Standby Mode window appears System Settings gt Login Settings Login Settings Login Settings Standby Mode Admin Password Set the standby and logout wait times Logout after 5min Standby after 15min Previous Cancel 110 For Logout after select the desired time before automatic logout For Standby after select the desired time before switching to standby mode Ifthe Never is selected for Logout after the selected time for Standby after is used as the wait time before switching to standby mode Ifa time other than Never is selected set a Standby after time that is longer than the Logout after time Press the OK button The scanner is set to first standby and then automatically log out after the specified times 111 4 7 Configuring the Login Related Settings 4 7 3 Changing the Admin Password REg AdminToo If a password is lost or forgotten login is not possible Manage passwords carefully If the passw
32. cccccceceseseeeseeeseseeseeseeteneeeeeeete 173 E Viewing the User Log Details 2000 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 173 E Downloading the User Logs in CSV Format 2 174 E Clearing the User LogS 2 0 c ccscccceeeceeeceeeteeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeete 174 4 14 5 Managing the System LOG ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettttaeeeeees 175 E Viewing the System Log Details 20 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 E Downloading the System Log in CSV Format 176 E Clearing the System Log ceccececeeeeseetteeedeeeeeeeeets 176 Managing the User Data Store and System SettiN S iiie epp iaa aa aa ieee aaeeei Aaii i 177 4 15 1 Maintaining the User Data Store eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 177 E Backing up the User Data Store i eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 178 E Restoring the User Data Store 20 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 180 E Clearing the User Data Store oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 180 4 15 2 Maintaining the System SettingS ee eee 181 E Downloading the System Settings in CSV Format 181 E Backing up System Settings 2 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 182 E Restoring the System Settings 20 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 E Resetting Factory Defaults 00 00 0000 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 184 4 16 4 17 Maintaining the System ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 185 4 16 1 Updating the Scanner s System Software c eee 185 4 16 2 Checking for New Updates cccceeeeeeeeee eee
33. file Scanner_user_20101231_ 120030 3 For Date Format select a date format 4 For Delimiter select a delimiter 5 Press the Preview button The specified file name format is displayed to the right of the Preview button 6 Check the file name format 7 Press the OK button The file name format is set 141 4 11 Setting the Fax Server 4 11 Setting the Fax Server E Giintoa Ragan Set the fax server RightFax 1 Select Network Settings gt Fax gt Fax Server gt The Fax Server window appears Network Settings gt Fax Enter the e mail address for the fax server Fax Server e Mail Address po Previous Cancel 2 Enter a monitored fax server RightFax e mail address If the fax server setting is not required leave the field blank For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 3 Press the OK button gt The fax server is set 142 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data The following folders can be set as the folders for saving scanned data Network Folder FTP Server Folder SharePoint Folder 4 12 1 Setting the Network Folders Sue mno CERA A list of network folders may be set as Save targets for scanned data Any accessible file server folder can be specified as a network folder Up to 100 network folders and FTP server folders can be added For details about setting FTP server fo
34. page 251 items in the Configuration from file column marked Yes are replaced and those marked with are left as they are If the same MAC address or scanner name does not exist the imported scanner configuration information will be added E Exporting Scanner Configuration This section describes how to export scanner configuration to a file 1 Press the Config List button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Config List window appears 2 Press the Export Config button A window to confirm whether or not to export the scanner configuration appears 3 Select scanner information to be exported and press the OK button The File Download dialog box appears 4 Press the Save button The Save As dialog box appears 5 Specify the export destination Scanner configuration is exported to the specified destination For details about the format of the scanner configuration file to be exported refer to B 2 2 Scanner Configuration File Format for Exporting page 485 255 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration mM Adding Scanner Configuration This section describes how to add scanner configuration 1 2 oe a 8 9 Press the Config List button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Config List window appears Press the New button The Edit Scanner Details window appears Edit Scanner Details Enter the scanner details then click the O
35. 10 If Save is selected for the job item in Step 6 perform settings related to saving For details about setting values other than those for a Save process results file refer to 6 7 Saving the Scanned Data to a Network Folder page 344 4 4 Save X Delete This Item Insert New Item Save Settings Folder Alias Network Folder Browse Network Path User Name File Server Authentication Password Save as Scanner Name MMddyyyyhhmmss001 Name Format Overwrite Same Name N Ye Files No es Save process results file No Yes 5 l OK Cancel Process results files are formatted as follows Process results files are in an XML format Process results files use the UTF 8 character set Process results files contain the following output Item Value ResultFileVersion V1 0 ScannerName Scanner name User User Date Save completion date Time Save completion time Result Save process results ResultCode Result code ResultDescription Result details Pages Number of saved pages SheetCount_Job Number of sheets to be scanned set by the job SheetCount_User Number of sheets to be scanned set by the user SheetCount_Scan Actual number of scanned sheets FileName Saved file name s Multiple files Path Saved file path name Press the Browse button to set the network folder from the Folder List V
36. 4 8 7 Checking the Network Operating Status page 121 Follow each action described below The information shown is all valid E Action None Network connection is working properly E Action If DHCP is not used Check that the IP Address setting is correct if DHCP is used Check that physical network connection to the DHCP server is functioning correctly The server may not be operating normally or the DHCP settings restricted number of leases or MAC address validation may be causing invalid IP addresses to be assigned Check the DHCP server The information shown is valid but pinging indicates that the network connection is not functioning normally E Action In 4 8 7 Checking the Network Operating Status page 121 change Link Speed Duplex Mode from Auto Negotiation to a fixed mode If the problem persists refer to Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address page 451 for further solutions 448 mM Checking the NTP Server Settings by Synchronizing the System Time On the NTP Server window press the Sync Time button to check if the system time can be synchronized After pressing the Sync Time button follow each action described below according to the message that is shown The messages and their corresponding actions are as follows System time has been successfully synchronized E Action None System time synchronization failed E Action Try the following Ch
37. 6 9 Setting the Scan Options When PDF format is selected select whether or not to use High Compression for Color PDF mode When High Compression for Color PDF is selected characters and backgrounds on the document are compressed separately In order to do this the file size of the document that mostly consists of text characters becomes smaller while keeping the quality of the characters as they are However note the following Photographs or pictures are recognized as background and compressed at a high rate causing degradation in the scanned image Thus this mode is not appropriate for scanning photographs or other graphical materials The contrast of the image may become higher 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Save tab 2 Press the File Format button The File Format window appears 3 Selecta file format ror File Format Set the file format of output files JPEG format is incompatible with the Auto and Black amp White KE color modes If PDF format is selected Adobe Reader 4 0 or later is required to view the created PDF file This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected format is displayed to the right of the File Format button 370 6 9 8 Searchable PDF When the file format is PDF the scanned data can be converted to a searchable PDF by automatically recognizing character strings contained in the document Inthe following documen
38. Audit Logs aeee eeaeee teintean kennar estes 278 5 16 3 File Format of Audit LOGS eeeeeeeeeeeenseeserrrerrrerrrreereseseeee 279 Maintaining Central Admin Server Settings 281 5 17 1 Backing Up Central Admin Server Settings 281 5 17 2 Restoring Central Admin Server Settings cere 283 5 17 3 Obtaining Technical Support on the Central Admin Server 284 5 17 4 Migrating Data to an Updated Version of the Central Admin Server SOMWALS s c25ich iain ie asbeedash ds Aine ia a okt eles 285 MGESSAGCS xiii r a aaa raaa E aa a edanaren a aiaa 287 5 18 1 Central Admin Console Messages 287 5 18 27 Event Logai a a A E E 288 E System Event Logi eccei cece stenhcesusevertteenScuntdeuat ue trieta 288 5 18 3 Backup Restore Command Messages ceeeeeeeees 290 E information s2xcess sk eae kc es ces Ate ek ee ee eae 290 OF ETO Sit Aa tieid a a eo 290 5 18 4 Audit Log Export Command Messages 295 Chapter 6 Regular User Operations cccsceceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 296 6 1 Loading Documents ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeees 297 6 1 1 How to Load Documenis san stiainadeinec tote oe tet 297 6 1 2 Loading Documents Using a Carrier Sheet eee 300 6 2 Using LCD Touch Panel Windows Regular User 303 6 2 1 Main Menu Window cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 303 6 2 2 Job Menu Window cccccccceeecceeee
39. Download button Download Network Scanner User Editor Version 1 The Network Scanner User Editor requires OS Windows R XP SP3 or later Windows Vista R SP1 or later Windows R 7 Windows Server R 2003 SP2 or later Windows Server R 2008 Microsoft R NET Framework 2 0 SP2 or later Microsoft R NET Framework 3 0 SP2 or later or Microsoft R NET Framework 3 5 SP1 or later Memory 32MB or more Disk space 64MB or more Attention NET Framework is required for use of this tool therefore confirm that it has been installed If not already installed a message will appear telling you to install NET Framework from the Microsoft Web site When installing INET Framework at least 280MB of additional free disk space is required Downloading is not possible while a scanner operation is in process The File Download dialog box appears 500 6 Press the Run button Do you want to run or save this file 3 Name UserEditorInstall msi Type Windows Installer Package MB From While files from the Intemet can be useful this file type can potentially ham your computer f you do not trust the source do not run or save this software What s the risk If INET Framework is not installed a confirmation window for NET Framework installation appears Press the Yes button to install NET Framework and then try again from Step 1 7 Press the Next button H Network Scanne
40. File Names A page 156 Save SharePoint Folder SharePoint Folder N page 153 File Names A page 156 Save Print Network Printer N page 159 N Necessary A Advisable Not required 1 Only necessary if connecting to an LDAP server 72 73 Chapter 4 Administrator Operations LCD Touch Panel and Admin Tool This chapter provides an explanation of administrator operations setting up and managing the scanner via the scanner s LCD touch panel or via the network interface using the Admin Tool The same operations may also be performed via the scanner settings edit window and the job mode edit window of the Central Admin Console For details about the Central Admin Console windows refer to Chapter 5 Administrator Operations Central Admin Console page 226 AA WV OWS wi cain E ATA E laulu tuieenteneaunuoubbeneanainis 75 4 2 Administr tor LO GUM si ccnsadatwsecsincatsiniedveniwdindeisienduiweasnivieniicnendebebinkteiecnddueendoundedinenths 78 4 3 Setting the System Settings with the Installation Wizard on the LCD Touch Panel oeiee una btw aaa eana Eao e aE aaa anaa aeaa 90 4 4 Setting the Setting Mode for the LCD Touch Panel cccccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 92 4 5 Configuring the SY Ste Ml cadaccsesiesscconiinnasaatennneeeneducadeantyiatinaanies vectesdnesdaatenseditnaneemince 94 4 6 Setting the Scan Options cieiicssscdsceccena
41. File Size Large A Small ualit High Compression Only for the PDF File Format High Compression for Color PDF is incompatible with 600dpi resolution High Compression for Color PDF is incompatible with the Grayscale color mode This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected rate is displayed to the right of the Compression button 380 When the High Compression for Color PDF button is pressed characters and M their backgrounds on a document are detected separately and only the backgrounds are compressed For a text based document the resulting file size can be smaller while the characters remain clear However note the following Photographs or pictures are recognized as background and compressed at a high rate causing degradation in the scanned image Thus this mode is not appropriate for scanning photographs or other graphical materials The contrast of the image may become higher If High Compression for Color PDF is selected according to the type of document the file size may be larger than if a standard compression rate is used Documents with many photographs or figures and only a few characters Complex layout documents with multiple columns Documents which have a background pattern behind characters For documents with many characters scanned at 300 dpi resolution a smaller file size than that of High Compression for Color PDF is possible 381 6 9 Settin
42. For Monitor Connection Timeout select whether or not to monitor the connection timeout To monitor the connection timeout in the Connection Timeout input field enter the timeout time for connecting to the SMTP server 6 For Split Mails set whether to send split e mails 7 For Segment Size enter the maximum size for splitting an e mail 137 4 10 Configuring the e Mail Related Settings 8 Set the Maximum Attachment Size for e mails total data size when sending an e mail in the SMTP server Set this value so as not to exceed the value of the message size restriction set 9 For Address Warning Limit set the maximum number of addresses to which e mail can be sent without confirmation If the number of recipient addresses specified for an e mail is then larger than this value a warning dialog will be shown to prevent inadvertent transmission of a mass e mailing 10 Press the Advanced button The window for setting the SMTP authentication and other details appears bea Network Settings gt e Mail SMTP Authentication ft e e Mail A SMTP Server Authentication Method E umos Tauri iocm O Aum uan File Names Authorized User e Mail Login User Q oO wn Password The Admin Tool does not contain the Advanced button Set whether or not to A perform SMTP authentication set the user for SMTP authentication and other settings on the same window
43. Info Scan to SharePoint Off Download Clear All Refresh Details 2 Select the log you wish to view The details of the selected log are displayed Pressing the OK button returns to the System Log window The Date format specified on the Date Time window is used For details refer to 4 5 4 Setting the Date Time page 98 The information of Error and Warning in Type will be sent to the e mail address set in 4 16 6 Setting the Destination for Alert Notifications page 194 175 4 14 Viewing the Scanner Details E Downloading the System Log in CSV Format AdminToo When downloaded to a computer the file will contain CSV format data The file is saved in the following form Date Time Type Message The default file name is SystemLog csv 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt System Log The System Log window appears 2 Press the Download button The File Download dialog box appears 3 Press the Save button 7 Make sure there is enough free space on the disk where it is to be saved before pressing the Save button If there is not enough free disk space an incomplete file may be saved The Save As dialog box appears 4 Enter a file name and specify a folder for saving the file The file will contain CSV format data 5 Press the Save button A file containing CSV format data is saved E Clearing
44. Initial Use 10 10 Cumulative On Time Hours 5 000 Last Audit Log Collected Back When the Admin Tool is started up by pressing the Network Scanner Admin Tool Start button scanners are identified by their IP addresses If the scanner information includes multiple scanners with the same IP address scanners which are not to be targeted may be connected When the Network Scanner Admin Tool Start button is pressed if the scanner is not started starting the scanner by Wake On LAN and connecting with the Admin Tool will take a few minutes If a Connection error occurs and the window returns to the window for specifying a connection try re connecting 259 5 8 Monitoring and Maintaining the Scanner Network 5 8 Monitoring and Maintaining the Scanner Network The registration status of scanners the status of various scanner processes and the event log can be viewed 1 Press the Admin Operations button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Admin Operations window appears 2 View the state of the scanner network US Scanner Central Admin Console 10 234 217 134 aa gt Exit Disconnect Q About B Help Scanner Admin Operations Scanner Central Admin Server Settings Admin Operations Operation Monitor Config List Event Log Scanner Network Scanners Registered Unregistered Consumable Alerts 0 0 0 0 m Scanner Updates Scanner Side Update Status
45. Keyboard Layout Operation Numeric and symbols layout L223 Press Alphabetic layout Press i Switching the upper lower case Press the Caps or Shift button Pressing the Caps button enables you to enter multiple characters continuously under the switched state After entering a character the switched state is still retained Pressing the Shift button enables you to enter only one character under the switched state After entering a character the switched state returns to the previous state 495 Appendix E Editing Using User Editor This appendix describes how to edit mail address books and local accounts using User Editor A regular user can contact the administrator for details about settings of the User Editor E 1 Whats User Editor oisin sti icccitidscwwedinvenenenneciieic bien munanan aaan aaiae Naaa eaaa 497 E 2 System Requirements wie sicdecaxentsucctnnncaennatinbetiwanidniadaveddewrnapesandunbeadmadineiedenosts 498 E3 Pre settingS wien cis este edaacisiv enc tieseericnedrtuevicientuindeniiiemmaneaderpuinvehekstiedancnedmacaenivies 499 E 4 Windows of User Editor ccc ciiccsisestecstencsesecnanucsecnsacdansccnneessasinrceaamnnsdaarvaceannenntocinn 503 E 5 Starting Exiting User Editor sn ssciasisencavencnsavvacscnndrersnsanstsarsianccsaniinedarsaedinaedsansina 505 E 6 Viewing the Mail Address Book Local ACCOUNMS cccccsesseeeeeseteeeeeeeneees 506 E 7 Editing an e Mail Target in the
46. Other LDAP Server User Name Format Authentication Process uid cn Authenticate the user login name uid Example user Authenticate the user login name cn Example user For users registered in a local account Authenticate the specified user login name for a local account saved in the scanner 7 If a UPN suffix is entered for a user name for automatic login it is ignored Even if entered it is not used For Guest Account select whether or not logging with the guest account is possible Press the OK button The information entered is set 109 4 7 Configuring the Login Related Settings 4 7 2 Setting the Time to Standby Mode The scanner can be set to automatically log out and then enter a standby state after specified periods of non use For any window after regular user login if no operations have been performed for the specified Logout after period of time the scanner automatically logs the user out The scanner does not logout while the following operations are ongoing Scanning documents e Mailing a scan Faxing a scan Printing a scan Saving a scan Automatic login is enabled In the Login window or the window which is shown after the scanner is logged in by a regular user if no operations are performed for the specified Standby after period of time the scanner enters standby mode the LCD touch panel is switched off when the scanner enters standby mode
47. Setting the Central Admin Server Operating environment for the Central Admin Server is set up by changing the administrator password and setting network and LDAP server E Setting the Operating Environment 1 Click the Scanner Central Admin Server Settings link on the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window appears Scanner Central Admin Server Settings Change Administrator Password User Roaming Data Select amp Clear m Scanner Registration l Automatically add new scanners to the Central Admin configuration when they are discovered j Network Connection Use HTTPS to communicate with the Scanner Central Admin Console Scanner Central Admin Console Port Number 10444 Use HTTPS to communicate with scanners Scanner Communication Port Number 20444 Maximum Connections 0 Wake On LAN Port Number 443 Tries 3 Interval 1 sec Screen Settings Default Screen Admin Operations Screen Refresh Interval 6 sec LDAP Server Enable LDAP searches uid SharePoint Server Connection Settings Use a proxy server for SharePoint server connections Scanner Shared Folder Service Port Number 30444 Software Update Time Period Restrictions Always allow Never allow Only allow in the following time period oo 0 j oo oo Operation Monitor Check Operating Status Operating S
48. Start menu point to Administrative Tools and select Internet Information Services IIS Manager 2 Show the Web sites for importing the certificate Certificates are imported to the following Web sites AmConsole AmService 3 Right click the Web site and select Properties 4 On the Directory Security tab select Server Certificate in the Secure communications frame The Welcome to the Web Server Certificate Wizard appears Follow the instructions displayed on the window For Windows Server 2008 set the fingerprint for the imported certificate in the CertHash xml file The CertHash xml installation path is as follows Central_Admin_Server_installation_folder AmManager Sys CertHash xml An example for setting the fingerprint for the certificate cc ce a0 66 e3 9c 9b 2a 65 45 03 a3 c4 f4 e5 e6 ad ec df 9f is as follows lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt lt IISPolicy gt lt CertHash gt cc ce a0 66 e3 9c 9b 2a 65 45 03 a3 c4 f4 e5 e6 ad ec df 9f lt CertHash gt lt IISPolicy gt 237 5 4 Pre settings for Using Central Admin Console 5 4 2 Installing the Central Admin Console Install the Central Admin Console in a computer 1 Perform Step 1 to Step 3 of Installing the Admin Tool page 82 gt The download window appears 2 Press the Next button for Central Admin Console Network Scanner Admin Tool Next Network Scanner U
49. The size of a marked section is out of the supported range Marking lines are not drawn in an ordinary way such as when a line is slanted Multiple marked sections are located close to each other The color of the highlight pen is too pale or the color has faded ScanSnap o inthe following documents highlighted character strings cannot be set as a When applying markings on two or more character strings the marked sections must be separated from each other by at least 5 mm 0 2 in If marked sections are too close to each other multiple sections may be recognized as a single section In the following case other characters close to marked sections may be set as a keyword When a marking is drawn over another line upper or lower In the following cases characters not highlighted by a marked section may be set as a keyword Catalogs pamphlets and other color documents Documents containing colored characters figures pictures tables lines or other elements Documents containing marked areas other than those containing character strings to be set as keywords Tainted documents Documents containing sections framed by a highlight pen If setting a keyword is not successful improving image scanning quality may help Keywords for PDF files can be checked from the Adobe Acrobat document properties menu 374 To automatically set a keyword for a PDF file change the settings as shown below Conversion to searchable P
50. button The Jobs List window appears ob Sequences ob Menus Job Groups Jobs List Job Name Comment Filter Conditions Find New 7 2 Press the New button gt The Job Details window appears 3 Set the Job Name and Comment 201 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence 4 Press to the left of Common Settings and set the operations for when a job is processed 4 Common Setings Title E Message Scanner NamejMMddyyyyhhmmss OYes Expected Count a sheets 1 999 DAllow per Job adjustment f one of the Job Items is a Print then larger Expected Count values will be reduced to a maximum of 100 No Z Confirm the Scan Count Proceed to next Job Item Terminate the Job Pause on Job Progress screen Close the Job Progress screen The layout of the message displayed in the message screen settings and the actual Message Screen layout in the scanner may differ Check the layout in the scanner and then enter the title and message in the Message Screen Press the Name Format button to specify a Common File Name on the File Names Common window Sub folder Name Format is enabled only when scanned data is saved to a folder For details about setting values refer to Setting a File Name Format for When Saving Scanned Data page 156 202 5 Press P to the left of Scan Setti
51. for e Mail Fax Print Save Scan to SharePoint are saved for each user and will be used each time that user logs in For details refer to the sections from 6 9 1 Carrier Sheet page 362 onward The selected setting is displayed to the right of each button The settings are saved for each login user Settings changed after the previous logout are shown by red characters When the Scan Settings window is opened from the Send Fax or Print window the Save tab is not displayed 356 Changing these scan options may influence other scan settings items Setting an option may cause other option settings to become invalid Other option settings may cause option settings to become invalid Scan option settings may be influenced in the following ways Tab Item Settings which become invalid Conditions which make settings invalid Basic Carrier Sheet Paper Size Resolution 600dpil Brightness Contrast Background Removal Multifeed detection Color Mode Auto Paper Size long page mode JPEG as output file format Dropout Color Color Grayscale Dropout Color High Compression for Color PDF Marker Index of the text recognition settings Black amp White JPEG as output file format Compression Marker Index of the text recognition settings 357 6 9 Setting the Scan Options Settings which Conditions which
52. in Yes Time Hours hours Last Audit Log Last date and time audit log 1 1 Collected was collected Security Update Security update version Yes Version Error Status Whether or not an error occurred in the scanner Operating Scanner operating status Yes Status Installed A list of installed options Yes Options Serial Number Scanner serial number Yes 1 253 Automatically set from the Central Admin Sever 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration E Importing Scanner Configuration Scanner configuration can be registered for several scanners at once by importing the scanner configuration file For details about the importable data settings allowed in a scanner configuration file refer to B 2 1 Scanner Configuration File Format for Importing page 484 Also note that imported scanner configuration data can be updated at once for the scanners be imported amp Scanner information other than that contained in the scanner configuration cannot 1 Press the Config List button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Config List window appears Scanner Config List Admin Operations Operation Monitor Event Log Select scanners to be reviewed or modified Import Config Export Config m Filter Conditions Scanner Name IP Address Model Settings Group Add in Group Comment Status A Al All All Re
53. lt Back From here on after follow the instructions displayed on the window When Installation complete is displayed the installation is complete Press the Close button After installation the User Editor can be started by selecting the Start menu gt All Programs gt Network Scanner gt Network Scanner User Editor E 3 2 Uninstalling User Editor This section uses Windows Vista as an example Uninstall User Editor from Control Panel Programs Programs and Features in the computer in which it is installed Close the User Editor before uninstalling If the User Editor is uninstalled while still open normal operation of the open User Editor is not guaranteed 502 E 4 Windows of User Editor The User Editor window contains the Address Book tab and Local Account tab The following shows the details of each tab Address Book tab This tab page is used for editing the e mail targets in the mail address book Menu bar Toolbar 3 Network Scanner Ufer Editor Address Book Local Account File F _Edit E View V Address Book A _ Help H amp First Name Last Name E mail Address a amsa Status bar Group e mail address list Group list 503 Local Account tab This tab page is used for editing the local accounts saved in the scanner Menu bar Toolbar File F Edit E Local Account L Help H ra 4 User
54. network tree tence lea Aet hee ctan uae 164 registering an FTP server folder 149 regular user o seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 296 303 regular user right eessen 37 regular user settings overview 305 removing FTP server folder aaae 151 network folder eseese 147 network printer esseeeseeeeeereee 169 renaming network folder neee 147 network printer esseeeseereeeeeee 168 replacement cycle sessies 426 replacing pad ASS aoe rencdoe iis eek iens aaas 428 pans oe cas Santas Aas 426 Pickroller rieira a 430 required scanner function settings 69 requirements for User Editor 498 resetting entire system to factory defaults 184 factory defaults ooo eee 184 system settings to factory defaults 184 usage Counter assener 171 resolution cecsceyvictenttcebleseiassbcietheewiahices 366 resolution setting eseese 366 restoring Central Admin Server settings 283 system settings a 183 user data store eeen 180 root certification authority oo ee 488 root certification authority list 489 rotating scanned data 399 S SAM account name aeee 132 SAVE reann E Wane E e 344 saving mail address book ow ees 519 toa tolder eirese nieas 344 SCALING desicncckdes tay st reatvientwenseexcnadaceds 337 SCAM DUON ss itesectececnesestens R 34 61 SCANIMNOUG mirerien i ak 367 540 SCAN Settings eeeecceecese
55. or edit the Jobs List Job Details Set the scan options message screen and operations after scanning for a selected job Setting a job menu For details refer to 4 17 3 Setting a Job Menu page 210 Job Menus List View add to or edit the Job Menus List Job Menu Layout Set the job button for the selected job menu Setting a job group For details refer to 4 17 4 Setting a Job Group page 216 Job Groups List View add to or edit the Job Groups List Settings For Selected Group s Set the assigned job menus initial post login menu and job group members for the selected job group 199 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence Processing a job For details refer to 6 14 Processing a Process the job Job page 405 When a user logs in the assigned job menu is displayed and a job can be selected and processed Before processing a job set on the job mode edit window of the Central Admin Console the job mode settings set on the Job Mode Settings window must be released 200 4 17 2 Setting a Job Sequence AdminTool RA Set the scan options and job item e Mail Fax Print Save to be processed together as a job sequence Up to 1 000 job sequences can be set E Adding a Job Sequence This section describes how to add a job sequence 1 Press the Job Sequences
56. press the Reset button for Reset system settings to factory defaults and clear logs page 184 from 4 15 2 Maintaining the System Settings page 181 The user data store may contain private information such as e mail addresses or fax Q numbers so care should be taken when managing such data 471 Appendix A Paper Specifications This appendix describes the paper size and quality requirements for ensuring that the ADF operates correctly when scanning documents 472 A 1 Paper Size The following paper sizes can be scanned with this scanner Width 52 to 216 mm 2 1 to 8 5 in Length 74 to 355 6 mm 2 9 to 14 0 in When Custom paper size setting is used a page length of up to 3 048 mm 120 in is allowed for document scanning 473 A 2 Paper Quality Paper Type The following paper types are recommended for use with the ADF Woodfree paper Wood containing paper When documents of a paper type other than those listed above are scanned perform the test scan with a same paper type first to check if the document can be scanned without problem Paper Weight The following paper weights can be used with the ADF 52 to 127 g m 14 to 34 Ib For A8 and business card size 127 g m only Precautions The following documents may not scan successfully Documents of non uniform thickness e g envelopes and documents with attachments Wrinkled or curled documents See the following hint Folde
57. the following symbols are also used in this manual This symbol alerts operators to particularly important information Be sure to read this information This symbol alerts operators to helpful advice regarding operations This symbol is used to indicate information about administrator operations Admin Each operation method is indicated by the following symbols Touch Administrator operating via the LCD touch panel AdminTool Administrator operating via the network interface using the Network Scanner Admin Tool Central Admin Console Administrator operating via the network interface using the Scanner Central Admin Console This symbol is used to indicate information about regular user operations ser Arrow Symbols in This Manual Right arrow symbols gt are used to connect icons or menu options you should select in succession Example Select the Start menu gt Computer Screen Examples in This Manual Screenshots in this manual are used according to guidelines provided by Microsoft Corporation The screen examples in this manual are subject to change without notice in the interest of product improvement The screen examples used in this manual are of Windows Vista The actual windows and operations may differ depending on the operating system that you are using If the actual screen differs from the screen examples in this manual operate by following the actual displayed screen
58. xxx xxx xxx xxx format where xxx is a value from 0 to 255 Fora host name or FQDN up to 255 characters can be entered For Port Number enter the number of the port to be used for communication with the scanner within the range of 1 to 65535 The default value is 80 Select the Use HTTPS check box to use HTTPS for communication from the scanner For User Name enter the name of the user to login to the scanner For Password enter the password for the user to login to the scanner Connect as a user that can login to the scanner v To edit a mail address book login as a regular user To edit local accounts login as an administrator admin or an administrator of a local account created with User Editor For a new local account login as an administrator admin 4 Select the Open button Mail address books or local accounts appear 506 E Loading from a File Load mail address books or local accounts from a file in the following ways 1 Select Address Book tab to load mail address books Select Local Account tab to load local accounts 2 Perform either of the following Select the File menu and then select Load from File Press the Load from File button on the toolbar The dialog box for opening a file appears 3 Select the file and press the Load button Mail address books or local accounts appear 507 E File Format of Mail Address Book Loaded from a File T
59. 118 150 12 Press the OK button User authentication may be required to access the FTP server When the user name and password are valid the FTP Server Folder window appears again and the FTP server folder is set Select a readable and writable FTP server folder 7 mM Changing the FTP Server Folder Settings 1 Select Network Settings gt FTP Server Folder gt FTP Server Folder gt The FTP Server Folder window appears 2 Select an FTP server folder to be changed 3 Press the Edit button The window for editing the network folder appears 4 Change the settings A The FTP Path cannot be changed 5 Press the OK button The changed settings are set E Removing an FTP Server Folder 1 Select Network Settings gt FTP Server Folder gt FTP Server Folder The FTP Server Folder window appears 2 Select an FTP server folder that is to be removed from the folder list 3 Press the Remove button The window for removing the FTP server folder appears 4 Confirm the details of the FTP server folder that is to be removed are correct and press the Yes button The selected FTP server folder is removed from the network folders list 151 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data Viewing the FTP Server Folder Details Select Network Settings gt FTP Server Folder gt FTP Server Folder gt The FTP Server Folder window appears Select the desired
60. 152 4 12 3 Setting the SharePoint Folders 4 ecsscseeeseeeeeeees 153 E Renaming a SharePoint Folder Display Name 154 E Removing a SharePoint Folder 0 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 155 4 12 4 Setting a File Name Format for When Saving Scanned ARs ccd ca tce e Sienceec oh tics cet l eee duane A E S ruseededeetaeals 156 4 13 4 14 4 15 Setting the Network Printers ccccceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 159 E Checking the Printer Drivers ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 160 E Setting the Printer Properties 2 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 161 E Registering a Network Printer Network Tree 164 E Registering a Network Printer Network Path 167 E Renaming a Network Printer cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 168 E Removing a Network Printer cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 E Viewing the Printer Details 00000 cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 169 Viewing the Scanner Details c ssssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 4 14 1 Viewing the System Status 0 0 0 0 eee cece eect eeeeeeeeettttaeeees 170 4 14 2 Viewing the Usage Status ccceseeeeeeeeseeeeeseseeeneeeeeeee 171 E Viewing the Status of Consumable Parts 171 E Resetting the Usage Counter 000 0 ee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 171 4 14 3 Viewing the Status of Installed Options eee 172 4 14 4 Managing the User LOG 22
61. Admin Server ccesssssesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeennss 245 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 251 5 8 Monitoring and Maintaining the Scanner Network ccccccccssesseeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 260 5 9 Updating the System icine tone cdernrietensnnewccieaselcanatenacenierdedenciildedanitieiancarsdsaeubelalaniens 261 5 10 Installing an PAU iicinsted scinecnncernseacieus tien sadcausatamentududaaxeseiullecdanetieviueacledeanvacielaaiend 263 5 11 Updating the Scanner SettingS cccessesseseeeeeeeeeseseeeneeeeeeeeeeeesseeceeaeeeeeensnees 266 5 12 Setting the Job MOG ivctessstcncicttercasustiveseinnneiconsciwdedeannedinlcdal cciemersaenntonusenenieaens 269 5 13 Viewing the Update Status Lists 0 cssssseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenees 272 5 14 Viewing the Scanners Operating Status ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenenees 274 5 15 Viewing Event Log scsiiiisanwesiscninactanastassenianerneianncnn cataiaen chtanansincnsanananneanentananianie 275 5 16 Collecting and Exporting Audit LOGS ccccccseeeseeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenees 277 5 17 Maintaining Central Admin Server Settings cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 281 5 18 Messages eet ten veces venansendiuinwencan sve neawesenueicariubded Ene auaa aaa Gaa E aaia sUn 287 226 5 1 Function List The functions that can be used in the Ce
62. Administrator login when Auto Login is set to On Changing password when logged in with a local account 1 On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button The Maintenance window appears Maintenance ES Edit e Mail Addresses Roller Cleaning Scan Test Edit Fax Numbers Administrator Login Change Password Cancel 2 Perform maintenance operation by pressing the following buttons Edit e Mail Addresses button The e Mail Address Book window appears e Mail addresses can be added edited or deleted For details refer to the following 6 4 2 Adding an e Mail Target to the e Mail Address Book page 317 6 4 3 Editing an e Mail Target in the e Mail Address Book page 321 6 4 4 Deleting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book page 323 Roller Cleaning button The Roller Cleaning window appears You can check the way the feed rollers and eject rollers should be rotated For details refer to Feed rollers x 2 and eject rollers x 2 page 422 403 6 13 Maintenance Edit Fax Numbers button The Fax Number List window appears Fax numbers can be added edited or deleted For details refer to the following 6 5 2 Adding a Contact to the Fax Number List page 329 6 5 3 Editing a Contact in the Fax Number List page 331 6 5 4 Deleting a Contact from the Fax Number List page 332 Scan Test button A scan test is performed Scanned data ca
63. Between Different Versions of the Central Admin Server Software The following shows the compatibility between different versions of the Central Admin Server software for backing up or restoring data The version of the Central Admin Server software can be checked on the Central Admin Console login window Central Admin Server Central Admin Server Software Version for Software Version for Compatibility Data Backup Data Restoration 3 0 x 3 0 x Yes 3 0 x or earlier No 2 0 x or earlier 3 0 x Yes 1 2 3 1 When Central Admin Server settings are restored from a previous version of the Central Admin Server default values are set for items newly added in that of later version 2 To back up data use the AmBackup exe command from version 3 0 x of the Central Admin Server For details refer to 5 17 4 Migrating Data to an Updated Version of the Central Admin Server Software page 285 3 If the event log of the previous version is shown on the Event Details window of the new version the IP address information is not shown 525 F 4 Event Source Name Output by Central Admin Server The event source name of the event log output by the Central Admin Server is as follows Central Admin Server Version Event Source Name 3 0 x Scanner Central Admin Server 2 0 x or earlier iScanner Central Admin 526 527 Appendix G Glossary 528 A4
64. Central Admin set to Off for target scanners To include the scanner in the Central Admin management again re register the scanner on the Central Admin Server 258 E Viewing the Scanner List This section describes how to view scanner configuration 1 Press the Config List button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Config List window appears 2 Click the link of the scanner whose configuration you want to view The Scanner Details window appears 3 View the scanner information details Scanner Details Back Event Log J Network Scanner Admin Tool Start l r Networking Info Scanner Name 150008 Model N1800 Serial Number IP Address Port Number 49930 Use HTTPS No MAC Address dete Comment Info Last Modified 10 22 8 56 50 AM m Software Status System Updates Apply Current System Update Status NotTarget System Version Scanner Version Installed Options w Last System Update 8 1 2010 8 10 11 PM Add in Group nAdd in02 Current Add in Install Status NotTarget Add in Version Add inA 1 1 1 Last Add in Install 9 1 2010 7 11 21 PM Settings Group nSetting02 Current Scanner Settings Status NotTarget Last Scanner Settings Update 10 1 2010 9 10 13 PM r Hardware Status Operating Status Offline Error Status No Last Inventory Taken 10 22 8 56 50 AM Total Throughput Sheets 3 000 PAD ASSY Sheets 3 000 50 000 PICK ROLLER Sheets 3 000 100 000
65. Connect button The Central Admin Console login window appears 4 Enter the user name and password of the administrator fi a H IBI Scanner Central Admin Console 10 234 217 155 eit Ya Disconnec t Q About User Name Password Login J 243 5 5 Central Admin Server Login via the Central Admin Console 5 Press the Login button gt If the user is authenticated the Central Admin Console main window appears The main window shown after login can be changed For details refer to 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 Det Yq Disconnect Q About 3 Help Scanner Central Admin Server Settings Scanner Admin Operations Operation Monitor Config List Event Log Scanner Network 0 a 0 0 Scanner Updates System Updates None Add in Installs Available Scanner Settings None Job Mode Settings None lt Server gt 0A011002 New Add in install ii E Default has been releas lt Server gt 0A011016 Add in module iia mete ony eet lt Server gt 0A011002 New Add in install is aan on am o lt Server gt 0A011016 Add in module ss s mates oo aa iK lt Server gt 0A011002 New Add in install eo amoa aua ani fe lt Server gt 0A011016 Add in module iis Default release has been c lt Server gt 0A011002 New Add in install i s Default has been releas lt Server gt 7A013008 Error notification e mail could not be sent Details Error is 244 5 6
66. Document Feed Direction Set the feed direction of the document when loading onto the scanner 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Basic tab 2 Press the Document Feed Direction button The Document Feed Direction window appears 3 Select the document feed direction Document Feed Direction Set the feed direction of the document This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected feed direction is displayed to the right of the Document Feed Direction button 368 6 9 7 File Format Set the file format for the scanned data Some scan settings cannot be used for certain file formats Option PDF JPEG TIFF MTIFF Text Recognition A a PDF Password A n Compression A 1 A A 1 A 1 A Format can be used Format cannot be used 1 Can only be used if the Color Mode is Auto Grayscale or RGB Color Compression also differs for certain file formats as follows File Format Color Mode Document PDF JPEG TIFF MTIFF JPEG JPEG JPEG High Color 9 f Compression Auto for Color PDF Grayscale JPEG JPEG JPEG Black amp MMR NA MMR White Color JPEG JPEG JPEG Grayscale High RGB Col SE caor Black amp Compression G for Color PDF Color JPEG JPEG JPEG Grayscale Grayscale Black amp White Color MMR NA MMR Grayscale Black amp White Black amp White NA Not available 369
67. Download dialog box appears 3 Press the Save button Make sure there is enough free space on the disk where it is to be saved and M press the Save button If there is not enough free disk space an incomplete file may be saved The Save As dialog box appears 4 Name the file and specify where it should be saved The file will contain CSV format data 5 Press the Save button The system settings for the scanner are downloaded 181 4 15 Managing the User Data Store and System Settings E Backing up System Settings dmintoo The administrator can back up the scanner system settings Backup files can later be used to restore system settings Make backups periodically just in case The default file name is SystemSettingsFile 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Data Management gt System Settings File The System Settings File window appears Press the Backup button The File Download dialog box appears Press the Save button Make sure there is enough free space on the disk where it is to be saved and M press the Save button If there is not enough free disk space an incomplete file may be saved gt The Save As dialog box appears Name the file and specify where it should be saved The date of backup or scanner name should be used as an easy to understand file name Press the Save button The system settings are backed up Do not change the co
68. FTP server folder from the folder list Press the Details button The information for the selected FTP server folder is displayed Network Settings gt FTP Server Folder FTP Server Folder W Network folder details Folder Alias FTP Server Folder FTP Folder01 FTP Path Port Number 1 65535 File Names 24 Save User Name Password Authentication Protocol Passive Mode J a Encryption Proxy See the Proxy Server Menu Off Implicit 152 4 12 3 Setting the SharePoint Folders AdminTool CREA A list of SharePoint folders may be set as Scan to SharePoint targets for scanned data For details about setting a file name for scanned data to be saved in a SharePoint folder refer to 4 12 4 Setting a File Name Format for When Saving Scanned Data page 156 1 Select Network Settings gt SharePoint Folder gt SharePoint Folder gt The SharePoint Folder window appears Enter the SharePoint settings Scan to SharePoint On Off Scan to SharePoint Folders SharePoint Site Folders No folders set yet SharePoint Folder 2 The Scan to SharePoint option determines whether users are allowed to save scanned data in SharePoint folders 3 Specify a SharePoint server site URL in the URL field You can also press the list button to select a URL from the recently specified URLs 4 Press the Connect button A Sign In window appears Enter the user name password and dom
69. Folder gt Network Folder The Network Folder window appears Select the network folder that is to be renamed Press the Edit button The window for editing the network folder appears Enter a folder alias Press the OK button The network folder is renamed Removing a Network Folder Select Network Settings gt Network Folder gt Network Folder The Network Folder window appears Select the network folder that is to be removed from the folder list Press the Remove button The window for removing a network folder appears Confirm the details of the network folder that is to be removed are correct and press the Yes button The selected network folder is removed from the network folders list 147 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data Viewing the Network Folder Details Select Network Settings gt Network Folder gt Network Folder gt The Network Folder window appears Select the desired network folder from the folder list Press the Details button The information for the selected network folder is displayed Network Settings gt Network Folder Network Folder Network folder details Folder Alias Folder01 Network Path Network Folder File Names Save 148 4 12 2 Setting the FTP Server Folders A mn CERM A list of FTP server folders may be set as Save targets for scanned data Any FTP server folder can be specified as an FTP s
70. Format 1 Scanner Name 2 User Name 3 Date File Name Format 1 Prefix a 2 Scanner Name 3 User name 4 Date Network Folder Network Folder File Names Save lon 6 Seq Number Min 3 E Seq E Date Format Delimiter MMadyyy Previous Cancel 2 For Sub folder Name Format set a folder in which to save the scanned data Do not select a name format for a sub folder if you save the scanned data directly in the network folder FTP server folder or SharePoint folder Select a name format for a sub folder if you save the scanned data in the sub folder under the network folder FTP server folder or SharePoint folder If the specified folder does not exist it is created When multiple folder names are selected folder names are created in the following order Scanner Name User Name Date The delimiter is set according to the Delimiter setting For example for scanner name Scanner user name user date 12312010 delimiter _ the folder name is Scanner_user_12312010 3 Select a file name format When multiple file names are selected file names are created in the following order Prefix Scanner Name User Name Date Time The delimiter is set according to the Delimiter setting For example for prefix file scanner name Scanner user name user date 12312010 time 12 00 30 delimiter _ the file name is file Scanner_user_12312010_ 120030
71. Information about the number of documents that have been scanned and the status of the scanner s consumable parts pad assy or pick roller can be viewed For details about replacing consumable parts refer to 7 5 Replacing Parts page 426 E Viewing the Status of Consumable Parts 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt Usage Status The Usage Status window appears Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details Status Details v Check the consumables usage status ADF Total Throughput o Sheets sage Status PAD ASSY o 50 000 sheets System Status PICK ROLLER o 100 000 sheets Previous E Resetting the Usage Counter After part replacement the usage counter can be reset to return the part status to normal 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt Usage Status The Usage Status window appears 2 Press the Clear button for the part replaced The counter reset confirmation window appears 3 Press the OK button The counter value is reset to 0 and the Status field turns green again 171 4 14 Viewing the Scanner Details 4 14 3 Viewing the Status of Installed Options _ 42 faminto CHAA 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt Installed Options The Installed Options window appears Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details Status Details V Check when and what
72. List window when Save is selected as a job item are the network folders set on the job mode edit window Job Menus tab The setting items are the same as those set in the Job Menus tab in the job mode settings menu in the window for administrator operations For details refer to 4 17 3 Setting a Job Menu page 210 Job Groups tab The setting items are the same as those set in the Job Groups tab in the job mode settings menu in the window for administrator operations For details refer to 4 17 4 Setting a Job Group page 216 Close button Registers the entered job mode settings and returns to the Job Mode Settings window 5 In Settings Release Schedule set the schedule to release job mode settings 6 Press the Register button The entered job mode settings are registered 270 7 Press the Back button The Central Admin Console main window appears again 271 5 13 Viewing the Update Status Lists 5 13 Viewing the Update Status Lists Status details can be viewed for the following update types System Updates Add in Installs Scanner Settings 1 Press the Admin Operations button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Admin Operations window appears 2 Select the Targeted numeral link in Scanner Side Update Status The Update Status List window corresponding to the update type appears Update Status List System Updates Select target scanners and
73. Reply from bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 255 Reply from bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 255 Proxy Server Reply from bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 255 Ping statistics for Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Oms Maximum 1ms Average Oms Network Status Previous 120 4 8 7 Checking the Network Operating Status Puch faminto mM Checking the Network Status The operating status of the network can be checked The following information is shown If values are not shown the network is not working normally Refer to 8 2 Network Connection Troubleshooting page 446 and check the settings MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Server WINS Server 1 Select Network Settings gt Basic gt Network Status The Network Status window shows the status of the currently operating network connection fi Network Settings gt Basic Basic IP Address NTP Server Network Status Check the network information Network Settings MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Server WINS Server Link Speed Duplex Mode Auto Negotiation Wake On LAN Cancel Previous 121 4 8 Configuring the Network Settings If connection to LDAP server is not possible try the following steps A 1 Disconnect the LAN cable 2 Press the Shutdown button on the LCD touch panel to turn the s
74. Scan Settings User Log m User B _7 e Mail Address Book Scan Settings User Log so care should be taken when managing such data User data may contain private information such as e mail addresses or fax numbers E Backing up the User Data Store dminToo As a precaution the user data store should be backed up regularly The default file name is restored_data A User logs cannot be backed up 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Data Management gt User Data Store gt The User Data Store window appears 178 2 Press the Backup button Bulk manage user data Download the custom user data for all users Backup Select a backup file to restore from Restore Bro Clear the custom user data for all users The File Download dialog box appears 3 Press the Save button Make sure there is enough free space on the disk where it is to be saved and M press the Save button If there is not enough free disk space an incomplete file may be saved The Save As dialog box appears 4 Enter a file name and specify a folder for saving the file Use of a name that includes the scanner name and backup date is recommended 5 Press the Save button A backup copy of the user data store is saved Do not change the contents of data store backup files If changed the file may be corrupted Restoring from a co
75. Setting o n 362 Central Admin Console 67 226 238 Central Admin Console window 227 230 certificate management 100 changing FTP server folder settings 151 password oan eeeeececccccceeeasseeseceeeeeeeeaes 112 checking consumable alert status 427 network status eee 121 new updates cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 number of sheets to be scanned _ 411 USEF IOG sscssceceacesestelensicea seriinin 402 CIGANING 2a SEAE T T 417 carrier sheet iasutcthdeleleeshectidcasitiet 425 exterior of the scanner e 419 inside of the scanner eee 420 LCD touch panel eee 419 Cleaning frequency ecen 418 cleaning supplies 0 eeeeeeeeeereereeeteee 417 clearing S sSt m lO irren eiieeii ioii and 176 user data store seeen 180 USEr logs arians al teate cesta tua nenicats 174 cloning job Menu neseser 214 job sequence sisserrsrirresessereesesses 207 color mode setting eee 363 compatibility with different versions _ 522 COMPIeSSION eeeeeseeeeeeeeteeteeeee 369 380 Compression Setting s 380 configuration from file a 251 configuring settings for sending e mail 139 consumable decision accatacraaretnara years 427 contrast eneit harinni ai 384 CSW TOMAN Arsi aaa aikai 174 CUSTOM sveseeeceivieaie ie an aia aT aeaea 356 D default settings ssnnsrrireeneirrsesesses 356 deleting e mail address neee 323 fax NUMDEr saesae einat tence 332 JOD O O D aiiin
76. SharePoint a2 Scan to SharePoint Logout 303 6 2 Using LCD Touch Panel Windows Regular User 6 2 2 Job Menu Window The type of buttons displayed on the menu differs according to the job settings In the following example six jobs are set up Message a Scan a N Logout Screen Ba Viewer When a regular user belongs to multiple job groups menus and buttons to switch the Job Menu window appear as shown below Message a Sel a EA Viewer Z Logout 304 6 2 3 Regular User Settings Overview Regular users can configure the following setting items as long as these items have been enabled by the administrator Login Setting Set the scanner to automatically login without displaying the Login window when the scanner power is switched on or restarted Also set whether or not to enable login with the guest account To change these settings contact the administrator Initial Post Login Menu Set whether to display the Main Menu or Job Menu window Switch between the Main Menu and Job Menu windows or display only the Job Menu window User Roaming Data User settings can be shared between multiple scanners by allowing user data to be managed on the Central Admin Server A regular user can login on different scanners while retaining their user data The following user data can be used in roaming mode My List e Mail Address Books scan settings Name of the last network printer
77. Target from the e Mail Address Book page 313 If the e mail address book cannot be used contact the administrator Edit e Mail Address Distribution List List Name DistributionA e Mail Addresses abc example com def example com Cancel 7 Press the OK button The edited e mail address is saved in your My List address book Si My List can also be edited using User Editor For details refer to Appendix E Editing Using User Editor page 496 322 6 4 4 Deleting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book The following explains how to delete an e mail address or a distribution list from your My List e Mail targets cannot be deleted from the LDAP List 1 Open the e Mail Address Book window in either of the following ways On the Send e Mail window press LE in the e mail address field On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button then on the Maintenance window press the Edit e Mail Address button 2 Select the My List tab 3 Press the Edit e Mail Address Book button The Edit e Mail Address Book window appears 4 Select the e mail address or distribution list to be deleted 5 Press E The Delete e Mail Address window appears The following is an example window which is shown when an e mail address is selected to be deleted 6 Check that the correct e mail target has been set for deletion and press the OK button Delete e
78. The following shows the correspondence between the administrator Customize LDAP Search window settings and the regular user search condition buttons on the e Mail Address Book LDAP List tab Left Button Determines the setting of the left button on the LDAP List tab e Mail Address Book LDAP List Search Target First Last e Mail O Name Name Address Middle Button Determines the setting of the middle button on the LDAP List tab e Mail Address Book LDAP List Search Target First Last e Mail O Name Name Address 2 Select the search item s to set for the left or middle button Multiple search items can be selected If multiple items are selected a search operation tries to find entries containing any of the search words If no search items are selected for a button the corresponding search A parameter button on the e Mail Address Book LDAP List tab cannot be selected If the Display Name check box is selected and the display format for LDAP search results is First Name Last Name or Last Name First Name search results are shown as a if a first name or last name has not been registered Example When the LDAP search results format is First Name Last Name and a first name is not registered the search result shows Last Name 3 For Result Format specify the format of the LDAP search result 4 Enter the button name in the Button Name input
79. The scanning starts Vv The scanned data is shown on the Scan Viewer window and may be edited Cancel Send Check and edit the scanned data and then press the Send button v The scanned data is sent as an e mail attachment 396 Even if Scan Viewer is set to Off the Scan Viewer window appears under the following circumstances Scan operation did not properly finish Scan operation was canceled by pressing the Cancel button in the Scanning window During the scan the following window is shown Scanning Scanning Option Setting H Color Mode Auto 1 Paper Size Auto i Resolution 200dpi Scan Mode Duplex Cancel The Cancel button is displayed when the scan starts If the Cancel button is pressed a message to confirm the scan cancellation appears If the OK button is pressed the ongoing scan is completed and the following scans are canceled The scanned data is shown in the Scan Viewer window 397 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer When the Scan Viewer is set to On the scanned data can be checked and edited in the Scan Viewer g Cancel Send 6 11 1 Viewing Scanned Data The scanned data shown in the Scan Viewer window can be displayed in actual or magnified size The scanned data can be moved by dragging it a
80. This section describes how to filter job sequences 1 2 3 Press the Job Sequences button The Jobs List window appears Enter Job Name and Comment Enter either a part of or full Job Name and Comment for the job sequence s to be filtered Press the Find button The filtered results appear To clear filtered results delete the entered Job Name and Comment and M press the Find button 208 E Filtering the LDAP List This section describes how to filter the LDAP List on the LDAP List window 1 For User Name select the display format for the user names shown on the user name e mail address list Enter the LDAP server and character string to be used for LDAP searches in the Search Base field The LDAP entries under the character string entered here will become the search target For Search Position select the filtering method Enter the filter character strings in User Name and e Mail Address If both a user name and e mail address are entered data containing both are searched for as an AND Search Select the filter target If multiple items are selected a search operation tries to find entries containing any of the search items Select the Find button gt The filtered results appear Ifthe Find button is selected an authentication window appears M Enter a User Name and Password and then press the OK button User names may be up to 129 chara
81. Tools menu Internet Options 2 On the Security tab select Trusted sites and press the Sites button 3 Enter the URL of the scanner in the Add this website to the zone field and press the Add button 456 In Internet Explorer the security level for the target zone is set to High on the Security tab in the Tools menu Internet Options In the case of a custom level Prompt or Disable is set for Active scripting under Scripting in the Settings area E Action When connecting using the scanner name the connection will be an intranet connection When connecting using an IP address it will be an internet connection If the URL includes a scanner name the scanner will be connected using an Intranet Zone If the URL includes an IP address the scanner will be connected using the Internet Zone Try the following settings for the corresponding zone 1 In Internet Explorer set the following settings in the Tools menu Internet Options 2 Enable active scripting in either of the following ways On the Security tab click the Default level button to set Security level for this zone to Medium On the Security tab click the Custom level button to set to Enable for Active scripting under Scripting in the Settings area 3 If connecting via the Internet zone on the Privacy tab set the level to below Medium High Delete temporary internet files in either of the following ways
82. abc Selected e Mail Addresses user00000 nss1 com 8 amp user00001 nss1 com user00002 nss1 com user00003 nss1 com user00004 nss1 com Cancel 315 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail The number of search results to be displayed can be set by the administrator For details refer to 4 9 2 Setting the e Mail LDAP Server page 133 f items are missing for search results according to the display format of the search results is shown instead For example if the display format is LastName FirstName and the user LastName Fujitsu FirstName None is registered on the LDAP server the search result is displayed as Fujitsu Search methods differ for the My List and LDAP List Therefore search results differ according to the list selected Search String My List LDAP List Case Insensitive Insensitive Diacritical Accent marks Sensitive Insensitive For My List search the following also applies All currently displayed levels and their subordinates are searched For groups that are shown in a search result even if a group is selected the is disabled and the contacts of the group cannot be viewed 8 Select the desired e mail target from the search results and press The selected e mail address is added to Selected e Mail Addresses To add multiple e mail addresses repeat this step v Selecting an e mail address and pressing c
83. admin Connection eseese 123 admin password ou eee eeeeseetteeteeerteeee 112 Admin Tool ceccceccsceeccseeeseseeeeeaee ees 67 82 administrator oc 37 74 226 administrator login via the Admin Tool uw 80 87 administrator right aeee 37 administrator windows Admin Tool cisicessieteretgnsshdencceusteatiusaeen 76 LCD touch panel eee 75 advanced mode ccccccceeesesesceeeeeeeeeees 67 AmBackup exe ns cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 281 AmExportLog aasetes doteSiecestnctacacutisweidanaeas 278 Amlnvestigate exe eenen 284 AmRestore exe oo ecceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneereenees 283 area not to be perforated cc00 477 assigning job menus to users not included in a job group 221 automatic logout aececi 110 536 automatic logout setting ee 110 B background removal ccccceeeeeeeeees 387 backing up Central Admin Server SEWNJS arse cities a E EE 281 backing up the user data store _ 178 backing up restoring data between different versions of the Central Admin Server SO WArE ioviateecadeacansattnadeaelsatuistausntechaaadice 525 basic mode sssssssssssrssrrrrreestereereseseseeeee 67 blank page skip 2 cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 388 brightness seeseenseeneeneneneereenrnenrnnreeneen 383 C Carbonless paper cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 475 Cale sive iG iis 416 Carrier Sheet o ceceeccceeccseeeeese ees 300 362 carrier sheet
84. appropriate refer to Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address page 451 for further solutions Ping statistics shows Lost N 1 to 99 loss E Details Communication with the Ping target is not stable E Action There may be a quality problem with the LAN cable Replace the LAN cable and try again The network transmission mode may differ from the connection target In 4 8 7 Checking the Network Operating Status page 121 change the Link Speed Duplex Mode from Auto Negotiation to a fixed mode Hardware error E Details A hardware problem might have caused a communication channel error For example the LAN cable may have become disconnected during the Ping test E Action Check the status of the LAN cable and try again 447 8 2 Network Connection Troubleshooting Ping request could not find host xxxxxxxxx Please check the name and try again E Details The name resolution or address resolution for the device specified as the Ping target may have failed E Action Check that the Ping target host name or FQDN is correct Check that the DNS server or WINS server settings are correct Ifthe Ping target host name or FQDN is correct refer to Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its Host Name or FQDN page 453 for further solutions mM Checking the Network Operating Status Check the network status on the Network Status window For details about the checking procedure refer to
85. as a keyword Example In the figure below the marked section B is set as a keyword as marked section B is at a higher position than A Marked section A Marked section B 376 4 When First marked section only or All marked sections is selected in Step 3 select whether or not to enable editing of character strings in marked sections at Edit Marked String To make detected character strings in marked sections editable set the Scan M Viewer window to appear after scanning If the Scan Viewer window is not set to appear editing is not possible When sending as an e mail attachment faxing printing or saving scanned data the Scan Viewer window appears and then a window for editing the character strings in marked sections appears allowing the keyword strings to be edited 5 For Text Recognition Language select a language used when text is to be recognized in the document 6 For Text Recognition for Pages specify the target pages for text recognition 7 Press the OK button This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected setting is displayed to the right of the Text Recognition button 377 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 10 PDF Password PDF files can be locked with a user specified password D The password will need to be entered every time the password protected PDF file is opened Do not forget or lose this password 1 On the Scan Settings window select the
86. be highlighted on a black and white document in the following way Any regular highlight pen can be used The recommended colors and thickness of marked sections are as follows Pink Yellow Blue Green ScanSnap ScanSnap ScanS ry Lhe ae ap Draw a straight line over a single line of characters The supported size of a marked section is as follows Minimum size Height 3 mm 0 1 in Width 10 mm 0 4 in Maximum size Height 20 mm 0 8 in Width 150 mm 5 9 in Sections marked by a pale color may not be recognized Use only a single color within a page Draw a marker line in a way that the desired character string is completely covered 373 6 9 Setting the Scan Options The color of an entire marked section should be even in thickness Bad Example 1 Good Example The characters are not completely covered Bad Example 2 The color is not even ScanSnap ScanSnap ScanSnap Up to 10 sections can be marked in a page keyword Catalogs pamphlets and other color documents Documents including sections marked in two or more colors Documents containing colors other than for marking pens other than highlight pens are used or the document is stained Documents containing a large number of marked sections in a page When any of the following conditions apply the highlighted character strings may not be able to be set as a keyword
87. before the scanned data is processed The scanned data can be checked and edited on the Scan Viewer For details refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 If desired in the following windows the Scan Viewer can be set to appear before the scanned data is finally processed Send e Mail window Send Fax window Print window Save window Scan to SharePoint window Job Menu window Q When Scan Viewer is disabled on the Job Menu window it is not possible to select whether or not to show the Scan Viewer The following explains how to enable or disable the Scan Viewer using the Send e Mail window 1 On the Send e Mail window press E of Scan Viewer Pressing the button toggles the setting between On and Off Send e Mail iia a a To Bcc E Subject File Name SSN18000913 194556 Body EN Return Receipt EE Send a copy to my e mail a ar Scan aw Scan a Cancel Bere amp Default eal lt Scan 395 6 10 Enabling Disabling the Scan Viewer Operations vary according to whether the Scan Viewer is set to On or Off If sending an e mail scan operation proceeds as follows When the Scan Viewer button is On When the Scan Viewer button is Off and sending an e mail and sending an e mail On the Send e Mail window press the On the Send e Mail window press the Scan button Scan amp Send button Vv
88. button When the Server Type is Active Directory or Active Directory Global Catalog the Authentication window appears Enter the authentication details for confirming access to the LDAP server and press the OK button Authentication iia A a User Name Password Cancel For the User Name alphanumeric characters case sensitive and symbols may be entered Alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used for a password Passwords are case sensitive When the Server Type is Other LDAP Server authentication is performed with the information that is entered in the LDAP Server Access Authorization When the authentication is completed and the connection is successful the Login LDAP Server window appears 11 Press the OK button The information entered is set 128 E LDAP Search Target The search range and method for LDAP server searches differs according to the LDAP server connection or search base DN settings Step 2 or Step 6 of 4 9 1 Setting the Login LDAP Server page 127 For connecting with LDAP server when Active Directory or Other LDAP Server is selected in Step 2 The following shows an example where the domain name is example com for the Search Base DN to be entered in Step 6 The italic text represents variable character strings LDAP Tree Example example com CN Users Administrator L User A Example 1 User B SUPER E MER
89. check scanner labels 8 1 Removing Jammed DOCUMe nts ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseneens 443 8 2 Network Connection TroubleShooting scccccceeseseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 446 8 3 Other Troubleshooting sssceeviccassccinescensacenseccendsnnnaneavnnntenndecstasensanvaneancenenacnsarennenne 459 8 4 Points to Check before Contacting Your FUJITSU Scanner Dealer 467 8 5 Checking the Scanner Labels wisicccciicicissccdcsisicetestecsctenesstnecccarsinensecesecedecuedeninaens 470 8 6 Pre Maintenance Preparations cccccceesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeees 471 442 8 1 Removing Jammed Documents If a document jam occurs follow the procedure below to remove the jammed documents Do not forcibly pull out jammed documents Make sure to open the top cover before removing the documents Take care not to snag sharp edged parts when removing jammed documents Such parts may cause injury When removing jammed documents take care with dangling objects such as neckties necklaces and hair as they may easily become entangled in the scanner The surfaces of the glass can become hot when the scanner is used Take care not burn your hands 1 Remove all documents from the ADF paper chute 2 Pull the top cover release catch toward you place your hands at both sides of the top cover and open the top cover Top cover release catch Be caref
90. configuration is added E Editing Scanner Configuration This section describes how to edit scanner configuration 1 Press the Config List button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Config List window appears Select the check box for the scanner to be edited Press the Edit button The Edit Scanner Details window appears Change the details of the scanner configuration Press the OK button The changed scanner configuration is saved 257 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration M Deleting Scanner Configuration This section describes how to exclude scanners from Central Admin management 1 Press the Config List button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Config List window appears 2 Select the check box for the scanner to be deleted 3 Press the Delete button A confirmation window for whether or not to exclude the specified scanner s from Central Admin management appears 4 Press the OK button The scanner s are excluded from Central Admin management Deleting the scanner configuration does not exclude a scanner from Central Admin management Therefore the Central Admin Server setting in the scanner will not be Unregistered To exclude a scanner from Central Admin management select the Central Admin Server setting to Off in the scanner To exclude multiple scanners from Central Admin management at once apply a new set of scanner settings with
91. document fits into the carrier sheet at the lower corner 3 With the front side of the carrier sheet face down place the part of the printed black and white pattern downward and load it in the ADF paper chute When loading the carrier sheet move the side guides to lock the carrier sheet in place 301 6 1 Loading Documents 4 Start the scan The front and back side images are merged into a double page spread image There may be a gap between the front and back side images or a line may appear on the output scan image If a thick document is scanned with the carrier sheet scanned images on the both right and left sides may be skewed to a trapezoidal shape These problems may be improved in the following ways Fold the document neatly Align the edge of the document with the edge of the carrier sheet Scan the carrier sheet with the front side facing the paper chute or vice versa The folded part of the document may be mis detected causing the seam of the facing pages be unintentionally trimmed on the scanned image In this case the folded edge of the document should be placed 1 mm away from the edge of the carrier sheet 302 6 2 Using LCD Touch Panel Windows Regular User 6 2 1 Main Menu Window The type of buttons displayed on the menu differs according to the settings of the relevant server The following describes display examples according to settings for e Mail Fax Print Save and Scan to
92. down all other applications then click Retry E Uninstalling the Central Admin Console This section uses Windows Vista as an example Uninstall the Central Admin Console from Control Panel Programs Programs and Features in the computer in which it is installed Before starting uninstallation close the Central Admin Console If the uninstallation process is completed while the Central Admin Console is in operation normal operation cannot be guaranteed Even if uninstalled data will remain Delete this data if it is not required For Windows XP data is saved in the following way C Documents and Settings User_name Local Settings Application Data PFU_LIMITED CentralAdminConsole exe_xxx The italic text represents variable character strings User_name can be the name of any Central Admin Console user 241 5 5 Central Admin Server Login via the Central Admin Console 5 5 Central Admin Server Login via the Central Admin Console Using the Central Admin Console allows an administrator to set multiple scanners via the network interface This section describes how to login from the Central Admin Console If the normal screen display does not appear for example an X mark appears wait for a few minutes and try again If the problem still occurs contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider The default user name and password for the administrator are set as foll
93. e Mail page 309 Type of the e Mail Address Book There are two types of e mail address books My List and LDAP List My List This is an e mail address book that can be created by the user A My List can also be edited using User Editor For details refer to Appendix E Editing Using User Editor page 496 LDAP List This is an e mail address book which uses all the data stored on the LDAP server The LDAP List cannot be edited The LDAP List cannot be used in the following cases therefore the LDAP List tab is not shown on the window ifan LDAP server is not used If logged in with the guest account If logged in with a local account e Mail Targets that Can Be Selected from the e Mail Address Book When sending an e mail the following e mail targets can be selected and entered from the e mail address book Icon Shown in the e Mail Address Book Group E A Distribution List co A fay e Mail Target My List LDAP List e Mail Address A Available Not available Not shown in the LDAP List The following explains how to select an e mail address using the LDAP List 313 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail 1 On the Send e Mail window press LE in the e mail address field The e Mail Address Book window appears 2 Select the LDAP List tab The e Mail Address Book window for the LDAP List appears 3 Press a search parameter but
94. e Mail Target in the e Mail Address Book The following explains how to edit My List in the e mail address book LDAP List cannot be edited 1 Open the e Mail Address Book window in either of the following ways On the Send e Mail window press for the e mail address input field On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button then on the Maintenance window press the Edit e Mail Address button Select the My List tab Press the Edit e Mail Address Book button The Edit e Mail Address Book window appears Select the e mail address or distribution list to be edited Press z The Edit e Mail Address window appears Edit the information For e mail addresses Enter the e mail address first name and last name to be added For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 Edit e Mail Address e Mail Address First Name Taro Last Name Fujitsu e Mail Address abc example com Cancel 321 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail For distribution lists Enter the list name and e mail addresses to be added to the distribution list For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 e Mail addresses can be selected from the e mail address book which can be 7 accessed by pressing For details refer to 6 4 1 Selecting an e Mail
95. eeeeeeeetttteaaeeees 187 E Checking for New Updates Manually cceeceeeeeeees 187 E Checking for Updates at Scanner Startup 05 188 E Requesting e Mail Notification When a New Update is Available s 2 6 e eee ea oltoa oh ac hes to eters Mere ata to 188 4 16 3 Maintaining Add in Modules ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetettteeeeees 189 E Installing an Add in Module 00 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 E Uninstalling an Add in Module ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 E Viewing the Add in Status 00 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 E Uploading an Add in Settings File eeeeeeeeees 191 E Setting the On Screen Keyboard When Running AI Addim dhe chen cere ere a ne eee med arate 191 4 16 4 Setting the Information Output Level ees 192 4 16 5 Obtaining Technical SUPPOTt ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 4 16 6 Setting the Destination for Alert Notifications 194 4 16 7 Getting a Screenshot on the LCD Touch Panel 195 Setting a Job SEQUENCE eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 197 4 17 1 Job Setting Quick User Guide ccccccecceesseeeseeesteceeeeees 199 4 17 2 Setting a Job SCQUEMCen s 22 scenic ted ie ewe eden 201 E Adding a Job Sequence e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 201 E Cloning a Job Sequence eee eeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 207 E Editing a Job Sequence escceecee cece eee eeeceeee
96. entitled Network Scanner XXX xX Error if an error occurs on the scanner If an SMTP server has not been setup alert notifications cannot be sent For details about how to set an SMTP server refer to 4 10 1 Setting the e Mail Server page 137 The e mail address set in this section is also used as the destination for the new update release notification when update check is performed For details about update check refer to 4 16 2 Checking for New Updates page 187 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt Alert Notification The Alert Notification window appears Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance Maintenance Specify where alerts are to be sent Recipient e Mail Address System Update Test Add in Software Technical Support Sender Alert Notification SMTP Server Authentication User Name Password Previous 2 Enter recipient and sender e mail addresses Multiple recipient e mail addresses can be specified For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 3 To confirm that the entered e mail address is valid press the Test button Check that the test mail successfully arrives at the expected e mail address 194 4 To perform SMTP authentication for SMTP Server Authentication specify the user authentication information to be used for sending e mail To perform the
97. ents heacetateetarn 209 filtering the LDAP List eee 223 firewall settings for the Central Admin Server eee 240 folder ANAS spisas ee iess aaiae 145 folder list cif ha ety lhe atnecekege 344 348 PIP sener asrcudiueiietisiduieiuadivelethecdtiod 51 FTP server folder details eee 152 PTPS SEVE x cscocaciesivta setemtiwnete Relies 51 functional compatibility between the scanner and Central Admin Server _ 524 G general scanner settings 068 106 getting a screenshot on the LCD touch panel eee 195 ASS onde facie aA at ce cea teeter thes 422 GLOSSARY irinetan aa a ae eat 528 idler roler motosierra aeaaee esperis 421 importing scanner settings ee 267 information output level assesses 192 installation wizard s e 90 installing POG r e E AE aa 263 Add in module 189 AdMIN TOOL senri teek 82 Central Admin Console _ 005 238 Central Admin Server 233 User Editor ieegtiecs seitimececteccetevied 499 538 intelligent multifeed detection 102 Padd ESS 2 du oA aa ara aana an bie raien iink 113 J JOD MENU iiisge a 304 job mode settings n 77 269 job setting quick user guide ow 199 K KEV WOM EE 373 L LAN connector ascesccseceiecveteeteied nese cntiies 35 LCD touch panel cccceceeees 34 62 67 LDAP SERVER se acdan as 50 307 LDAPS server esssseeerssssreerrrreeessee 50 OIM ea aa a E tateat 242 306 login settings n o
98. file of the same file name without write access in the destination export to folder Check that the audit log that failed to be exported is not being used in another application 7A050014 Command is already Try again after the command execution running is completed 7A050015 Error has occurred An unexpected error occurred Detail error message Contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer XXXXXXXXXX or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider 7A050016 Length of specified folder The copy destination folder path length path exceeds the maximum specified in the command line exceeds allowed 180 bytes Specify a copy destination folder path that is no longer than 180 bytes 295 Chapter 6 Regular User Operations This scanner is used to scan documents which then can be sent by e mail or fax printed on a network printer or saved to a folder To perform the operations described in this chapter the scanner must first be set up by the administrator For details about scanner setup refer to Chapter 4 Administrator Operations LCD Touch Panel and Admin Tool page 74 6 1 Loading DOCUMENTS sisiicciicstansniesdanenissnieks wininsaaaeneasadseniecsidenaensicinieunsas dixtd akaiona 297 6 2 Using LCD Touch Panel Windows Regular USeL c sssssssseeseessseeeeeene 303 6 3 Logging in Regular User Mod e ccccesssseseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenseees 306 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail
99. hard as the carrier sheet may become scratched or deformed After cleaning the interior of the carrier sheet wait until it has completely dried before closing it As a guideline it is recommended to replace the carrier sheet every 500 scans For details about purchasing a carrier sheet refer to 7 5 5 Purchasing the Carrier Sheet page 435 425 7 5 7 5 1 7 5 Replacing Parts Replacing Parts Part Numbers and Replacement Cycle The following table specifies the replacement part numbers and the standard replacement cycles Part name Part No Replacement cycle PAD ASSY PA03586 0002 After every 50 000 sheets scanned or once a year PICK ROLLER PA03586 0001 After every 100 000 sheets scanned or once a year These replacement cycles are rough guidelines for when using 80 g m 20 Ib A4 Letter woodfree or wood containing paper They may vary according to the type of documents scanned scanner usage and cleaning frequency When the consumable alert status is orange or red contact your scanner administrator to replace the necessary part Use only the PFU LIMITED parts specified Do not use consumable parts made by other manufacturers For more details about how to check the consumable alert status refer to 7 5 2 Checking the Consumable Alert Status page 427 To obtain these parts contact your FUJITSU dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider 426 7 5 2 Ch
100. hard object on the LCD touch panel The LCD touch panel may be damaged If the screen is dirty this may cause the LCD touch panel to malfunction Clean the screen if it is visibly dirty For details refer to Cleaning the LCD Touch Panel page 419 62 2 4 Using the On Screen Keyboard On the LCD touch panel the on screen keyboard can be used to enter text in the input field on the window The on screen keyboard can be used in the following ways E Showing Hiding the On Screen Keyboard To show hide the on screen keyboard press the following button displayed on the LCD touch panel Button Description FE Press this button to show the on screen keyboard The on screen keyboard is displayed to enable entering characters User Name Password Shutdown Pressing this button hides the on screen keyboard This button is displayed when there is no input field in the window This button is displayed while the on screen keyboard is enabled g In this state the keyboard cannot be displayed When you touch any input field the on screen keyboard is displayed In the Login window the on screen keyboard is automatically displayed For an Add in you can use the Add in Software window to set the on screen keyboard not to be displayed when running an Add in When you display the on screen keyboard when running an Add in you can change the display location of the button
101. is installed and the Add in name is displayed in the list 189 4 16 Maintaining the System E Uninstalling an Add in Module Adminvoo 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt Add in Software gt The Add in Software window appears 2 Perform either of following operations To uninstall one Add in module select the Add in module from the list and press the Uninstall button To uninstall all Add in modules listed press the Uninstall All button A confirmation message appears 3 Press the Yes button gt The Add in module is uninstalled and the Add in name is removed from the list E Viewing the Add in Status UC amintoo When an Add in module is installed the Add in status can be viewed 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt Add in Software gt The Add in Software window appears K Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance Maintenance Add in Software System Update Add in Software Technical Support Alert Notification Show On Screen Previous 190 E Uploading an Add in Settings File dminqoo 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt Add in Software The Add in Software window appears When multiple Add ins are installed select the target Add in from the list Press the Browse button and specify the Add in settings file to be uploaded Press the Upload bu
102. its long side vertical and its short side horizontal See also Landscape orientation Postcard size A standard paper size 100 x 148 mm approximately 3 94 x 5 83 in Portrait orientation is used for this scanner 531 Resolution A measure of the fineness of details or grain of images The customary metric of resolution is dpi dots per inch For any given image the higher the resolution the more dots or pixels that can be used and the greater the resulting fineness of detail that can be expressed Simplex scan mode A scan mode where only one side of each document sheet is scanned See also Duplex scan mode Ultrasonic sensor A type of sensor that uses ultrasonic sound waves in this case to detect document multifeeds by recognizing differences in how the sound penetrates single versus multiple sheets 532 533 About Maintenance Contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider for repairs to this product Do not perform repairs on this scanner 534 535 Index A PAA E EEE E EET 189 Add in group lt scececitiesivisesececnreaeeaien 256 adding e mail address 317 fax NUM ber ccsassthcceccnsiansnesdnasteceaues 329 JOD group ctvcrivvessevsadaccdnetecerenammncnss 216 job Menu cuiecerdtadsranuudenceeeanaatnaastonecnes 210 job sequence nssssessrsrrresssssesesssesss 201 scanned data eessen 400 ADF paper chute aassesseeseeesseessreen 34 36
103. job mode 125 4 8 Configuring the Network Settings 7 For Update Scheduler set whether to enable automatic update for the scanner systems including security installed options scanner settings and Add ins Automatic updates start when the scanner is in a standby mode or when no user is logged in while it is turned on Even if notifications from the Central Admin Server or Wake On LAN cannot be used an update can be performed according to the specified date and time If a user is logged in the scanner at the scheduled date and time updates start after the user has logged out When the setting for an automatic update from the Central Admin Server is distributed to the scanners if the update is scheduled to start within ten minutes after the setting was distributed the setting will not be applied To enable new system settings in an environment where update calls cannot be issued scanners must be restarted or logged out In order to prevent software updates from running at the same time enable software update time period restrictions 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 System settings can be updated even when software updates are restricted If the scheduled automatic update time is set in both the Central Admin Console and with the Admin Tool the most recent settings will be enabled 8 Press the OK button The information entered is set The scanner information is sent to the Central Admin Server
104. menu 1 Press the Job Menus button The Job Menus List window appears 2 Select the job menu to be deleted 3 Press the Delete button The confirmation window appears 4 Press the OK button The job menu is deleted HM Viewing the Detailed Settings for a Job Menu This section describes how to view the detailed settings for a job menu 1 Press the Job Menus button The Job Menus List window appears 2 Select the job menu to view The details for the selected job menu appear in view mode in the Job Menu Layout area The information for the selected job menu shown in view mode in the Job Menu Layout area cannot be edited To edit this information press the Edit button 215 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence 4 17 4 Setting a Job Group AdminToo Cag Assign the job menu set in 4 17 3 Setting a Job Menu page 210 to a job group Users included in a job group can use the job menus assigned to the group Users included in multiple job groups can use the multiple job menus assigned to those groups Up to 100 job groups can be set E Adding a Job Group This section describes how to add a job group 1 Press the Job Groups button The Job Groups List window appears Job Sequences Job Menus Job Groups Job Groups List New ii Edit Job Group Name Last Modified Default Group 7 15 2010 5 45 29 PM 216 2 Press the New bu
105. most recent update status System Updates Add in Installs Scanner Settings 1 1 System Version Scanner system version Yes Add in Version Scanner Add in install module Yes version Scanner Identifies which set of Central Yes Settings Admin Server supplied scanner settings has been applied Last Inventory Date and time inventory was 1 1 Taken last taken Last System Date time of the last known 1 1 Update successful system update Last Add in Date time of the last known 1 1 Install successful add in install Last Scanner Date time of the last known 1 1 Settings Update successful scanner settings update Current System The current system update 1 1 Update Status status Current Add in The current add in installs 1 1 Install Status status Current Scanner The current scanner settings 1 1 Settings Status status Scanner Scanner firmware version Yes Version 252 Configuration Configuration Item Comment from file from scanner PAD ASSY Number of times pad assy has Yes Sheets been used PICK ROLLER Number of times pick rollerhas Yes Sheets been used Total Total number of scanned Yes Throughput sheets Sheets Initial Use Date on which scanner was Yes registered Cumulative On Total scanner On time
106. number of pages that can be scanned is 999 When Blank Page Skip is enabled the number of scanned pages excluding skipped blank pages is shown Additional pages can be scanned in place of skipped blank pages until the maximum number of scanned pages is reached When the scanning has completed the Scan Viewer window appears For details about editing on the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 If the Scan amp Save button is selected when Scan Viewer is Off the scanned data is saved immediately after the scanning is completed and the LCD touch panel screen returns to the Main Menu window For details refer to 6 10 Enabling Disabling the Scan Viewer page 395 8 Check the scanned data For more details about the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 346 9 On the Scan Viewer window press the Save button A file in the specified file format is saved in the selected folder fm as Saving scan data in Folder The Main Menu window is shown again If saving to the folder fails an error message e mail with the following title is sent from the scanner to the currently logged in user s e mail address registered in the LDAP server Network Scanner XXXX Error 347 6 8 Saving the Scanned Data to a SharePoint Folder 6 8 Saving the Scanned Data to a SharePoint Fold
107. options have been installed on the scanner Date Time Option Name Details System Status u a Usage Status Installed Options System Log 1 1 Previous 172 4 14 4 Managing the User Log The most recent 1 000 user log entries are saved by the scanner User logs may contain private information such as e mail addresses or fax numbers so care should be taken when managing such data ifa log file error is detected during scanner operation the log file will be cleared and the log entry Error 81001004 Corrupted user log file was deleted is recorded E Viewing the User Log Details REg Admintoo The user log summary is shown in date time order Even if the Region Timezone or Date Time settings are changed the order of the log entries will not be changed 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt User Log The User Log window appears Operation log records for all users Time User Code Operation 15 03 02 guest 100D0001 Fax 08 03 15 02 03 guest 00000000 Save 08 03 14 59 15 guest 00000000 08 03 14 57 30 guest 100D0001 Download Clear All Refresh Details 2 Select the user log you wish to view The details of the selected log are displayed Pressing the OK button returns to the User Log window A The Date format specified on the Date Time window is used For details refer to 4 5 4 Setting the Date Time
108. or device used when multiple client computers use a printer on the network It receives print requests from the client computers on the network and delivers them to the printer connected with the print server Printer must be able to spool print jobs to hard disk or memory Contact your printer dealer if uncertain whether your printer has a spool function Printers that allow the status of print errors to be easily checked via an LCD control panel or similar are recommended o Windows XP compatible printer drivers must be registered DNS Server The function of DNS servers is the translation resolution of humanly memorable host names and FQDN into the corresponding numeric IP addresses WINS Server The WINS server handles name registration requests from WINS clients and registers their names and IP addresses with the server database The WINS server responds to NetBIOS name queries submitted by clients and returns the IP address of the queried name if it is listed in the server database In addition when a DNS name resolution fails the query can be transferred to the WINS server DHCP Server DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is an auto configuration protocol used for an IP network Network administrator intervention is not required when the DHCP server is used because it assigns the IP addresses of scanners as well as computers automatically NTP Server NTP Network Time Protocol is a protocol to synchron
109. page 98 173 4 14 Viewing the Scanner Details E Downloading the User Logs in CSV Format AdminToo User logs can be downloaded to a computer in CSV format The file is saved in the following format Date Time User Result Code Operation Pages Description The default file name is OperationLog csv 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt User Log The User Log window appears 2 Press the Download button The File Download dialog box appears 3 Press the Save button Make sure there is enough free space on the disk where it is to be saved and M press the Save button If there is not enough free disk space an incomplete file may be saved The Save As dialog box appears 4 Enter a file name and specify a folder for saving the file The file will contain CSV format data 5 Press the Save button A file containing CSV format data is saved Mm Clearing the User Logs Buch AdminTool 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt User Log The User Log window appears 2 Press the Clear All button The confirmation window appears 3 Press the Yes button All the user operation logs are cleared 174 4 14 5 Managing the System Log Up to 1 000 system information logs such as for startup shutdown and system errors are saved in the scanner System logs may contain private information such as e mai
110. printer multiple times the software version of the driver should be the same on each print server If the software version of the printer driver differs printing errors may occur 159 4 13 Setting the Network Printers E Checking the Printer Drivers The driver installed on the print server must be compatible with Windows XP Use the following procedure to check whether the drivers installed on the print server are Windows XP compatible drivers 1 From the Start menu on the print server select Control Panel gt Printers and Faxes The Printers and Faxes window appears 2 Right click on a printer and select Properties Printer properties appear 3 Press the Additional Drivers button in the Sharing tab The Additional Drivers window appears 4 Check that the Processor is x86 or Intel and that Installed is Yes for version Windows XP Additional Drivers p 21x You can install additional drivers so that users on the following systems can download them automatically when they connect Processor Version installed Windows XP and Windows Server 2 Windows XP and Windows Server 2 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Wi Windows 95 Windows 98 and Win Windows NT 4 0 When the Installed status is Yes the driver has been installed and the printer can be used as a network printer Press the Cancel button When the Installed status is No select version Windows XP a
111. properties of the existing file are replaced by those of the new file When multiple files are saved in TIFF or JPEG format identical properties are set to all the files If required items other than Single line of text or Multiple lines of text are set for the properties of the specified folder content types files saved in the SharePoint folder will be checked out To change the checkout status enter values for the required items via a Web browser and then check in the files A file in the specified file format is saved in the selected SharePoint folder 354 Saving scan data in document The Main Menu window is shown again 355 6 9 6 9 Setting the Scan Options Setting the Scan Options On the following windows press Le of Scan Settings to access the Scan Settings windows Send e Mail window Send Fax window Print window Save window e e e Scan to SharePoint window Scan Settings ES Quality Advanced i Resolution 200dpi a Peer ay I Paper size Paper I Paper size ao a Peer ay ESRR Cancel Default The following classes of scan settings are available Default These are the factory settings To set the recommended values automatically press the Default button Custom The user can change the default settings and customize any scanning preferences as needed Press each scan option button to set it as desired Function settings
112. scseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 3 Using the LCD Touch Panel seseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 4 Using the On Screen Keyboard ccccccseeseeeeeee 56 2 1 Turning the Power On Off 2 1 1 Turning the Power On Do not move or shake the scanner when it is turned on Z CAUTION This may damage components in the scanner and cause data to be lost 1 Press the power button After the scanner starts up the Login window appears After turning the power off wait for at least 10 seconds before turning the power a back on again 57 2 1 Turning the Power On Off 2 1 2 Turning the Power Off 1 Press the Shutdown button on the Login window To turn the power of the scanner off make sure to press the Shutdown button Do not turn the power of the scanner off forcibly by pressing and holding down the power button for 4 seconds It may cause the scanner to function abnormally Shutdown gt A confirmation window appears 2 Press the OK button The scanner power is turned off 58 2 2 Using the Scanner Buttons mM Using the Power Button When the scanner is off or in standby mode pressing the power button will start the scanner up and display the login window When the scanner is on and a window displaying the Shutdown button is shown pressing the power button opens a shutdown confirmation window via which the scanner can be shutdown Shutdown C J LED Dark Operating CE LED Lit
113. server 1512 WINS 17 UDP 53 1 4 System Requirements Function From To Port Number Protocol Number Synchronization Scanner gt SNTP server 123 SNTP 17 UDP Proxy Server Scanner gt Proxy server Free 6 TCP Authentication Scanner gt LDAP server 389 LDAP 1 6 TCP e Mail 636 LDAPS 1 6 TCP Address Search 3268 Active Directory Global 6 TCP Catalog 1 3269 Active Directory Global 6 TCP Catalog over SSL 1 Sending e Mail Scanner gt SMTP server 25 SMTP 1 6 TCP 465 SMTP over SSL 1 6 TCP 587 SMTP over STARTTLS 6 TCP 1 Sending Fax Scanner gt SMTP server 25 SMTP 1 6 TCP 465 SMTP over SSL 1 6 TCP 587 SMTP over STARTTLS 6 TCP 1 Print Scanner gt Print server 137 138 139 445 SMB 6 TCP 17 UDP SharePoint Scanner gt SharePoint 80 HTTP 1 6 TCP Server server 443 HTTPS 1 6 TCP FTP Server Scanner gt FTP server 20 21 FTP 1 6 TCP FTPS Server Scanner gt FTPS server 989 990 FTPS 1 6 TCP Saving to a Scanner gt File server 137 138 139 445 SMB 6 TCP Folder 17 UDP Ping Scanner gt Another 1 ICMP computer or server 1 Changing the Port Number is possible 54 55 Chapter 2 Basic Scanner Operations 2 1 Turning the Power On Off cssesseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 2 2 Using the Scanner Buttons
114. setting contents on the job mode edit window may not be possible For details refer to Updating the Scanner Settings page 266 4 In Model select N1800 5 Press the Edit Scanner Settings button The scanner settings edit window appears 6 Configure the scanner settings If scanner settings are available the available scanner settings values are shown If no scanner settings have been released the default settings are shown Overwrite the current settings with those saved in a backup file Backup Settings File If you return to the Main Menu from the Scanner Settings window without registering the scanner settings the edited contents will be lost System Settings tab The setting items are the same as those set in the system settings menu in the window for administrator operations For details refer to 4 5 Configuring the System page 94 However the Import Scanner Settings button for the System Settings menu is only displayed on the job mode edit window of the Central Admin Console 267 5 11 Updating the Scanner Settings The current configuration of the scanners saved by using the Admin Tool can be sent to the Central Admin Server from the Import Scanner Settings window The current configuration of the scanners is the information saved in Backing up System Settings page 182 The current configuration of the scanners can be imported in the following way 1 Specify the scann
115. sold carrier sheet are as follows Part name Part No No of items ScanSnap Carrier Sheet PA03360 0013 To obtain a carrier sheet contact your FUJITSU dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider 435 7 6 Performing a Scan Test 7 6 Performing a Scan Test After scanner cleaning or replacement of consumable parts perform a scan test E Regular User 1 On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button The Maintenance window appears 2 Press the Scan Test button Maintenance Edit e Mail Addresses Roller Cleaning The Scan Test window appears 3 Load the document into the ADF paper chute for the scan test 436 4 Press the Scan button Scan Test Load a test page and press the Scan button Pa Color Mode Auto D Sharpness None 1O Paper Size Auto EE Dropout Color None H Resolution 200dpi a Background Removal Medium Scan Mode Duplex ZJ Page Orientation Off Compression Medium p gt Blank Page Skip Off O Brightness Medium Multifeed Setup Ultrasonic Contrast Medium IE Edge Cropping Cancel The scan test starts When the scan test has completed the Scan Viewer window appears If the scanner fails to scan correctly an error message is displayed Deal with errors as required 5 Check the scanned data For more details about Scan Viewer refer to the following
116. started without showing the Message Screen and the job is processed For details refer to 6 14 1 Enabling Disabling the Message Screen page 408 When Message Screen is disabled whether or not the Message Screen is shown depends on the settings configured by the administrator 405 6 14 Processing a Job 2 Press the Scan button on the Message Screen The scanning starts Each page is briefly shown on the window as it is scanned When the scan has completed the Scan Viewer opens For details about editing on the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 When Off is set the Scan Viewer is not shown M When a file name can be changed the File Name window is shown before a scan For more details refer to 6 14 2 Changing a File Name for Save e Mail Attachment page 410 When the setting of the Scan Count can be changed the Scan Count window is shown before a scan For more details refer to 6 14 3 Checking the Number of Sheets to Be Scanned page 411 3 Check the scanned data For more details about the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 4 Press the OK button on the Scan Viewer The data is processed according to the specified job While the job is being processed the process is shown in real time on the Job Progress window Job Progress A XA Ca
117. the Find button gt The filtered results appear Ifthe login LDAP server type is Active Directory or Active Directory Global Catalog when the Find button is pressed a confirmation window appears Enter a User Name and Password and then press the OK button User names may be up to 129 characters long Passwords may be up to 256 characters long User Name and Password are case sensitive Connecting to the LDAP server Enter a User Name and Password User Name Password C canca To clear filtered results delete all filter strings and then press the Find button When there are a large number of filtered results on the LDAP List window or a large number of registered job group members 1000 at maximum it may take several seconds until the Group Member Settings window appears This can be resolved by performing the following Add a filter condition s Reduce the Maximum Results specified on the e Mail LDAP Server window Divide job groups Specify an Active Directory group 223 4 18 Messages 4 18 Messages The following shows an example of the window that appears to display a message for the administrator A System time synchronization failed The following lists the meanings of icons shown on message windows Icon Details Indicates a warning message This icon is displayed also for improper input values Read the message and press the
118. the update is released while the user is logged into a scanner the module will be applied after you log out If scanner settings are already available the scanner settings are replaced The scanner settings can be updated according to the time specified on the scanner M side For details refer to 4 8 9 Setting a Central Admin Server page 125 1 Press the Admin Operations button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Admin Operations window appears 2 Select the Scanner Settings link The System Settings window appears Scanner Settings Modify and release the system settings used by the scanners Settings Groups Model f 6010N E Registered Scanner Settings Settings Group Default Current Release Release Date None m Upload amp Release a New Set of Scanner Settings Edit the scanner settings for the Settings Group selected above Edit Scanner Settings ee Back 266 3 In Settings Groups select a settings group to which the new set of scanner settings is to be registered Registered Scanner Settings shows the release date of the currently available system settings To cancel release of the scanner settings press the Cancel button to delete the scanner settings If the scanner settings are canceled checking or changing the settings contents becomes difficult Also editing and viewing of the network printers folders
119. to a group display the target group and press the button The Add e Mail Address window appears 318 5 Enter the information of the e mail address to be added For e mail addresses On the e Mail Address tab enter the e mail address first name and last name to be added For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 Add e Mail Address e Mail Address Distribution List First Name pO Last Name O e Mail Address Cancel 319 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail For distribution lists On the Distribution List tab enter the list name and e mail addresses to be added to the distribution list For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 e Mail addresses can be selected from the e mail address book which can be K accessed by pressing For details refer to 6 4 1 Selecting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book page 313 If the e mail address book cannot be used contact the administrator Add e Mail Address e Mail Address Distribution List List Name fF e Mail Addresses Cancel 6 Press the OK button The e mail addresses and distribution lists are added to your My List My List can also be edited using User Editor M For details refer to Appendix E Editing Using User Editor page 496 320 6 4 3 Editing an
120. with black characters and a green border is scanned only the black characters will appear on the scanned image When using the dropout color setting you can set whether to remove color details and select color details to be removed This setting is effective only for pale colors Deep colors may not be removed On the Scan Settings window select the Quality tab 2 Press the Dropout Color button gt The Dropout Color window appears 3 If color details are to be removed select a color to be used as the dropout color ET Dropout Color Set the color data to be removed f ies Si This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected setting is displayed to the right of the Dropout Color button 386 6 9 16 Background Removal The background of a scanned image can be removed to make image clearer The level of background removal can be adjusted 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Quality tab 2 Press the Background Removal button The Background Removal window appears 3 Select a background removal level fa Background Removal Set the background removal level Medium Medium Weak Strong a i This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected level is displayed to the right of the Background Removal button When Image Quality is selected for Operating Mode on the General Scanner M Settings window the background removal leve
121. 1 Shrink to Fit The image is reduced so that the entire image fits into the area available for printing area inside the dotted line Further enlargement is not possible Ifthe positioning setting is Center the control point for printing is the center point of the area available for printing Ifthe positioning setting is Top Left the control point for printing is the top left corner of the area available for printing Center Top Left 4 Control Point i j Control Point i Available Area i Available Area A7 for Printing L55 for Printing EEEE 337 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data Scanned Pree Print Sheet positioning Result Data Small Large Center aaa Pos Ce t Scanned Data Print Sheet Scanned Data A Top Left A Large Small Center pF Sa a ee i Scanned Data ScanedDaia Print Sheet oe Top Left Scanned Data Same Same Center Print Sheet Scanned Data Scanned Data Top Left 338 100 The image is printed at full scale regardless of the paper size Ifthe positioning setting is Center the control point for printing is the center point of the print sheet Ifthe positioning setting is Top Left the control point for printing is the top left corner of the print sheet Avail
122. 1 Select System Settings gt Local Settings gt Region Timezone The Region Timezone window appears System Settings gt Local Settings Local Settings Region Timezone Certificate Management Select a region timezone Timezone GMT 09 00 Osaka Sapporo Tokyo Previous Cancel 2 Select a region timezone 3 If you select a region timezone in which daylight savings time is used select whether Daylight Savings Time should be on or off 4 Press the OK button The region timezone is set 97 4 5 Configuring the System 4 5 4 Setting the Date Time uch aminiTooi CA 1 Select System Settings gt Local Settings gt Date Time gt The Date Time window appears System Settings gt Local Settings Local Settings Select a date format and set the date time Date format As Date Time 9 13 17 22 45 Get Time Scanner Name Language Selection Region Timezone Date Time Keyboard Settings Certificate Management Previous Cancel cannot be used For Central Admin Console the Date Time input field and Get Time button 2 Select a date format 3 Enter the current date and time in the Date Time input field Pressing the Get Time button refreshes the Date Time input field with the current value of the internal system date time 4 Press the OK button gt The date and time are set 7 For the Admin Too
123. 1 Service started successfully No action required 11902 Service stopped successfully 289 5 18 Messages 5 18 3 Backup Restore Command Messages Backup restore command messages which may appear during central admin operations can be arranged into the following two categories Information Error Backup restore command messages will be shown on the command prompt E Information Code Message Action 0A040001 Starting backup No action required 0A040002 Finishing backup 0A040003 Starting restore 0A040004 Finishing restore Error Code Message Action 7A040010 Scanner Central Admin Central Admin Server software is not Server is not installed installed Try again in a Central Admin Server that has been correctly installed 7A040011 Backup folder has not been The backup file name is not specified specified in the parameters of the backup command and restore command Specify the backup file and try again 7A040012 Backup folder does not exist Specify the backup folder that was specified with the backup command and try again Or check the read privilege for the specified backup folder 7A040013 Backup folder contents are The backup folder specified in the invalid parameter for the restore command is not a backup folder for Central Admin Server Specify the Central Admin Server backup folder and try again 290 Code Message A
124. 11 Set whether or not to use the STMP authentication and set items such as the user to be authenticated authentication method e mail address to be used for the guest account 12 Press the OK button The SMTP Server window is shown again 13 Press the OK button gt The SMTP server is set 138 4 10 2 Configuring Settings for Sending e Mail RES amintooi Camaladmin Configure the user Send e Mail window used by a regular user to send a scanned image by e mail Set the character encoding used when e mails are sent 1 Select Network Settings gt e Mail gt Send e Mail gt The Send e Mail window appears ai Network Settings gt e Mail e Mail A SMTP Server Send e Mail File Names e Mail Enter the e mail settings Sender e Mail Address Selection from the e Mail Address Book Off Bcc Sender for e Mail Off Request Return Receipt Off Character Encoding Auto Previous Cancel 2 For Sender e Mail Address Selection from the e Mail Address Book set whether to allow a regular user who logins with the guest account to enter an e mail address in From on the Send e Mail window from an e mail address book 3 For Bcc Sender for e Mail set whether to display a setting item on the Send e Mail window that specifies to send a Bcc to the sender 4 For Request Return Receipt set whether to display a setting item on the Send e Mail window to show that the se
125. 19 7 3 Cleaning Inside the Scanner cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 420 7 4 Cleaning the Carrier Sheet ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 425 7 5 Replacing Parts iccccccisseceescosasisienstectiiis ewscdetavessecccasiennenns 426 7 5 1 Part Numbers and Replacement Cycle 0ee 426 7 5 2 Checking the Consumable Alert Status 00eee 427 7 5 3 Replacing the Pad ASSY ccccccccecceceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 428 7 5 4 Replacing the Pick Roller c ccccccccccsdesedeseesteeceeecuenecenenete 430 7 5 5 Purchasing the Carrier Sheet cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettttteeeeees 435 7 6 Performing a Scan TeSt ccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 436 E Regular User 22 2 ccceccseccesseeceeesenscceccctecedeeeceeeeedeneeeeeetee 436 BL ACMINISU ALO ccccrc mis cidiesrpo na dctaseeecap wiaamideaneenees 438 7 7 Calibrating the LCD Touch Panel essseeeeeeees 439 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 442 8 1 Removing Jammed Documents ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 443 8 2 Network Connection Troubleshooting cce 446 8 2 1 Basic Network Operation Tests cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 446 E Checking Basic Network Operation with a Ping Test 446 E Checking the Network Operating Status e 448 12 E Checking the NTP Server Settings by Synchronizing the SYVSISIN TANS
126. 2 E Uninstalling the Admin Tool ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 4 2 3 Administrator Login via the Admin Tool a an 87 Setting the System Settings with the Installation Wizard on the LCD Touch Panel csesseesseeeeeeeeeeeees 90 Setting the Setting Mode for the LCD Touch Panel 92 Configuring the System cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 4 5 1 Setting the Scanner Name cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettttaeeeeeeeees 94 4 5 2 Setting the LANGUAGE eee cette eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 96 4 5 3 Setting the REGiOn TIMEZONE ce eccecceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 97 454 Setting the Date Time 2 2 2002 cccccccecteeccteceeeeeeeeteeeeeseseeceeeeees 98 4 5 5 Setting the KeyDOar ivcsicescdcerdecucets wit weeedeonseonestvetiveeaideiensssdeas 99 4 5 6 Managing Certificates ccccececcesseeeeeeseeesseesseeceenceeeeeeees 100 E Importing a Certificate File cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 100 E Deleting a Certificate File ccc cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 101 Setting the Scan Options ccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 102 4 6 1 Setting the Multifeed Detection Method ceeeee 102 4 6 2 Adjusting the Scan Starting Position Offset Magnification 22 222 2 2 0cccceceneceneceeteeeeeeeseeeeeecececees 105 4 6 3 Setting General Scanner SettingS eeeeeeeeeees 106 Configuring the Login Related Settings
127. 27 Certisign Autoridade Certificadora AC3S 2018 7 10 Class 1 Primary CA 2020 7 7 Class 2 Primary CA 2019 7 7 Class 3 Primary CA 2019 7 7 Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority 2028 8 2 Class 3P Primary CA 2019 7 7 Class 3TS Primary CA 2019 7 7 Deutsche Telekom Root CA 1 2019 7 10 Deutsche Telekom Root CA 2 2019 7 10 DST ANX Network CA 2018 12 10 DSTCA E1 2018 12 11 DSTCA E2 2018 12 10 DST Entrust GTI CA 2018 12 9 Entrust net Secure Server Certification Authority 2019 5 26 Equifax Secure Certificate Authority 2018 8 23 Equifax Secure eBusiness CA 1 2020 6 21 Equifax Secure eBusiness CA 2 2019 6 23 489 Valid until Issuer YYYY MM DD Equifax Secure Global eBusiness CA 1 2020 6 21 EUnet International Root CA 2018 10 3 FESTE Public Notary Certs 2020 1 2 FESTE Verified Certs 2020 1 2 First Data Digital Certificates Inc Certification Authority 2019 7 4 FNMT Clase 2 CA 2019 3 19 GlobalSign Root CA 2014 1 28 GTE CyberTrust Global Root 2018 8 14 http www valicert com 2019 6 26 Microsoft Root Authority 2020 12 31 Microsoft Root Certificate Authority 2021 5 10 NetLock Expressz Class C Tanusitvanykiado 2019 2 20 NetLock Kozjegyzoi Class A Tanusitvanykiado 2019 2 20 NetLock Uzleti Class B Tanusitvanykiado 2019 2 20 PTT Post Root CA 2019 6 26 Saunalahden Serveri CA 2019 6 26 SecureSign RootCA1 2020 9 15 SecureS
128. 2h EEE EAEE ES A 449 E Checking the Mail Server by Sending a Test Mail 450 8 2 2 Other Network Connection Troubleshooting ee 451 E Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address 451 E Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its Host Name or FROIN renant eea a e E E a eA peaa ES 453 E Failure to Add a Network Printer cc csseeeeeeeeeees 454 E Failure to Print on a Network Printer 0 0000008 455 8 2 3 Failure to Access the Scanner using a Web Browser Admin Tool or Central AUMIN Servel cccccecccecceseeseeeeeeeeesaeeees 456 8 3 Other Troubleshooting cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 459 E Scanner Cannot Be Turned ON cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 460 E Scanner Does Not Start Up 2 0 0 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 460 E Data Cannot Be Scanned Properly eeeeeeees 461 E Scanned Data Is Inappropriate ccccceeeeeeseeeetseeeeees 463 E Cannot LOI azcrececeee tienes sok catia eet ened ee 464 E Operation Does Not Work cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 465 8 4 Points to Check before Contacting Your FUJITSU Scanner Dealer scccriccscccccnsstegeesissigneescaiteadeeeectcesciccsseaeeet 467 8 4 1 General Details cc cccecceeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeessseeeees 467 ote AN ml 0 Fo 0 be SU RO Pe 468 E Problem When Connecting to the Scanner via Computer a csitet an thtat setae secndeviewnlne
129. 4 1 General Details Info Findings Model ScanSnap N1800 Serial No Example 000001 For the serial number refer to 8 5 Checking the Scanner Labels page 470 Production date Date of purchase Year Month Example 2010 12 December 2010 For details refer to 8 5 Checking the Scanner Labels page 470 Year Month Day System version Symptoms Frequency of trouble Total throughput 467 8 4 Points to Check before Contacting Your FUJITSU Scanner Dealer 8 4 2 Error Status E Problem When Connecting to the Scanner via Computer Info Findings OS Windows Admin Tool version Displayed error message E Document Feed Trouble Info Findings Paper type Main purpose of use Last cleaned on Year Month Day Consumables last Year Month Day replaced on Error message details 468 E Problem with Central Admin Server Software Info Type of OS Windows for Central Admin Server software Findings Type of OS Windows for Central Admin Console Central Admin Server version Central Admin Console version Displayed error message E Sending an Original Document and Scanned Data Info Findings Can both the original document and scanned Circle one data be sent by fax or e mail Available Unavailable 469 8 5 Checking the Scanner Labels 8 5 Che
130. 4 System Requirements 1 4 3 Requirements for Central Admin Server For use of the Central Admin Server the following requirements apply Software English Versions Operating System Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later Windows Server 2008 1 NET Framework 2 0 SP2 or later NET Framework 3 0 SP2 or later or NET Framework 3 5 SP1 or later Internet Explorer 6 SP2 or later 2 IIS 5 0 or later 3 4 SQL Server 2005 Express Edition 1 To use HTTPS CAPICOM must be previously installed If CAPICOM is not installed the self signed certificate is not imported for communicating with HTTPS 2 Confirm that the latest security patch has been applied 3 A Web server function of IIS 5 0 or later must be installed 4 _ When installing IIS 7 0 or later make sure to install the following components S WebServer IS CommonHttpFeatures IIS StaticContent IIS DefaultDocument IIS HttpErrors IS ApplicationDevelopment IIS ASPNET IIS NetFxExtensibility IIS ISAPIExtensions IIS ISAPIFilter S HealthAndDiagnostics IIS HttpLogging IIS RequestMonitor IS Security IIS RequestFiltering S Performance IIS HttpCompressionStatic S WebServerManagementTools IS ManagementConsole Hardware Any computer which runs the supported software Intel Pentium III Processor 1 GHz and above or equally interchangeable processor 512 MB or more of free memory space 700 MB or more of free disk space
131. 428 4 Insert the new pad assy Holding the new pad assy by its sides insert into the pad assy socket Take care not to snag the pick springs Pad assy 2 F A a T _ ICAS Make sure that the pad assy is firmly and fully inserted If it is not correctly attached document jams and other feeding errors may occur 5 Close the top cover You should hear a click 6 Reset the pad assy usage counter The usage counter must be reset by an administrator For details refer to Resetting the Usage Counter page 171 Be careful that the top cover does not shut on your fingers 429 7 5 Replacing Parts 7 5 4 Replacing the Pick Roller 1 Remove any documents from the ADF paper chute 2 Remove the ADF paper chute Hold the ADF paper chute by both ends and lift it while leaning it towards the front 3 Pull the top cover release catch toward you place your hands at both sides of the top cover and open the top cover 4 Remove the sheet guide Squeeze the pickup tabs at both ends of the sheet guide with your fingers and lift the sheet guide up and away Be careful that the top cover does not shut on your fingers Pickup tab 430 5 Rotate the left bushing Css Pic
132. 55 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data 4 12 4 Setting a File Name Format for When Saving Scanned Data A file name format can be set to be used when scanned data is saved in a network folder FTP server folder or SharePoint folder The specified file name format is used for the default value in the File Name input field on the Save or Scan to SharePoint window for regular users The following file names cannot be used D CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO to COM9 LPTO to LPT9 The following symbols cannot be used for a file name 2 lt gt When you save a file in a SharePoint folder the following symbols cannot be used amp 1 lt gt A file name used for saving a file in the SharePoint folder cannot be set via the LCD touch panel Set it via the Admin Tool or Central Admin Console 1 Perform one of the following operations Fora network folder Select Network Settings gt Network Folder gt File Names Save Foran FTP server folder Select Network Settings gt FTP Server Folder gt File Names Save Fora SharePoint folder Select Network Settings gt SharePoint Folder gt File Names Save The File Names Save window appears The following description uses a network folder as an example 156 Network Settings gt Network Folder a Specify the file name format used when saving scan data Scanner Name MMddyyyyhhmms Sub folder Name
133. 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 6 Press the OK button The Maintenance window is shown again 437 E Administrator 7 6 Performing a Scan Test 1 Select Admin Menu gt Device Test gt Scan Test The Scan Test window appears 2 Load the document into the ADF paper chute for the scan test 3 Press the Scan button Scan Test Load a test page and press the Scan button Option Setting Pai Color Mode Auto 1O Paper Size Auto a Resolution 200dpi ID Scan Mode Duplex Compression Medium Brightness Medium Contrast Medium gt The scan test starts Option Sharpness EE Dropout Color fa Background Removal ZJ Page Orientation p gt Blank Page Skip Multifeed Setup D Edge Cropping Q Setting off off Ultrasonic When the scan test has completed the Scan Viewer window appears If the scanner fails to scan correctly an error message is displayed Deal with errors as required 4 Check the scanned data For more details about Scan Viewer refer to the following 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 5 Press the OK button This returns you to the Admin Menu window 438 7 7 Calibrating the LCD Touch Panel 22 This should be done when the LCD touch panel responses seem out of alignment with the positions of objects on the LCD screen 1 On the Admin Menu window select D
134. 65 to 0 15 mm Document length deviation 1 or less Punched holes are not allowed within 25 mm 0 98 in either side of the center of paper Do not glue on any other paper within 25 mm 0 98 in either side of the center of paper Refer to Figure 1 478 Figure 1 25 mm 25 mm Control point for scan i 4 1 lt gt ____ gt 1 1 1 if Page top Feed direction Page bottom N Multifeed detection by layer will often mis detect very thick paper When scanning such documents select None on the Multifeed Setup window Center of paper Multifeed detection rate may decrease depending on the document condition Multifeed may not be detected for the top and bottom 30 mm of a document 479 A 6 Conditions for Using the Carrier Sheet A 6 1 Paper Size The paper sizes that can be scanned are as follows A3 297 x 420 mm B4 257 x 364 mm 11 x 17 in 279 4 x 431 8 mm The above paper sizes must be folded in half to be scanned A 6 2 Paper Quality Paper type Recommended paper type for scanning is as follows Standard office paper Paper weight The following paper weights can be used Up to 127 g m Up to 34 Ib Up to 63 5 g m Up to 17 lb when scanning half fold paper Precautions Take note of the following You cannot mix the carrier sheet and regular documents in the same batch for scanning Up to three carrier sheets c
135. 8 All Rights Reserved Copyright PFU LIMITED 2010 24 Manuals The following manuals are prepared for the scanner Read them as needed Manual Description ScanSnap N1800 Getting Started paper Provides useful and detailed information on the scanner setup and cable connections Read this manual first Referred to as Getting Started in this manual ScanSnap N1800 Operator s Guide PDF Contains further information about scanner settings scanner administration and scanner operations and may be used as a general reference Referred to as Operator s Guide in this manual ScanSnap N1800 Help HTML Provides information about items on the screens and descriptions and actions to take for the messages Read it as needed MAbout This Manual Warning Indications Used in This Manual The following indications are used in this manual to obviate any chance of accident or damage to you and people near you and your property Warning labels indicate the warning level and statements The symbols indicating warning levels and their meanings are as follows This indication alerts operators to an operation that if not strictly observed may result in severe injury or death This indication alerts operators to an operation that if not strictly observed may result in safety hazards to personnel or damage to the product 25 Symbols Used in This Manual Besides warning indicators
136. 997 Kungliga Tekniska Hogskolan Royal Institute of Technology Stockholm Sweden All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 19 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the Kungliga Tekniska Hogskolan and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS
137. AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Portions Copyright 1989 by Carnegie Mellon Permission to use copy modify and distribute this program for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation the name of Carnegie Mellon not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Carnegie Mellon and Stanford University Carnegie Mellon makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty 22 WinDump3 9 5 Copyright 1999 2005 NetGroup Politecnico di Torino Italy Copyright 2005 2006 CACE Technologies Davis California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source a
138. Central Admin Server to a new version 286 5 18 Messages The following lists the messages that may appear during central admin operations 5 18 1 Central Admin Console Messages Window Message Action Connect Check the port number setting Enter a port number Check the target server setting Enter a target server Connection error Check the connection target and port number and try again Central Network Scanner Admin Tool Check that the Admin Tool has Admin could not be started Check that it been installed correctly Console has been installed Central Failed to display window Restart Restart Central Admin Console Admin Central Admin Console Message 287 5 18 Messages 5 18 2 Event Log mM System Event Log The system event log shows a list of all system events Log Type Application Event source Scanner Central Admin Server Code Message Action 11001 Scanner Central Admin No action required Server started up 11002 Scanner Central Admin Server shut down 12001 Default setting is being used in place of invalid value Parameter XXXX Invalid value XXXX Default value XXXX 12002 Tried to exceed the scanner Delete unneeded scanner registration limit configuration 12003 Tried to exceed the user Delete any unneeded user roaming roaming data registration data limit 12902 Schedule notification failed No action required Re
139. DF may take extra time T inthe following documents highlighted character strings cannot be set as a keyword The scanner may fail to correctly recognize the following kinds of documents characters as text However by changing the color mode and or improving the image quality for scanning such documents may be successfully recognized Handwritten documents Documents including smaller characters and scanned in low quality Skewed documents Documents including texts written in italic characters Superscript subscript letters and complex mathematical formulas Characters are written against an unevenly colored or patterned background Example Shaded characters Documents containing a lot of characters to which effects are applied Example Characters to which effects such as Shadow and Outline are applied Documents with a complex layout and documents with image noise uneven color paper overlap smudges may take longer for text recognition to process If the same character string is marked at multiple locations of a document the same keyword is added to the PDF file multiple times The total number of characters for keywords is limited up to 255 characters including delimiters between keywords When keywords are viewed in Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader the appended quotation marks may be found at the beginning and end of keywords 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Save tab 2 Press the Text Recognition button Th
140. DNS Server Central Admin Server 1 On the Admin Menu window press e The Admin Settings window appears Admin Settings Switch to mode selection Start the Installation Wizard Installation Wizard Show the Installation Wizard at next start up Yes A For Show the Installation Wizard at next start up you can set whether or not to show the Installation Wizard immediately after starting the scanner 90 2 Press the Installation Wizard button The Installation Wizard window appears Pea Installation Wizard Welcome to the Installation Wizard Select items to be set from below ac Scanner Name ay 7 Timezone Wi sauss Admin Password IP Address DNS Server Scanner Central Admin Server Cancel Start 3 Select the check boxes for items you want to configure with the Installation Wizard When the Region Timezone Date Time check box is selected the window for M setting the region timezone and the window for setting the date time will be displayed 4 Press the Start button A window for configuring the selected items appear in the Installation Wizard 5 Follow the wizard to configure the settings For details about the procedure for configuring system settings refer to the Getting Started 91 4 4 Setting the Setting Mode for the LCD Touch Panel 4 4 Setting the Setting Mode for the LCD Touch Panel Set the setting mode used for configuring or managin
141. E RRR R PERE Example 4 OU department OU section A User C L User D Example 3 ANNNERNAANNNNNANANRANONAUANRONPANNNNONACNNNAONARANANUUNNNANONNUNNONURNNNNODRRNNAV OU section B User E Example 2 Hereinafter Active Directory is used an example to describe search targets 129 4 9 Configuring the LDAP Settings Example 1 When searching for administrator user A user B CN Users DC example DC com Active Directory configuration is as follows 4 Active Directory Users and Computers 10 x EA File Action View Window Help Lx Active Directory Users and Computer Users 19 objects E BU Computers E department Domain Controllers Administrator User P DnsAdmins Fasu IPPORT_38 User netClien ecuti Gg user B User e Am e xXPAB e eagQhyren Name Type Description doo Security Group Bonsupdaterr Security Group Domain Admins Security Group f Domain Com Security Group Boomain Cont Security Group P Domain Guests Security Group f Domain Users Security Group enterprise A Security Group Bcroup Policy Security Group Guest User CBrelpservices Security Group Pras and IAS Security Group CBschema Admins Security Group Built in account for admini Members of this group are DNS Administrators Grou
142. EN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes software developed by the University of California Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors This product includes software developed by the Kungliga Tekniska Hogskolan and its contributors This product includes software developed by Yen Yen Lim and North Dakota State University 18 Portions Copyright 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EX
143. Editor To edit a mail address book or a local account of a scanner via the network interface install User Editor in a computer 1 To access a scanner specify the scanner name as a URL using a Web browser According to the settings described in 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection page 123 specify the URL in one of the following ways SSL is Off no port number change http scanner_name or IP_address SSL is Off port number change http scanner_name or IP_address port_number For port_number enter the changed port number SSL is On no port number change https scanner_name or IP_address SSL is On port number change https scanner_name or IP_address port_number For port_number enter the changed port number For SSL the Security Alert window is displayed when connecting Press the Yes button on the Security Alert window The Login window appears 2 Enter a User Name and Password ___ Getting Started Operator s Guide User Name Password 3 Press the Login button The download window appears 499 4 Press the Next button for the Network Scanner User Editor Network Scanner Admin Tool Next Network Scanner User Editor Next Scanner Central Admin Server Next Scanner Central Admin Console Next Screenshot Logout The Download Network Scanner User Editor window appears 5 Press the
144. Job Menus Job Groups Job Menus List Job Menu Layout Job Menu Name JobMenu1 r Job Button Settings Job Name El 2 Job2 Job2 3 Job3 Job3 E 4 Job4 Job4 5 Job5 Job 5 6 Job6 Job6 r Scan Viewer Decide er Job n Message a Scan a Li Logout Screen Bg Viewer gt 12 For Message Screen set whether to show Message Screen on the Job Menu window 13 For Scan Viewer set whether to show Scan Viewer on the Job Menu window 14 Press the OK button A job menu is added to the Job Menus List window 213 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence E Cloning a Job Menu This section describes how to clone a job menu 1 Press the Job Menus button The Job Menus List window appears 2 Select the job menu to view 3 Press the Clone button The Job Menu Layout area becomes active 4 Clone the detailed job menu settings 5 Press the OK button A job menu is added to the Job Menus List window E Editing a Job Menu This section describes how to edit a job menu 1 Press the Job Menus button The Job Menus List window appears N Select the job menu to be edited Press the Edit button The Job Menu Layout area becomes active 9 4 Edit the detailed job menu settings 5 Press the OK button The details of the job menu are changed 214 E Deleting a Job Menu This section describes how to delete a job
145. K button Scanner Name Required IP Address eg 192 168 0 10 MAC Address eg 01 23 45 ab cd ef Settings Group Add in Group System Updates Should not be applied Comment OK Cancel In Scanner Name enter the scanner name This entry is required In IP Address enter the numeric IP address of the scanner In MAC Address enter the MAC address of the scanner In Settings Group enter the settings group of the scanner This group name is used to identify the settings contents of a group The settings group name entered here is displayed on the Scanner Settings window Settings Groups In Add in Group enter the Add in group of the scanner This group name is used to identify an Add in module The Add in name entered here is displayed on the Add in Installs window Add in Groups Select the Should not be applied check box to not update the system In Comment enter the comments on the scanner 10 Press the OK button gt The scanner configuration is registered 256 mM Cloning a Scanners Configuration This section describes how to clone a registered scanners configuration 1 Press the Config List button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Config List window appears Select the check box for the scanner to be cloned Press the Clone button The Edit Scanner Details window appears Check and edit the scanner configuration Press the OK button The scanner
146. L armaansa aisia 86 Central Admin Console aaas 241 Central Admin Server oo eee 241 User Editor irano aan 502 Update check nnsesosesenennnenssnsssnnnnrreneneo 187 updating system settings from the Central Admin Server 523 uploading an Add in settings file 191 URG aeeaiei 82 195 499 USER O F Ne EEA AT ieee aoa 177 User Editor rpe asa een e s eE 497 user log epii eiaa a neketa 402 user lOG SUMMAFY eeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeee 173 user principal NAME ou eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 132 using the on screen keyboard _ 05 63 V ventilation ports essessssesssessseeeeereerrrrrreene 35 viewing Add in status o 190 detailed settings for a job group _ 221 detailed settings for a job menu 215 event log criaria 275 mail address book scese 506 scanned data eeens 398 scanners operating status 274 status of consumable parts _ 171 status of installed options 172 system log details 00 ee 175 system status oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 170 update status listS oo eeeeeeeeeees 272 user log details 0 00 00 cece eeeseereeereee 173 W windows of User Editor oo 503 WINS Servel i ncninednneda eed 51 Wizard areoso ietin a a Saa 90 wood containing paper eesssssesssseseeeeeeene 475 542 ScanSnap N1800 Operator s Guide P3PC 3182 01ENZ0 Issue date November 2010 Issued by PFU LIMITED The contents of this manual are subject
147. Mail Address ES OK to delete the following data AON El Taro acm Fujitsu EUGI abc example com The e mail target is deleted from the e mail address book My List can also be edited using User Editor For details refer to Appendix E Editing Using User Editor page 496 323 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax 1 On the Main Menu window press the Fax button The Send Fax window appears mm Z The scan information can be changed by pressing of Scan Settings For details refer to 6 9 Setting the Scan Options page 356 2 Enter a fax number into the Recipient Fax No field M Fax numbers can be selected from the fax number list by pressing E For details refer to 6 5 1 Selecting a Fax Number from the Fax Number List page 327 Send Fax E Recipient Fax No Notification To Sender s e Mail Address Default Scan Fa Scan Wa O Scan Settings Viewer 4 amp Send 3 In the Notification To Sender s e Mail Address field enter an e mail address to which a notification of the results of the fax sending should be sent For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 324 4 Press the Scan amp Send button When Scan Viewer is On this will be a Scan button The scanning starts The scanned data is sent by fax immediately after the scanning is comp
148. Mail Address Book c cccsseessssseeeseeesees 510 E 8 Editing Local ACCOUMES wissciisiciicenciiesrctninedesiioneandacaneierassiendesarbiranereauauiaunauenenericone 516 E 9 Discarding the Edited Mail Address Book or Local Accounts 2 0 518 E 10 Saving the Mail Address Book Local Account scceeesesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeees 519 E 11 User Editor Information Shown in User L0g sccecccseseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 521 496 E 1 What is User Editor User Editor is an application that is used for editing a scanner mail address book My List or local accounts A scanner mail address book or local accounts can be edited from a computer by connecting the computer installed with User Editor to a scanner via the network interface User Editor facilitates operations such as outputting a mail address book or local accounts in a file CSV format and importing and saving a number of e mail addresses in a file to a scanner User Editor Edit Mail address book Local accounts Mail address book Load and edit Local accounts eee Load and edit Scanner CSV format Mail address book Local accounts Editing a mail address book A regular user can edit an e mail address book My List and create a group in the mail address book by using User Editor so that the e mail addresses can be grouped by purpose and managed in a group Editing local accounts An administrator can creat
149. Name Local account list Status bar 504 E 5 Starting Exiting User Editor E Starting User Editor 1 Select Start menu gt All Programs gt Network Scanner gt Network Scanner User Editor The Network Scanner User Editor window appears YE Network Scanner User Editor eon x Address Book Local Account File F Edit E View V Address Book A Help H Scansnap BBS o amp First Name Last Name E mail Address Connected User E Exiting User Editor 1 Select the File menu and then select Exit The exit confirmation window appears 2 Press the OK button The User Editor exits 505 E 6 Viewing the Mail Address Book Local Accounts Load and view mail address books or local accounts E Loading from a Scanner Load mail address books or local accounts from a scanner in the following ways 1 Select Address Book tab to load mail address books Select Local Account tab to load local accounts 2 Perform either of the following Select the File menu and then select Load from Scanner Press the Load from Scanner button on the toolbar The Load from Scanner dialog box appears 3 Enter the information to connect to the scanner Load from Scanner a Connect to Port Number 80 Use HTTPS User Name Password Cancel Enter the scanner IP address host name or FQDN for Connect to To enter an IP address use the
150. OK button vaq gt Indicates an error message Read the message and press the OK button Indicates an information message Read the message and press the OK button No action required Indicates an inquiry message Confirm the message details and press a relevant button 224 4 18 1 Administrator Window Messages For details about messages and system logs other than those shown in the table below refer to Help Window Message Action Admin Tool Connection error For details about the action to be taken refer to 8 2 3 Failure to Access the Scanner using a Web Browser Admin Tool or Central Admin Server page 456 Cannot connect to this system Install the Admin Tool from the version scanner and try again 225 Chapter 5 Administrator Operations Central Admin Console This chapter explains scanner setting and management of the scanner performed using the Central Admin Console 5 1 F nction Lists asniensis eaaa saan a aana EEEN Gai daunas sauba 227 5 2 Central Admin Console WindoW ssssusssssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 230 5 3 Central Admin Console Quick Guide cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 231 5 4 Pre settings for Using Central Admin Consolle ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 5 5 Central Admin Server Login via the Central Admin Console 000 242 5 6 Setting the Central
151. OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Portions Copyright 1997 Yen Yen Lim and North Dakota State University All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by Yen Yen Lim and North Dakota State University 4 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL
152. PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Portions Copyright 1983 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Portions Copyright 1995 1996 1
153. Press the Import button The certificate file is imported The imported file is saved in the Trusted Root Certificate Authority store When a certificate file is distributed from the Central Admin Server any previously imported certificates will be deleted and replaced by the contents of the new file 100 E Deleting a Certificate File AdminTool 1 Select System Settings gt Local Settings gt Certificate Management The Certificate Management window appears 2 Select a certificate file to be deleted and press the Delete button The delete confirmation window appears 3 Press the Yes button The certificate file is deleted 101 4 6 4 6 Setting the Scan Options Setting the Scan Options 4 6 1 Setting the Multifeed Detection Method RES amino Cegel om Multifeed is an error that occurs when two or more sheets are fed simultaneously into the ADF The detection of the difference in length is also regarded as multifeed By default multifeed detection monitors for paper overlaps in the central column 25 mm either side from the center of the document of the document being scanned If stickies slips photos or other paper attached paper from here on are attached on the documents this section is considered to be an overlap causing unnecessary detection as multifeed When scanning those documents you can adjust the multifeed detection area to ignore a specific area with attachments such
154. R instance of Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Microsoft SQL Server Native Client Microsoft SQL Server Setup Support Files Microsoft SQL Server VSS Writer MSXML 6 0 Parser In this case uninstall the software components described above For details about uninstalling software components the following is a description of the process using Windows Server 2003 as an example To uninstall a software component select Control Panel Add or Remove Programs Use the following procedure to uninstall Microsoft SQL Server 2005 AMMANAGER instance 1 Point to Add or Remove Programs select Microsoft SQL Server 2005 and press the Remove button Select the Remove SQL Server 2005 instance components check box Select AMMANAGER Database Engine under Select all instance Press the Next button Follow the instructions displayed on the window For programs other than Microsoft SQL Server 2005 AMMANAGER instance deletion is not necessary as they are used by other applications If the following changes are to be made after the Central Admin Server software has been installed uninstall the Central Admin Server software and re install after making the changes Ifthe Central Admin Server is to be used as the Active Directory domain controller lf the domain controller role assignment is to be deleted 236 E Importing the Certificate This section uses Windows Server 2003 as an example 1 To startup IIS Manager on the
155. SMTP authentication enable SMTP authentication and configure the required settings for the authentication in the SMTP Server window For details refer to 4 10 1 Setting the e Mail Server page 137 5 Press the OK button The destination for alert notifications is set 4 16 7 Getting a Screenshot on the LCD Touch Panel The image of the window displayed on the LCD touch panel can be received via the network and saved in BMP or JPEG format 1 Specify the name of a scanner as a URL using a Web browser to access the scanner and display the download window For details about how to display the download window refer to Step 1 to Step 3 of Installing the Admin Tool page 82 2 Press the Next button for Screenshot on the download window Network Scanner Admin Tool Next Network Scanner User Editor Next Scanner Central Admin Server Next Scanner Central Admin Console Next Screenshot Next Logout A window is displayed for getting a screenshot of the current screen on the LCD touch panel 195 4 16 Maintaining the System 3 Press the Get Screenshot button A screenshot of the current window on the LCD touch panel is acquired and displayed BMP JPEG Save Back Logout Date Time 10015084016 Connect to FI JOTSQLHO7TQT i Restart Power Off Comment Login A ae User Name Password 4 Select a file format BMP or JPEG o
156. SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN 20 ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Portions Copyright 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific written prior permission THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Portions Copyright 1995 1996 1997 1998 and 1999 WIDE Project All righ
157. SV format can be edited UNICODE UTF 8 is used for the file character set Describe in CSV format as follows User Name Password E mail Address Comment Enabled Disabled Account Type The values for each item are as follows Item Value and Format User Name Specify the name of the user Password Specify the password Comment Specify the comment on the account E mail For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Address Mail Address Setting Values page 483 Enabled Specify whether the local account is enabled or disabled Disabled 0 Indicates that the local account is disabled 1 Indicates that the local account is enabled Account Specify whether or not the local account has administrator right Type 0 Indicates a regular user who do not have administrator right 1 Indicates a user who has administrator right 509 E 7 E 7 1 Editing an e Mail Target in the Mail Address Book This section describes how to edit e mail targets in the mail address book An mail address book can contain up to 5000 groups distribution lists and e mail addresses Setting a Group Set groups in the mail address book A group can contain multiple distribution lists and e mail addresses which allows e mail destinations to be sorted according to the respective purposes Sub groups can be created under a group By specifying a group as an e mail destination a
158. Save tab 2 Press the PDF Password button gt The Require PDF Password window appears 3 Select whether or not to set a password Require PDF Password Set whether to enable the PDF password setting EIN Bee TAS When Yes is selected the PDF Password window appears 378 4 Enter a password and confirm password PDF Password di Password pO Confirm Password Cancel 5 Press the OK button gt The PDF will be created with password protection 379 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 11 Compression When Auto RGB Color or Grayscale is selected as described in 6 9 2 Color Mode page 363 it is also possible to set the compression rate of scanned data For photos and images a high compression rate can be used to create a smaller file Changing the compression rate affects the scanned data in the following ways High compression Low compression Quality Low High File size Small Large 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Save tab 2 Press the Compression button The Compression window appears 3 Select a compression rate The lower the selected compression rate is the higher the quality of the resulting scan will be but at the expense of a larger file When PDF format is selected in 6 9 7 File Format page 369 High Compression for Color PDF can be used Set the compression rate ea ee e Low
159. Scanner Central Admin Server Scanner Central Admin Console If an older version of Central Admin Console is installed uninstall it before installing the latest version of Central Admin Console From the Web browser Tools menu select Internet Options and note the following points about the settings shown on the Internet Options dialog box In the Accessibility dialog box shown when pressing the Accessibility button on the General tab do not change the formatting and user style sheet settings If these settings are changed the displayed style of the Central Admin Console may be corrupted In the Language Preference dialog box shown when pressing the Languages button on the General tab move the same language as that of the Central Admin Server s operating system to the top If a different language is specified a problem may occur with the input or displays for the Central Admin Console On the Security tab if Security level for this zone is set to High part of the Central Admin Console window may not be correctly displayed In this case on the Security tab add the scanner or Central Admin Server to the trusted site zone and press the Default Level button Or press the Custom Level button and set Binary and script behaviors to Enable On the Advanced tab select the Play animations in webpages check box under Multimedia In Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008 this check box is not s
160. Scanner Features ie ceccissaccarsccnnedannadirdncendnaasannecranecsanenecuandds sncdenmennnalaavahetunnanenasiannt 31 1 2 Part Names and PUnCuOns viccicstiscscincisncersnetus tins cxmensaecendstenedieeneactansiscneranerabneecinnne 34 1 3 User Types and Operations iciscccscccscsiecesisevecsnsetisvevsevisededscierssrieveriertssievestencareres 37 1 4 System Requirements socciieriteticoncneieedoiasaniieentectendiabctinbeoadebetiantuestuetisvideaueneabuledinded 46 30 1 1 Scanner Features E Basic Uses for Scanned Data This easy to operate network scanner is used to scan documents for further use 1 Scanned data can be sent as an e mail attachment 2 Scanned data can be sent by fax 3 Scanned data can be printed on a network printer 4 Scanned data can be saved in a network folder 5 Scanned data can be saved in a SharePoint folder Send e Mail SMTP Server sat tet Original Document A User A Authentification e tanni LDAP Server SharePoint Server 2 File Server E Network or 2a save Folder O lt SharePoint Folder FTP Server 31 E Configure and Manage with Ease 1 1 Scanner Features Configuration and management of the scanner can be easily performed via the LCD touch panel on the scanner or via the Admin Tool or the Central Admin Console installed on a computer Computer Computer Central Admin Console Set multiple scanners
161. Setting the Job Mode 5 12 Setting the Job Mode page Viewing the Update Status Lists 269 5 13 Viewing the Update Status Lists page 272 Monitoring For details refer to the following Viewing ta Senne Opaning 5 14 Viewing the Scanners Operating Status Status page 274 Viewing Event Log 5 15 Viewing Event Log page 275 Collecting and Exporting Audit Logs 5 16 Collecting and Exporting Audit Logs page 277 Maintaining For details refer to 5 17 Maintaining Central Admin Server Settings page 281 232 5 4 Pre settings for Using Central Admin Console This section explains the required pre settings for using the Central Admin Console 5 4 1 Installing the Central Admin Server Software Install the Central Admin Server software in a computer 1 Perform Step 1 to Step 3 of Installing the Admin Tool page 82 The download window appears 2 Press the Next button for Central Admin Server Network Scanner Admin Tool Next Network Scanner User Editor Next Scanner Central Admin Server Next Scanner Central Admin Console Next Screenshot The Central Admin Server download window appears 233 5 4 Pre settings for Using Central Admin Console 3 Press the Download button Download Scanner Central Admin Server Version The Scanner Central Admin Server software requires OS Windows Server R 2003 SP2 or la
162. The scanner side status is changed to Pending and becomes an update target 272 6 Back button The Central Admin Console main window appears again When issuing an update call or clearing an error you can select or deselect all the Y scanners by the following operations Press the Select All button to select all scanners Press the Deselect All button to clear the check boxes of all scanners 273 5 14 Viewing the Scanners Operating Status 5 14 Viewing the Scanners Operating Status The operating status of the scanners can be viewed 1 Press the Operation Monitor button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Operation Monitor window appears Scanner Central Admin Server Settings Scanner Operation Monitor Admin Operations Operation Monitor Config List Event Log m Scanner Operating Status Online In use Offline Unreported Consumable Alerts Error 6 1 4 0 0 0 m Filter Conditions Scanner Name IP Address Model Settings Group Add in Group Comment Status Al Al Alb ba All id Apply 150000 150001 150002 150003 150004 150005 150006 150007 180008 150009 Pages 1 Press a scanner icon to show the Scanner Details window Immediately after the Central Admin Server starts up the operating status of the registered scanners is shown as Unreported In this case the status of each scanner will be updated when one of the following occurs A scanner
163. Update Type Server Side Data P Targeted Finished Pending Failed System Updates None 0 0 0 0 Add in Installs Available 0 0 0 0 Scanner Settings None 0 0 0 0 Job Mode Settings None r Events Date Time Origin Type Message lt Server gt Info 0A011002 New Add in install Default has been releas lt Server gt Info 0A011016 Add in module lt Server gt Info 0A011002 New Adc in install lt Server gt Info 0A011016 Add in module K lt Server gt Info 0A011002 New Add in install lt Server gt Info 0A011016 Add in module Default release has been c lt Server gt Info 0A011002 New Add in install Default has been releas lt Server gt Error 7A013008 Error notification e mail could not be sent Details Error is A For details on how to read the Scanner Side Update Status refer to 5 13 Viewing the Update Status Lists page 272 The Update Type link of Scanner Updates can be used to perform the following operations System Updates For details refer to 5 9 Updating the System page 261 Add in Installs For details refer to 5 10 Installing an Add in page 263 Scanner Settings For details refer to 5 11 Updating the Scanner Settings page 266 Job Mode Settings For details refer to 5 12 Setting the Job Mode page 269 260 5 9 Updating the System The system security and installed options can be updated by uploading a new system update module and setting update calls The new sy
164. able Area Center 1 Available Area 47 i 1 1 Control Point t 1 Top Left forPrinting o narenn forPrinting f e Sesneess Print Sheet Scanned data positioning Result Small Large Center g Scanned D Print Sheet Scanned Data Top Left Large Small Center Im i Oia tues i Scanned Data Scanned Data Print Sheet Top Left ee Same Same Center Povo Scanned Data Print Sheet Top Left 339 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data This returns you to the Print window The selected scaling setting is displayed to the right of the Scaling button Nothing is printed in the margin set in the printer settings If edge cropping has been set the width of the edge cropping setting may be larger than the margin set in the printer settings For more details refer to 6 9 20 Edge Cropping page 393 If Shrink to Fit is set the edge cropping area is not included in the print data If 100 is set the edge cropping area is included in the print data When 100 is set the printing result may differ from the original document since the starting position or available area of printing depends on the printer being used 340 6 6 2 Positioning Set the print position of the scanned data The setting selected here will be use
165. according to the settings on the Scan Settings window For example the operation of sending scanned data by e mail and then saving it in a folder can be set as a single job sequence Job Job Progress N Logout Job items Job Report 2 Job Menu Settings A job menu is a menu arrangement of the job sequences set by the user For example you can assign a job sequence that sends scanned data by e mail and then saves it in a folder as a button and set it on a Job Menu Job menu Job N Logout 197 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence 3 Job Group Settings A job group is a group of users assigned with the same job menu by the administrator Users associated with a group can use its job menu All users who are not included in any job group belong to a default group For example job menu A is assigned to group A and job menu D is assigned to the default group User C is included in group A therefore can use job menu A Users not included in a job group are able to use job menu D When User C logs in Group A Job menuA User A User B User C Job Menu i Logout When a user not included in a group logs in Default group Job menu D it Logout 198 4 17 1 Job Setting Quick User Guide The procedure for an administrator to set up job is shown below Setting a job sequence For details refer to 4 17 2 Setting a Job Sequence page Jobs List 201 View add to
166. addresses can be selected from the e mail address book by pressing Le For details refer to 6 4 1 Selecting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book page 313 If the e mail address book cannot be used contact the administrator 4 For File Name enter a file name for the scanned data attached to the e mail The following file names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO to COM9 LPTO to LPT9 The following symbols cannot be used 2 lt gt 5 Enter an e mail title into the Subject field 6 Enter the e mail contents into the Body field 7 When Request Return Receipt is available you can press Le button to select whether or not to request a return receipt confirming that the e mail you are sending is opened To request a return receipt contact the administrator 8 When Send a copy to my e mail address is available you can press Ll button to select whether or not to specify your own e mail address as a Bcc recipient of a copy of the e mail A To send a copy to your e mail address contact the administrator 310 9 Press the Scan button When Scan Viewer is Off this will be a Scan amp Send button The scanning starts The scanning status and scan settings are shown during the scan The maximum number of pages that can be scanned is 999 When Blank Page Skip is enabled the number of scanned pages excluding skipped blank pages is shown Additional
167. again If the problem persists even after taking the above mentioned actions contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider Even after pressing the top cover Scan button scanning does not start E Check item Is the gt button displayed on the LCD touch panel E Action The top cover Scan button can only be used on the following windows Send e Mail window Send Fax window Print window Save window Scan Viewer window Scan Test window Message Screen Scan Count window Confirmation window showing the number of scanned sheets File Name window 461 8 3 Other Troubleshooting Multifeed errors occur frequently E Check item Do the documents satisfy the conditions given in A 2 Paper Quality page 474 E Action Use documents which satisfy the conditions described in A 2 Paper Quality page 474 E Check item Has the document been loaded correctly into the ADF paper chute E Action Riffle and realign the document stack then load it back into the ADF paper chute E Check item Is the document stack more than 5 mm thick E Action Remove sheets from the stack to reduce it to a thickness of 5 mm or less E Check item Is the pad assy dirty E Action Clean the pad assy For more details refer to 7 3 Cleaning Inside the Scanner page 420 E Check item Is the pad assy worn out E Action Replace the pad assy For more details refer to 7 5 Replac
168. aia 220 job Menu sssssisrireiesesierrricesseseressessse 215 job sequence saucesncsevershergerineeravtiematad 208 scanned data eeen 401 537 DHOP ae e e e Eai 113 DHCP Serwer aai iaaiiai e aa penia idie pa 51 discarding edited mail address book 518 DNS server chase eerie eed 51 document feed direction eee 368 document loading capacity ee 476 downloading system lOG cach eel Aiea elt 176 system settings in CSV format 181 USEMIOQGS dennin eee 174 dropout Color oo cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 386 E edge Cropping es eccctecceeeeeseeseceteeeeneeessees 394 editing e mail address book 321 fax number list ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 331 JOD QIOUDY iconetas aanphcethiethi einai 220 JOOMMIGMU sarsies ii arenen 214 job sequence sssssseeieesereerreeeses 207 ejectroller ssusirrsiniriririiiisirisrssesesreessrees 422 email nck adcacteenmede AT 309 e mail address book 313 317 321 323 e mail address setting values 483 exporting audit lOgS aseeseen 277 EXIENSION cvessieheeciectnee eee 34 F fax number list 0 0 327 329 332 fax SVEP apna iisi aS 51 feat reS aneio naian a a aaa 31 feed toler ireren nee aon 422 fle format aaar iaa nadah aaie 370 file format of audit logs oo ee 279 file format setting ieee 369 file name for save e mail attachment 410 file Serveri irisa idien ia apa aa iaeiei ada 50 filtering job sequences cecene 208 the LDAP List seccecsccttaca
169. ailable for the currently selected folder press the Disk Cost button Installation fails if the length of any installation path folder path plus installation file name exceeds 259 characters Select an installation folder that respects this limit H Network Scanner Admin Tool Select Installation Folder A The installer will install Network Scanner Admin Tool to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder Browse Disk Cost Install Network Scanner Admin Tool for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer D Everyone Just me Cancel lt Back 9 Press the Next button From here on after follow the instructions on the window to proceed the operation When Network Scanner Admin Tool has been successfully installed is displayed the installation is complete Press the Close button After installation is completed log out from the scanner on the Web browser and close the Web browser After installation the Admin Tool can be started by selecting the Start menu gt All Programs gt Network Scanner gt Network Scanner Admin Tool 85 4 2 Administrator Login If this tool has already been installed skip to section 4 2 3 Administrator Login via D the Admin Tool page 87 for details about Admin Tool operations From the Web browser Tools m
170. ain name for signing in the SharePoint server and then press the OK button User names may be up to 256 characters long Passwords may be up to 256 characters long User Name and Password are case sensitive Domain names may be up to 64 characters long gt If the sign in is successful the available SharePoint server folders are shown in the SharePoint Site Folders list area 153 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data 5 Select the folder that is to be a save target from the SharePoint Site Folders list and press the lt lt lt button The selected folder is added to the Scan to SharePoint Folders list making it available to users as a save target To set a SharePoint folder from the Central Admin Server install NET Q Framework 3 0 Service Pack 1 or later into the Central Admin Server and restart it If NET Framework 3 0 Service Pack 1 or later is not installed in the Central Admin Server you cannot set a SharePoint folder from the Central Admin Server For SharePoint 2010 when a full domain is used to indicate a server sites with the same name as the actual site may appear under the actual site When this happens change the SharePoint server settings as follows Open Central Administration Under Operations select Alternate Access Mappings Select Edit Public URLs Change the URL shown in Default to a full domain Select Save Do not set a folder in which scanned data can
171. al account to be deleted 3 Perform either of the following Select the Local Account menu and then select Delete Press the Delete button on the toolbar The delete confirmation window appears 4 Press the OK button The local account is deleted 517 E 9 Discarding the Edited Mail Address Book or Local Accounts Discard the edited information of the mail address book or local accounts and restore it to its original state 1 Select the Address Book tab to discard the edited information of the mail address book Select the Local Account tab to discard the edited information of the local account 2 Select the File menu and then select Discard A discard confirmation dialog box appears 3 Press the OK button The edited information is discarded and the mail address book or local account is restored to its original state 518 E 10 Saving the Mail Address Book Local Account Save the edited mail address book or local account to the scanner E Saving the Edited Information to the Scanner Save the edited mail address book or local account to the scanner By saving the mail address book to the scanner My List is updated with the changes 1 Select Address Book tab to save mail address books Select Local Account tab to save local accounts 2 Perform either of the following Select the File menu and then select Save to Scanner Press the Save to Scanner button on the toolba
172. al admin If the number of scanners exceeds 1 000 multiple Central Admin Servers will be prepared The target scanners for each server should not exceed 1 000 52 1 4 7 Port Number List Function From To Port Number Protocol Number Admin Tool Admin Tool gt Scanner 80 HTTP 1 6 TCP Connection 443 HTTPS 1 6 TCP Central Admin Central Admin Server gt 80 HTTP 1 6 TCP Server Scanner 443 HTTPS 1 6 TCP Connection Scanner gt Central 20444 HTTP HTTPS 1 6 TCP Admin Server Central Admin 10444 HTTP HTTPS 1 6 TCP Console gt Central Admin Server Central Admin Server gt 389 LDAP 6 TCP LDAP server 636 LDAPS 6 TCP 3268 Active Directory Global 6 TCP Catalog 3269 Active Directory Global 6 TCP Catalog over SSL Central Admin Server gt 137 138 139 445 SMB 6 TCP Print server 17 UDP Central Admin Server gt 137 138 139 445 SMB 6 TCP File server 17 UDP Central Admin Server gt 20 21 FTP 1 6 TCP FTP server Central Admin Server gt 989 990 FTPS 1 6 TCP FTPS server Central Admin Server gt 25 SMTP 1 6 TCP SMTP server Central Admin Server gt Free 6 TCP Proxy server Central Admin Server 30444 HTTP HTTPS 1 6 TCP SharePoint link DHCP Server Scanner gt DHCP server 67 DHCP 17 UDP DNS Server Scanner gt DNS server 53 DNS 17 UDP WINS Server Scanner gt WINS
173. alert notifications by e mail mM Checking Basic Network Operation with a Ping Test Check the network connection status of the following computers and servers associated with the network For details about the checking procedure refer to 4 8 6 Checking the Network Connection with a Ping Test page 119 Computer with Admin Tool installed Computer with Central Admin Console installed Computer with Central Admin Server software installed Computer with User Editor installed DNS server WINS server NTP server LDAP server SMTP server File server FTP server Print server SharePoint server Domain controller Proxy server Q Depending on the server setting there may be no response from a Ping test 446 When checking the network connection status by a Ping test the following results are possible Follow each action described below Ping statistics shows Lost 0 0 loss E Details Network connection is working properly Ping statistics shows Lost 4 100 loss E Details There is no response from the Ping target E Action The specified Ping target might not be correct Check that the Ping target IP address host name or FQDN is correct The network transmission mode may differ from the connection target In 4 8 7 Checking the Network Operating Status page 121 change Link Speed Duplex Mode from Auto Negotiation to a fixed mode Ifthe Ping target is correct and the network transmission method is
174. alifornia Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors Secure iNetSuite 2 5J Copyright 2008 Dart Communications 23 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Network Scanner ScanSnap N1800 This easy to operate network scanner is used to scan documents for further use Trademarks Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows Server and SharePoint are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trade names of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Intel Pentium and Intel Core are registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries ABBYY and FineReader are trademarks of ABBYY Linux is the registered trademark or trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U S and other countries Red Hat is the registered trademark or trademark of Red Hat Inc in the United States and other countries ScanSnap and the ScanSnap logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of PFU LIMITED in Japan Other company names and product names are the registered trademarks or trademarks of the respective companies Manufacturer PFU LIMITED International Sales Dept Imaging Business Division Products Group Solid Square East Tower 580 Horikawa cho Saiwai ku Kawasaki shi Kanagawa 212 8563 Japan Phone 81 44 540 453
175. allation agent using a valid copy of the installation package sqlncli msi In this case uninstall SQL Server Native Client Then try installing the Central Admin Server software again If the installation process fails and the following error message appears stop the IIS service and re start manually Then re install the Central Admin Server software The installation process was canceled because the system was busy Try restarting the Installation Wizard again later If the following error message appears in Windows Server 2008 check that IIS Management Console is installed If IIS Management Console is not installed select and install IIS Management Console in Role Services Installation requires that the IIS Management Console be installed Refer to the manual for details To select the role services for IIS point to Administrative Tools Server Manager select Web Server IIS in Roles Summary In order to use HTTPS for communication to a scanner or computer installed with Central Admin Console software a self signed certificate is automatically imported on the Central Admin Server However it is recommended that a formal certificate be installed manually For details refer to Importing the Certificate page 237 235 5 4 Pre settings for Using Central Admin Console ifan interruption or error occurs during the installation or uninstallation process the following software components may be installed AMMANAGE
176. alphanumeric None character IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX is a value from 0 to 255 Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX is a value from 0 to 255 Scanner Name Port Number Numerical value from 1 to 65535 Use HTTPS 0 Do not use HTTPS default 1 Use HTTPS Model Add in Group Arbitrary character string Settings Group Arbitrary character string Comment Arbitrary character string System Updates 0 Enable default 1 Disable Info Last Modified YYYYMMDD hh mm ss When the Registered 0 Unregistered pingine 1 Registered detailed scanner Update Status 0 Nottatget information i Finished check box is 2 Pending selected 3 Error 4 Unregistered System Version Add in Version Scanner Settings 485 Item Value and Format Remarks Last Inventory YYYYMMDD hh mm ss When the Taken Include Last System YYYYMMDD hh mm ss detailed Update scanner information Last Add in Install YYYYMMDD hh mm ss check Hoxie Last Scanner YYYYMMDD hh mm ss selected Settings Update Current System Update Status NotTarget Finished Pending Error Unregistered Current Add in Install Status NotTarget Finished Pending Error Unregistered Current Scanner Settings Status Scanner Version NotTarget Finished Pending Error Unregistered AONO FWBNH OC BRWBN A O PAD ASSY PICK ROLLER Numerical value Numerical value Total Throughput
177. an be loaded at once Do not write on color stain or cut the end with a black amp white pattern because the carrier sheet will not be recognized properly Do not place the carrier sheet upside down Otherwise a paper jam may occur and damage the carrier sheet and the document inside Do not leave your document inside the carrier sheet for a long time Otherwise the ink on the document may be transferred onto the carrier sheet To avoid deformation do not use or leave the carrier sheet in high temperature places such as under direct sunlight or near a heating apparatus for a long time Do not fold or pull the carrier sheet by force Do not use a damaged carrier sheet because it may damage or cause the scanner to malfunction To avoid deformation keep the carrier sheet on a flat surface without any weight on it Be careful not to cut your finger on the edge of the carrier sheet f paper jams occur frequently feed about 50 sheets of PPC paper recycled paper before scanning with the carrier sheet The PPC paper recycled paper can either be blank or printed 480 481 Appendix B Management Settings and Files This appendix describes the scanner operating environment and management settings and files 482 B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values e Mail addresses may be up to 256 characters long One of the following e mail address formats must be used XXXXXXX P_address XXXXXXX Host_name XXxX
178. an be used to add the e mail address to My List 9 Press the OK button The e mail address is added to the field in the Send e Mail window 316 6 4 2 Adding an e Mail Target to the e Mail Address Book The following explains how to add an e mail address or a distribution list to your My List in the e mail address book e Mail targets cannot be added to the LDAP List The maximum number of e mail targets that can be stored in the e mail address book is as follows Total of 5 000 e mail targets which include groups distribution lists and or e mail addresses Total of 10 000 e mail addresses 1 Open the e Mail Address Book window in either of the following ways On the Send e Mail window press in the e mail address field On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button then on the Maintenance window press the Edit e Mail Address button 2 Select the My List tab e Mail Address Book My List LDAP List Search Target First Name Last e Mail Name Address E Search Position Head Ela abc Selected e Mail Addresses Edit e Mail HOSTESS Book Cancel 317 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail 3 Press the Edit e Mail Address Book button gt The Edit e Mail Address Book window appears Edit e Mail Address Book First Last e Mail Name Name Address 4 Press To add an e mail address or distribution list
179. anagement gt Maintenance gt System Update The System Update window appears 2 Select the Check for updates at scanner startup check box 3 Select the Request e mail notification when a new update is released check box When a new update is released an e mail entitled Event notification from ScanSnap N1800 Scanner_Name is sent to the e mail address that is set in the Alert Notification window For details about the e mail address settings for alert notification refer to 4 16 6 Setting the Destination for Alert Notifications page 194 188 4 16 3 Maintaining Add in Modules An Add in is an application created by using the ScanSnap N1800 SDK development kit This section describes how to check the Add in status how to install uninstall an Add in module how to upload an Add in settings file and how to set the on screen keyboard to be displayed when running an Add in E Installing an Add in Module faminto Up to six Add in modules can be installed 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt Add in Software gt The Add in Software window appears Install Uninstall Add in Module not installed Specify an Add in to be installed Install Browse Browse Specify an Add in settings file Show On Screen Keyboard 2 Press the Browse button to specify an Add in installation file 3 Press the Install button The Add in module
180. and thoroughly as dirty feed rollers can adversely affect the paper pickup performance Pressing the Cleaning button seven times rotates the feed rollers and eject rollers approximately one complete revolution When Help is shown close it before pressing the Cleaning button 6 When you have finished cleaning the rollers press the OK button and close the Roller Cleaning window When cleaning the feed rollers or eject rollers be careful not to touch the rollers with your fingers while they are rotating 423 7 3 Cleaning Inside the Scanner 4 Close the top cover You should hear a click Confirm that the top cover is completely closed If not completely closed document jams and feeding errors may occur When closing the top cover do not slam it shut by pushing the LCD touch panel as this may damage it amp Be careful that the top cover does not shut on your fingers 424 7 4 Cleaning the Carrier Sheet Use a soft dry cloth a cloth slightly moistened with Cleaner F1 or a mild detergent or the Cleaning Wipe to clean the carrier sheet Lightly wipe off the dirt and dust from the surface and interior of the carrier sheet As the carrier sheet is repeatedly used dirt and dust may collect on the surface of or inside the carrier sheet To prevent scanning malfunction the carrier sheet should be regularly cleaned Never use paint thinner or other organic solvents Do not rub too
181. ange the share name printer alias and register it again The default network printer alias will be the same as the alias selected from the network tree For details on changing the folder alias refer to Renaming a Network Printer page 168 166 E Registering a Network Printer Network Path 1 Select Network Settings gt Print gt Network Printer The Network Printer window appears 2 Press the Add button The window for selecting a network printer appears 3 Press the Network Path button The window for adding a network printer appears Network Settings gt Print Add a network printer Printer Alias Network Printer If left blank the shared printer name will be used Network Path eg Domain Computer Printer Cancel Network Tree Pressing the Network Tree button returns to the window for selecting a network printer from the network tree 4 Enter a network printer alias and network path 5 Press the OK button The window returns to the Network Printer window and the registered network printer is added to the network printer list A network printer that is already registered cannot be added Once the network printer is registered do not change the shared name or printer alias on the print server To change the shared name or printer alias remove the registered network printer change the name and then register it again The default network printer ali
182. anned data may indicate that the glass is dirty Pick roller x 1 Gently rotate the pick roller from top down to lightly wipe off the dirt and dust Take care not to damage the soft rubber The pick roller should be cleaned carefully and thoroughly as a dirty pick roller can adversely affect the paper pickup performance Feed rollers x 2 and eject rollers x 2 When cleaning turn on the power and let the feed rollers and eject rollers rotate 1 On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button The Maintenance window appears 2 Press the Roller Cleaning button Maintenance ES Edit e Mail Addresses Roller Cleaning Cancel The Roller Cleaning window appears 422 Roller Cleaning Press the Cleaning button to step the feed rollers forward Press the OK button after the feed rollers have been cleaned 3 Open the top cover 4 Lightly press a soft cloth slightly moistened with Cleaner F1 or the Cleaning Wipe against the surface of the feed rollers 5 Press the Cleaning button on the Roller Cleaning window When the button is pressed the feed rollers and eject rollers rotate slightly Pressing the button continuously rotates the feed rollers and eject rollers for a fixed amount every few seconds Gently clean the rollers as you rotate them Stop pressing the button to stop the rollers rotating The feed rollers and eject rollers should be cleaned carefully
183. anner Config List window Import a defined scanner configuration file and register scanner configuration for several scanners at once Add directly from the Scanner Config List window Add scanner configuration directly from the Scanner Config List window for one scanner at a time The following table shows which config items are added imported to the Central Admin Server from a config file or from a scanner Configuration Configuration Item Comment from file from scanner MAC Address Scanner MAC address Yes Yes IP address Scanner IP address Yes Yes Subnet Mask Scanner subnet mask Yes Yes Scanner name Scanner name Yes Yes Port Number Scanner port number Yes Yes Use HTTPS Whether or not HTTPS is used Yes Yes to communicate with the scanner Model Scanner model Yes Yes Add in Group Group name used to identify Yes applied Add in install modules Settings Group Group name used to identify Yes applied scanner settings Comment Note Yes 251 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration Item Comment Configuration from file Configuration from scanner System Updates Whether or not the system is to be updated Yes Info Last Last date and time scanner 1 1 Modified configuration was modified Registered Whether or not information of a 1 1 target scanner is added to Central Admin Server Update Status Indicates the
184. anner Name window appears fi System Settings gt Local Settings Enter the scanner name Current Values Scanner Name SSN1800 Member of De Local Settings Scanner Name Certificate Management Previous Cancel 2 Enter a Scanner Name 3 In the Member of section specify the scanner as a Workgroup or Domain member 4 Enter a workgroup name or domain name in the input field 5 Press the OK button gt The restart confirmation window appears 94 In the following case the authentication window appears When specifying the scanner as a domain member When changing the name of a scanner that is a member of a domain Check the required authentication information when adding to a domain and enter a user name that can be added to the domain and the password User names may be up to 256 characters long Passwords may be up to 256 characters long User Name and Password are case sensitive If the user name and password are valid the restart confirmation window appears 6 Press the Now button gt The scanner is restarted Scanner names may be duplicated depending on the network status v If the specified scanner name is the same as one already in use network communication problems occur In this case try the following steps 1 Disconnect the LAN cable Press the Shutdown button on the LCD touch panel to turn the scanner off Press the power button
185. anner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider E Scanner Does Not Start Up The The last attempt to restart message is shown on the window and the scanner does not start up E Check item After turning the scanner on was the power turned off immediately E Action Press the power button Disconnect AC cable from the scanner to turn off the scanner and connect the cable again After turning the power off wait for at least 10 seconds before turning the power back on again If the problem persists even after taking the above mentioned actions contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider Scanner does not resume from standby mode E Check item After turning the scanner off was the power turned back on again immediately E Action Press the power button 460 E Data Cannot Be Scanned Properly Scanning does not start E Check item Has the document been loaded correctly into the ADF paper chute E Action Reload the documents into the ADF paper chute E Check item Is the top cover completely closed E Action Close the top cover completely E Check item Does the same problem occur after turning the scanner power off and back on again and re logging in E Action Disconnect AC cable from the scanner to turn off the scanner and connect the cable again After turning the power off wait for at least 10 seconds before turning the power back on
186. as photos and prevent mis detections The intelligent multifeed detection allows the length and position of the attached paper to be memorized in the scanner so that the multifeed will not be detected from the next scan For document requirements for multifeed detection refer to A 5 Multifeed Detection Conditions page 478 1 Select System Settings gt Scanner Settings gt Multifeed Settings gt The Multifeed Settings window appears System Settings gt Scanner Settings Scanner Settings Y Enter the multifeed detection settings Ultrasonic Multifeed Detection Zone Multifeed Settings Full Scanner Adjustment Zone Limits e oe 2 Settings 0mm lt 1 lt 2 lt 510mm measured from the leading edge top of page Select the intelligent multifeed detection mode Manual Mode Bypass by button Previous Cancel 102 2 Set the area for multifeed detection in the Ultrasonic Multifeed Detection Zone section Starting from the top edge of a document sheet set the area to be checked for multifeeds Multifeed may not be detected for the top and bottom 30 mm of a document 3 In Step 2 if Middle or Top amp Bottom is selected enter both 1 upper limit and 2 lower limit Middle Multifeeds will be detected within 1 upper limit and 2 lower limit set a 25 mm 25 mm Up to 510 mm Outside of multifeed detection area Center of paper 103 4 6 Se
187. as will be the same as the alias selected from the network tree For details on changing the folder alias later refer to Renaming a Network Printer page 168 The authentication window may appear 167 4 13 Setting the Network Printers E Renaming a Network Printer 1 Select Network Settings gt Print gt Network Printer The Network Printer window appears 2 Select the network printer that is to be renamed 3 Press the Edit button The window for editing the network printer alias appears 4 Enter a new printer alias Network Settings gt Print Enter the new printer alias Printer Alias Network Printer If left blank the shared printer name will be used Printer01 A4 color Network Path Cancel 5 Press the OK button The network printer is renamed 168 E Removing a Network Printer 1 Select Network Settings gt Print gt Network Printer The Network Printer window appears 2 Select the network printer that is to be removed from the printer list 3 Press the Remove button The window for removing a network printer appears 4 Confirm the details of the network printer that is to be removed are correct and press the Yes button The selected network printer is removed from the network printers list If removing a network printer is attempted while the network is not connected the process may be stopped while Deleting is displayed on the window Bef
188. at a time via the network interface Central Admin Server wily qUlnnane e a ai attra iat delat aa aS Scanner Scanner Scanner ITIP PILI TTI Titi elif riiiiiii iii th Admin Tool ALLLLELLLEELLLETIS Annnudunnnnnnnnn Admin Tool Set one scanner at a time via the network interface LCD Touch Panel Directly set one scanner at a time Application that connects to each scanner and configures the scanner settings Central Admin Console Application that connects Central Admin Server which manages multiple scanners and manages operating environment and operating status of multiple scanners mM Advanced Security Measures The following security functions are provided for the scanner Login authentication can restrict user access Scanned data can be converted to password protected PDF files Scanned data can be protected Since the scanner is intended to be shared by multiple users data privacy is an important factor The following security measures are used to protect the data against untoward access Encryption The scanned data is temporarily stored in the scanner during being e mailed faxed printed or saved Because it is always stored in encrypted form no one can read it even if the disk contents are parsed Scanned data deletion After the scanned data has been e mailed faxed printed or saved the temporary data is deleted Even if a
189. ation eg cn root dc example dc com Anonymous user connection will be attempted if an Authorized User DN is not entered Login User Attributes d Cancel be entered Press the OK button to confirm the setting 3 For SSL select whether or not to enable SSL 4 Enter the LDAP server IP address host name or FQDN in the Address input field 5 In the Port Number input field enter a port number to be used by the scanner to communicate with an LDAP server 6 In the Search Base DN input field enter the distinguished name of the LDAP search base The LDAP entries under the character string entered here will become the search target For details about the character string to be entered and connection to the LDAP search target refer to LDAP Search Target page 129 127 4 9 Configuring the LDAP Settings 7 For Search Timeout select the LDAP List search timeout delay The selected Search Timeout value is displayed 8 For Login User Attributes select login user attributes When Other LDAP Server is selected for the Server Type select whether LDAP server login users can be searched for by uid or cn 9 For LDAP Server Access Authorization enter an authorized user name and password when searching for users to be logged in to the LDAP server when Other LDAP Server is selected for Server Type 10 To check the connection with the LDAP server press the Connect
190. ation page 251 Event Log window 5 15 Viewing Event Log page 275 230 5 3 Central Admin Console Quick Guide Administrator operations for management using the Central Admin Console are as follows Pre settings 1 Installing the Central Admin Server Software 2 Installing the Central Admin Console 3 Setting up a Firewall for the Central Admin Server 4 Configuring the Scanner Settings for Central Admin Management Vv Login to Central Admin Console Vv Set the Central Admin Server Vv Register the scanners to be managed 231 For details refer to 5 4 Pre settings for Using Central Admin Console page 233 For details refer to 5 5 Central Admin Server Login via the Central Admin Console page 242 For details refer to 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 For details refer to 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration page 251 5 3 Central Admin Console Quick Guide Scanner settings For details refer to the following management 5 8 Monitoring and Maintaining the PON es Scanner Network page 260 Monitoring and Maintaining the 5 9 Updating the System page 261 Scanner Network f 5 10 Installing an Add in page 263 Updating the System Installing an Add in 5 11 Updating the Scanner Settings Updating the Scanner Settings page 266
191. ation of the open Admin Tool is not guaranteed 86 4 2 3 Administrator Login via the Admin Tool The Admin Tool can be set up to manage the scanner via a computer This section explains how to login using the Admin Tool When an administrator or user is already logged into a scanner login via the Admin Tool is not possible However if automatic login is set login via the Admin Tool is possible while the main menu or job menu is displayed If the normal screen display does not appear for example an X mark appears wait for a few minutes and try again If the problem still occurs contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider If a button is rapidly pressed many times in succession a Connection error message may appear In this case wait for a few minutes and try again For details about setting up to manage the scanner via a computer refer to 1 4 1 Requirements for Admin Tool page 46 The default user name and password for the administrator are set as follows User name admin Password password The scanner setup can be configured by one user Session timeout time is 20 minutes fixed The session timeout time is extended by a further 20 minutes for the following when a menu button is pressed when the OK button is pressed 87 4 2 Administrator Login 1 Select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Network Scanner gt Network Scanner Admin Tool
192. ays its sub menu The sub menu items are shown in the right side of the window Selecting the lowest level menu displays the setting window for the menu Menu Admin Menu System Settings Network Settings Local Settings Scanner Settings Login Settings Monitoring amp Management Device Test 75 4 1 Windows 4 1 2 Administrator Windows via the Admin Tool Administrator windows via the Admin Tool are as follows When the Scanner Settings button is pressed Selecting a menu displays its sub menu Selecting the lowest level menu displays the setting window for the menu Menu Tool Menu 1E Network Sanner Admin Tool M erSetinos JobMenu Settings al DownloadManual Q About Hep SCANSNAP Ext Ya Disconnect Check the scanner s system information Item System Version Scanner Version OBO3 Initial Use 04 15 Cumulative On Time 00000098 hours ABBYY TM FineReader TM 7 X 8 X 9 X Engine C ABBYY 2009 OCR by ABBYY All rights reserved ABBYY FineReader are trademarks of ABBYY Adobe Adobe PDF Scan Technology and the Adobe PDF Signature are either registered trademarks or tradenames of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries 76 When the Job Menu Settings button is pressed When a tab is selected in the job mode settings menu the related setting window is displayed Job Mode Settings Tool Menu NO Ext Ya Di
193. be associated with the Homepage search item The default value is wWWWHomePage 6 When a SharePoint folder is to be used in the scanner settings perform the setting for connecting with SharePoint server in SharePoint Server Connection Settings When no SharePoint folders are used the Scanner Shared Folder Service M can be stopped 247 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server 7 In Software Update Time Period Restrictions set whether to automatically update the scanner system security installed options and Add ins using the Central Admin Server When an update is available for both systems security and installed options M included and Add ins if the update of systems is completed outside the specified time period update is not run for Add ins The length of time required for a software update is estimated as follows Update module size x No of target scanners x 1 5 Network throughput Example the following update case should be estimated as 15 x 40 x1 5 900 seconds 15 minutes 1 Update module size 15 MB Number of target scanners 40 Network throughput 8 Mbps 1 MB s 8 In Operation Monitor set whether to check the operating status of scanners 9 In Error Notification Settings set whether to send a notification e mail to the administrator if an error occurs A notification e mail is sent when the Error event log occurs If an error with the same code o
194. between On and Off Message a Scan a N Logout Screen Bg Viewer gt 408 Operations vary according to whether the Message Screen is set to On or Off Ifa job sequence is processed when Message Screen is set to On the Message Screen will be shown JobMessagetitle JobMessage Cancel After checking the message press the Scan button to start the scan If any further job setup steps are required press the OK button that appears instead Ifa job sequence is processed when Message Screen is set to Off the job will be processed without showing the Message Screen 409 6 14 Processing a Job 6 14 2 Changing a File Name for Save e Mail Attachment When a job is processed file names to be used when saving or attaching scanned data to an e mail can be changed It is not possible to change a file name when the File Name window is set not to be v shown 1 On the Job Menu window press the Job button 2 On the File Name window enter the file name for the scanned data to be saved or sent by e mail File Name s a a Enter the file name to be used for the scan data File Name pF When sequence numbers are set to be appended to file names a sequence number is appended to the end of the default file name The guidance message A sequence number will be appended to the file name is shown on the window A sequence number will not be appended to a f
195. cal sACCOUNE a s2 252 4is secede eee a seeeee eae 517 E 8 3 Deleting a Local ACCOUNT 0c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 517 Discarding the Edited Mail Address Book or Local 7X of or 01 0 0 kneel eee enn Sa ne eee mene ee PRE en Nee Perr 518 15 E 10 Saving the Mail Address Book Local Account 519 E Saving the Edited Information to the Scanner 519 E Saving the Edited Information to a File cce 520 E 11 User Editor Information Shown in User Log 521 Appendix F Compatibility with Different Versions 522 F 1 Updating System Settings from the Central Admin SGI VON re apee e ena aeaa a a eae a rr aiei 523 F 2 Functional Compatibility Between the Scanner and Central Admin Server sssassssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 524 F 3 Backing Up Restoring Data Between Different Versions of the Central Admin Server Software 525 F 4 Event Source Name Output by Central Admin SGI OF css ssdeces tcc epee eeedet setae T 526 Appendix G Glossary c cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseseeseeneeeaneesaneenees 528 Abo t Maintenance siiin erinnern ania ameen innaka aaa anaana ii 534 ae S E E P E E Seana A E EAA 536 16 17 Copyright NetAdvantage 2007 Copyright 2000 2007 Infragistics Inc LEADTOOLS for NET Copyright 2005 LEAD Technologies Inc WinPcap3 1 Copyright 1999 2005 NetGroup Politecnico di Torino Italy Copyri
196. can be changed by pressing of Scan Settings For details refer to 6 9 Setting the Scan Options page 356 2 Enter e mail addresses distribution list names or groups in To Cc and Bcc fields Enter a distribution list name to send a single e mail to multiple e mail addresses contained in the distribution list For more details about distribution list settings refer to 6 4 2 Adding an e Mail Target to the e Mail Address Book page 317 Enter a group to send an e mail to all e mail addresses contained in the group A e Mail addresses can be selected from the e mail address book by pressing a For details refer to 6 4 1 Selecting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book page 313 If the e mail address book cannot be used contact the administrator Groups can be edited using User Editor Distribution lists can also be edited For details refer to Appendix E Editing Using User Editor page 496 Send e Mail n ES a To Bcc Cc Subject File Name Body NE Return Receipt Send a copy to my e mail ad BEW Scan xs S a Cancel Settings My Default Viewer 3 309 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail 3 Enter an e mail address in the From field This field can be entered if logged in with the the guest account that has no set e mail address For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 From e mail
197. canner off 3 Press the power button to start the scanner with the LAN cable disconnected 4 Enter a non duplicated IP address 5 Re connect the LAN cable to the scanner f the DHCP server cannot be reached when DHCP is set to On the IP address is set to 169 254 XXX YYY where XXX and YYY are arbitrary values between 0 and 255 E Setting the Link Speed Duplex Mode While the network operating status is correct if the network is not communicating properly change the Link Speed Duplex Mode settings 1 On the Network Status window change Link speed Duplex mode to a fixed mode 2 Press the OK button The Link Speed Duplex Mode setting is changed E Setting Wake On LAN Set whether or not to enable Wake On LAN to turn the scanner on off via the network interface 1 For Wake On LAN on the Network Status window select whether to enable Wake On LAN 2 Press the OK button gt Wake On LAN is set 122 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection Bua AdminTool To use the Admin Tool or Central Admin Server for the scanner perform the connection settings 1 Select Network Settings gt Network Admin gt Admin Connection The Admin Connection window appears Network Settings gt Network Admin Network Admin W Admin Connection Scanner Central Admin Server Port Number 1 65535 SSL Certificate This certificate has expired or is not yet valid Issued by
198. canner has been registered Info 0A021105 Scanner has been registered Info 04021105 Scanner has been registered Info 0A021105 Scanner has been registered Info 0A021105 Scanner has been registered Info 0A021105 Scanner has been registered Info 04021105 Scanner has been registered Info 04021105 Scanner has been registered Info 04011002 New Add in install Default has been released Info 04011016 Add in module Info 0A011002 New Add in install r Info 0A011016 Add in module KD Info 0A011002 New Add in install Pages 1 Select the Date Time link to display the Event Details window where you can view the event details 2 To filter scanners shown in the list specify filter conditions and press the Refresh List button The events satisfying the filter conditions appear 275 5 15 Viewing Event Log Downloading Event Log Press the Event Log button in the Central Admin Console main window The Event Log window appears Press the Export button A confirmation window for whether or not to download the event log appears Press the OK button The File Download dialog box appears Press the Save button The Save As dialog box appears Specify the download destination where the event log is to be saved The events are output to the file When downloaded to a computer the file will contain CSV format data The file is saved in the following form Date Time Origin Type Event_ID Message The type
199. ccurs more than once a minute a notification e mail is sent for only the first occurrence of the error 10 In Data Import Export select the character set of CSV files to be used for scanner configuration import export or event download 11 In Log Retention set the number of days to keep the event log 12 In Audit Log Settings set whether to automatically collect scanner system logs and user logs and save them in the Central Admin Server The system and user logs collected in the Central Admin Server are collectively referred to as audit log s 13 Press the OK button The specified settings are saved mM Changing the Admin Password 1 Click the Scanner Central Admin Server Settings link on the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window appears 2 Press the Change Administrator Password button The Change Administrator Password window appears 248 3 Enter a new administrator password and press the Change Password button Change Administrator Password The Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window is shown again 249 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server Clearing the User Roaming Data Click the Scanner Central Admin Server Settings link on the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window appears Press the User Roaming Data Select amp Clear button The User Roaming Data Selec
200. ciesunc adn sied or ananin ninasoedd niaaa adanu 426 7 6 Performing a Scan TeSt ciciesncasacecnecnianceccedecanieccaneanwanenstennninacsuacceranaeeunsseenaacenaninn 436 7 7 Calibrating the LCD Touch Panel 00 cssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeesesneens 439 416 7 1 Cleaning Supplies and Part to Clean E Cleaning Supplies Cleaning Supplies Part No Remarks Cleaner F1 PA03950 0352 1 bottle 100 ml Used to lightly moisten the cloths before wiping parts clean When a large amount of the cleaner is used it may take some time until it is dry Use an appropriate amount to moisten the cloths Also wipe off Cleaner F1 well from the target part by dry cloth Cleaning Paper CA99501 0012 1 pack 10 sheets For use with Cleaner F1 Cleaning Wipe Soft dry cloth PA03950 0419 1 pack 24 sheets Pre moistened with Cleaner F1 Cleaning Wipes are used instead of moistened cloths Any commercially available lint free product Contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider to obtain these products 417 7 1 Cleaning Supplies and Part to Clean E Which Parts and When Part to Clean Cleaning Frequency Pad assy Clean after every 2 000 sheets scanned Feed roller Eject roller Pick roller Idler roller Glass Ultrasonic sensor Cleaning frequency may be increased depending o
201. cking the Scanner Labels The following diagrams show where the labels are located on the scanner The labels are on the back of the scanner Label A Label B The following are the label examples Label A Example Contains various scanner information vone N1800 oneBaserzse PART NO PA03609 B00 O 12B SER NO i a ary DATE YYYY MM Pe oo EXXXXXX KXXX _ 24N rae 2 0A_ 6 Oke p E BU ike MADE IN CHINA Zl Label B Example Indicates the various standards that the scanner conforms to Z Ona E with 241912 jtal apparatus complies with Canadian ell num rique de la classe B est conforme 470 8 6 Pre Maintenance Preparations Before sending the scanner for maintenance the user data store and system settings should be backed up Backing up the User Data Store page 178 from 4 15 1 Maintaining the User Data Store page 177 4 15 2 Maintaining the System Settings page 181 After backing up the user data store and system settings the original data may be deleted Refer to the following sections for details If the hard disk is replaced all settings will revert to their factory default values Clearing the User Data Store page 180 from 4 15 1 Maintaining the User Data Store page 177 To reset system settings to factory defaults
202. click the Call Now button to notify them of a pending update Filter Conditions Scanner Name IP Address Model Settings Group Add in Group Status All gt All All All Refresh List Scanner Name IP Address Model Settings Group Add in Group Status Version p N1800 NotTarget 150001 N1800 NotTarget 150002 N1800 NotTarget 150003 N1800 NotTarget 150004 N1800 NotTarget 150005 N1800 NotTarget 150006 N1800 NotTarget 150007 N1800 NotTarget 150008 N1800 NotTarget 150009 N1800 NotTarget Click the scanner names to view individual scanner details Scanners already targeted to receive an update notification call are marked with an asterisk Back Select the scanner name link to view the scanner details For details refer to 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration page 251 3 To filter scanners shown in the list specify filter conditions and press the Refresh List button 4 To issue a call for unapplied updates select the check box of the scanners to be notified and press the Call Now button All update call targets are Pending for Scanner Side Update Status A call is issued to the specified scanners Ifa target scanner is in error status the error is cleared before notification The scanner side status is changed to Pending and becomes an update target 5 To clear a scanner error press the check box of the relevant scanner and press the Clear Update Failures button The error is cleared
203. cludes conversion to searchable PDF and output of marked character strings as keywords 361 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 1 Carrier Sheet Set whether or not a carrier sheet is used When using a carrier sheet set the size of the scanned document to be output 1 2 On the Scan Settings window select the Basic tab Press the Carrier Sheet button The Carrier Sheet window appears If a carrier sheet is to be used select the output size for the scanned image Carrier Sheet When this option is used the front and back scans are stitched together into a single image Set the paper size to be output ia nA This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected setting is displayed to the right of the Carrier Sheet button 362 6 9 2 Color Mode Set whether the document is scanned in color or black and white 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Basic tab 2 Press the Color Mode button The Color Mode window appears 3 Select the color mode Color Mode Set the color mode Black amp te Cian ie Rashes This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected mode is displayed to the right of the Color Mode button Usually the color mode should be set as Auto A If this setting is specified there is no need to change the color mode each time you scan a document Note that black and white mode may be automatically selecte
204. content of the backup file of Central Admin Server settings If the backup file content is changed and restored processes related to the Central Admin Server may operate improperly All files in the installation folder are deleted when the Central Admin Server software is uninstalled Therefore save all backup files to a location other than in the installation folder Before executing the AmBackup exe command confirm that the storage disk has sufficient free space If there is not enough free disk space an incomplete file may be saved The required free capacity is approximately twice the free capacity under the Data folder in the installation folder 282 5 17 2 Restoring Central Admin Server Settings Central Admin Server settings that have been backed up can be restored to the Central Admin Server To restore Central Admin Server settings execute AmRestore exe in the command prompt on the computer installed with the Central Admin Server software Command storage location Under the AmManager Bin folder in the installation folder of the Central Admin Server software Command executable format AmRestore exe BackupFolderName The italic text represents variable character strings Return value 0 Succeeded Other than 0 Failed Make sure to run the AmRestore exe command after changing the current directory to the Bin folder in the installation folder of the Central Admin Server sof
205. cross the window 1 On the Scan Viewer window use a a gt D to scroll through the pages of scanned data 2 Use to change the views 398 6 11 2 Rotating a Scanned Page The scanned page showed on the Scan Viewer window can be rotated 90 degrees right or left or 180 degrees The rotated scanned page can be in its rotated condition sent as an e mail attachment or faxed printed or saved to a network folder 1 On the Scan Viewer window use a a gt D to display the page you want to rotate 2 Use to rotate the page The actual scanned data is updated to include the rotated page as soon as the M button is pressed 6 11 3 Sorting Pages You can sort the scanned pages displayed in the Scan Viewer window in descending ascending order when two or more pages of the documents are scanned 1 In the Scan Viewer window press to sort the pages in ascending order 2 Pressing while the pages are displayed in ascending order results in the pages to be displayed in previous order descending order 399 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer 6 11 4 Scanning an Additional Page On the Scan Viewer window an additional page can be scanned 1 Load the documents into the ADF paper chute 2 On the Scan Viewer window press the Scan More button The scanning starts The scanning status and scan settings are shown during the scan The page numbers of additional pages will fol
206. cssacsicarcennnaccannannaeaasantenitaectenesennsessadscennana 102 4 7 Configuring the Login Related Settings cccccccssssesseeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 107 4 8 Configuring the Network SettingS c ccccsessseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenenees 113 4 9 Configuring the LDAP Settings w iicssecccsiscsessssccencntssessteatscawesiesesadsacnedncsedenisaens 127 4 10 Configuring the e Mail Related SettingS ccccccccsssssseeeeeneeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeenes 137 4 11 Setting the Fax Server ssccsiecccisenesicadesenecsianvsnsrueaveaccanseacatatsanicccinnatunnusbenoesacsecnens 142 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data ccccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 143 4 13 Setting the Network Printers cccceccesseeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenenees 159 4 14 Viewing the Scanner Details ccccccsssesseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeseseseceeeeeeeeennss 170 4 15 Managing the User Data Store and System SettingS ccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeees 177 4 16 Maintaining the SY Ste Masse siccsiicuksinensssencensnecancatentituvnerseaedidunasuaiianadsnnuesisaanenieant 185 4 17 Setting a Job SOQUCI CC icisesncdciicceswt en iinunrcecancncwecnsiedneranscnensteckanrawaeee en txincineties 197 4 18 IMSS SASS ier caaahirucarecsindcauwastewcdceinedivanshunatuineiy sunnbecwusdr ni eidesuuensibenstusinedielanbedaceucuu 224 4 1 Windows 4 1 1 Administrator Windows via the LCD Touch Panel Selecting a menu displ
207. cters long Passwords may be up to 256 characters long User Name and Password are case sensitive Connecting to the LDAP server Enter a User Name and Password User Name Password Cancel To clear filtered results delete all filter strings and then press the Find button 209 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence 4 17 3 Setting a Job Menu Admintool Assign the job sequence set in 4 17 2 Setting a Job Sequence page 201 to a job button and job buttons on a job menu Up to 100 job menus can be set E Adding a Job Menu This section describes how to add a job menu 1 Press the Job Menus button The Job Menus List window appears Job Sequences Job Menus Job Groups Job Menus List New Job Menu Name Last Modified 210 2 Press the New button The Job Menu Layout area becomes active Job Sequences Job Manus Job Groups Job Menus List Job Menu Name Last Modified Job Menu Layout Job Menu Name r Job Button Settings Delete Job Button Name Job Name Message Screen Decide per Job Scan Viewer Decide per Job 3 Enter the job menu name 4 Select the job button position and press the Edit button The Job Button Settings window appears Job Sequences Job Menus Job Groups Job Button Settings Job Button Name Select Button Pixmap Job Button Pixmap 1 n A
208. ction 7A040014 Backup file already exists A file or folder exists in the backup folder Specify an empty folder If a folder which does not exist is specified it will be created 7A040015 7A040016 Backup folder specification is invalid Server is busy Try again This error message is output in the following cases After checking the error run the command again The backup folder specified in the parameter for the restore command does not have write access The specified backup folder name already exists as a file The backup file full path is longer than 128 bytes This message appears if the backup later restore command is executed during an update call on the Central Admin Server Wait until the update call is finished and try again 291 5 18 Messages Code Message Action 7A040017 Backup failed 292 If this message appears with auxiliary code 7A041012 free disk space may be insufficient Ensure that there is enough free disk space available and try again If this message appears with auxiliary code 7A041015 it is possible that the database file used in the Central Admin Server is being used with software other than the Central Admin Server software Stop using the database file and try again If this message appears without auxiliary code the contents of the problem are shown in the following format Problem details
209. d every time the user prints a document 1 On the Print window press the Positioning button The Positioning window appears 2 Select the print positioning of the data Set the print positioning te Bes Ip tea Wears oe Printing results will vary as shown below depending on the scaling setting For more details on the scaling setting refer to 6 6 1 Scaling page 337 Button Scaling Control Point Center Shrink to Fit Uses the center point of the area available for printing as a control point Center 1 1 Control Point i Available Area Paf forPrinting 5mm 341 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data Button Scaling Control Point Center 100 Uses the center point of the sheet as a control point Center f Control Point Available Area forPrinting ot Sse nesereees Top Left Shrink to Fit Uses the top left corner of the area available for printing as a control point Top Left Control Point Available Area p forPnnting i lt 2S sSerea sess 100 Uses the top left corner of the print sheet as a control point Top Left i 1 Control Point I 1 I Available Area Ao for Printing This returns you to the Print window The selected positioning setting is displayed to the right of the Positioning button 342 6 6 3 Print Side Set whether to print on one side simplex mode or both sides dup
210. d for the following kinds of documents Off white papers Documents with only a minor amount of color Documents printed in gray or other close to black colors Sections of 16 mm from top bottom left and right edges of a document are out of the range for automatic mode selection for the smaller sizes of business card postcard A6 and B6 4 mm from the edges so that the shades of document edges or punched holes can be avoided To ensure such documents are scanned in color mode press the RGB Color button on the Color Mode window A black amp white document containing a shaded table can be recognized as gray 363 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 3 Paper Size Set a paper size for the document to be scanned 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Basic tab 2 Press the Paper Size button The Paper Size window appears 3 Select a paper size tL Paper Size Set the paper size Business a This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected size is displayed to the right of the Paper Size button When the Auto setting is used the paper size is set to the same size Maximum 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in as the actual document being scanned However if using any of the following types of documents the automatic paper size detection may not function correctly Paper of weight less than 52 g m 14 Ib Documents that are not rectangular Documents of a l
211. d or torn documents Documents with appended photographs notes etc Tracing paper Coated paper Carbon paper Carbonless paper Photosensitive paper Perforated or punched documents Documents that are not square or rectangular Exceptionally thin documents less than 52 g m Do not attempt to scan the following types of documents Paper clipped or stapled documents Documents on which the ink is still wet Documents smaller than A8 Portrait Documents wider than 216 mm 8 5 in Non paper documents such as fabric foil transparent paper and plastic card Valuable documents that must not be damaged or dirty such as certificate and cash voucher 474 Carbonless paper contains chemical substances that may damage the pad assy or the pick and other rollers when documents are fed Pay attention to the following cleaning If pick errors occur frequently clean the pad assy and pick roller For details about cleaning the pad assy and pick roller refer to Chapter 7 Scanner Care page 416 Replacing parts The service life of the pad assy and pick roller may be shortened when compared to scanning only wood containing paper documents When wood containing paper manuscripts are scanned the life of the pad assy and pick roller may be shortened compared with the case where woodfree paper manuscripts are scanned When scanning photographs the face of the photograph may become damaged When scanning semi transparent documents set the scan Bright
212. dd in None Filter Conditions Job Name Comment Find 711712010 3 16 58 PM Job2 711712010 3 17 05 PM Job3 714712010 3 17 10 PM Job4 714712010 3 17 15 PM Job5 7 17 2010 3 17 22 PM Job6 714712010 3 17 27 PM OK Cancel 5 Enter the job button name 6 For Select Button Pixmap select a job button pixmap The selected job button pixmap is shown as a mockup image on the right 211 10 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence To start the Add in module when the job button is pressed select the Add in module to be started from Add in a If an Add in module is not installed in a scanner you cannot select it Select a job sequence from the list to set as the job button A To filter jobs enter part of a Job Name and Comment or select all and press the Find button Press the OK button A job button is set on the Job Menu Layout area Repeat Step 4 through Step 9 as required for the number of job buttons Up to six job buttons can be set M To delete a job button select the job button that you want to delete and press the Delete button 212 11 Change the position of the job buttons as necessary Select the job button to move and then select either the A button or the V button to move it The relationship between the order of job buttons on the Job Menu Layout area and the arrangement of buttons on the Job Menu is shown below Job Sequences
213. ddress searches or lookup No other settings can be entered Press the OK button to confirm the setting 3 Perform Step 5 to Step 10 excluding Step 8 of 4 9 1 Setting the Login LDAP Server page 127 4 For Maximum Results select the maximum number of results for e mail LDAP list searches The selected Maximum Results value is displayed 133 4 9 Configuring the LDAP Settings 5 If Other LDAP Server is selected for Server Type press the Schema button The window for adjusting the search item schema for LDAP search appears a Network Settings gt Authentication Server E E EA ANSA Adjust the search item schema Login LDAP Server Use Defaults First Name Comment Last Name Workplace Customize LDAP Search physicalDeliveryOfficeName Common Name Phone Number itelephoneNumber O Display Name E mail Address displayName Initials Homepage wWWHomePage Cancel 6 When schema names are assigned to search items press the OK button The e Mail LDAP Server window appears again 7 Press the OK button The e mail LDAP server is set To use the e mail LDAP server use a login user account If the login LDAP server and e mail LDAP server are different according to the domain configuration or login name format it may not be possible to use the e mail LDAP server For details refer to LDAP Search Target page 129 134 4 9 3 Setting the LDAP Sea
214. deep including the parent domain 6 Press the OK button gt The selected network folder is added to the network folder list The default network folder alias will be the same as the alias selected from the network tree For details on changing the folder alias refer to Renaming a Network Folder page 147 145 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data E Registering a Network Folder Network Path 1 Select Network Settings gt Network Folder gt Network Folder gt The Network Folder window appears 2 Press the Add button The window for selecting a network folder appears 3 Press the Network Path button The window for adding a network folder appears Network Settings gt Network Folder Network Foldern Add a network folder Folder Alias Network Folder If left blank the shared folder name will be used File Names Save Network Path eg Domain Computer Folder Folder po Cancel Network Tree 4 Enter a network folder alias and network path 5 Press the OK button The network folder is added to the network folder list The default network folder alias will be the same as the alias selected from M the network tree For details on changing the network folder alias refer to Renaming a Network Folder page 147 The authentication window may appear 146 E Renaming a Network Folder 1 Select Network Settings gt Network
215. diately For the Admin Tool an adjustment that advances the system time by 20 minutes or more results in a session timeout and causes the scanner to logout 117 4 8 Configuring the Network Settings 4 8 5 Setting the Proxy Server HA Admin Tool Set whether a proxy server is used when connecting to the FTP server or SharePoint server When a proxy server is used for update check an HTTP proxy server should be set 1 Select Network Settings gt Basic gt Proxy Server The Proxy Server window appears Network Settings gt Basic Enter the Proxy server settings FTP Proxy Server Off IP Address Used by FTP Path Network Folders Port Number 1 65535 8080 HTTP Proxy Server g o Use for SharePoint folder settings and update check NTP Server Address Proxy Server Port Number 1 65535 Exceptions Do not use a proxy for addresses that start with Use semi colons to separate entries Previous OK 2 Use the FTP Proxy Server option to set whether or not a proxy server is used for FTP server connection To enable the proxy server setting for each FTP server folder the FTP Proxy Server setting must be set to On If the FTP Proxy Server setting is set to Off the proxy server cannot be set for each FTP server folder in the FTP server folder setting window or the FTP server folder cannot be accessed 3 When a proxy server is used set the address and port number
216. e Last Name E mail Address Cancel i 5 Press the OK button The e mail address is added 514 E Editing an e Mail Address 1 Select the Address Book tab 2 Select the e mail address to be edited 3 Open the Edit Address dialog box in either of the following ways Select the Address Book menu and then select Properties Press the Properties button on the toolbar 4 Edit the information 5 Press the OK button The information of the e mail address is changed E Deleting an e Mail Address 1 Select the Address Book tab 2 Select the e mail address to be deleted 3 Perform either of the following Select the Address Book menu and then select Delete Press the Delete button on the toolbar The delete confirmation window appears 4 Press the OK button The e mail target is deleted from the mail address book 515 E 8 Editing Local Accounts This section describes how to edit the local accounts saved in the scanner Up to 100 local accounts can be added E 8 1 Adding a Local Account 1 Select the Local Account tab 2 Open the Add Account dialog box in either of the following ways Select the Local Account menu and then select Add Account Press the Add Account button on the toolbar 3 Enter the information of the local account to be added m Add Account User Name Password Confirm Password E mail Address Comm
217. e OK button The group is deleted 511 E 7 2 Setting a Distribution List Set distribution lists in the e mail address book Multiple e mail addresses can be registered in a distribution list By specifying a distribution list as an e mail destination an e mail can be sent to all the e mail addresses registered in the list at the same time E Adding a Distribution List 1 Select the Address Book tab 2 Select a group to which the new distribution list is to be added 3 Open the Add Distribution List dialog box in either of the following ways Select the Address Book menu and then select Add Distribution List Press the Add Distribution List button on the toolbar 4 Enter the information of the distribution list to be added Enter the Distribution List Name and Mail Addresses to be contained in the distribution list Up to 64 characters can be specified for Distribution List Name The following symbols cannot be used or details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 A distribution list can contain up to 100 e mail addresses Multiple e mail addresses must be separated using semi colons Add Distribution List Insertion Point Distribution List Name Mail Addresses Use to separate Cancel 5 Press the OK button The distribution list is added 512 E Editing a Distribution List 1 Select the Addre
218. e Paper Size button 365 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 4 Resolution Changing the resolution level affects the scanned data in the following ways Item High resolution Low resolution Scan speed Slow Fast Scan quality High Low File size Large Small 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Basic tab 2 Press the Resolution button gt The Resolution window appears 3 Select a resolution level i Resolution Set the resolution Scan Speed Fast gt Slow uali 600dpi resolution is incompatible with Auto paper size Auto 300dpi and 600dpi resolutions are incompatible with the Long Pages custom paper size 600dpi resolution may not be used if Carrier Sheet setting is anything _ other than Off ee This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected level is displayed to the right of the Resolution button 366 6 9 5 Scan Mode Set the scan mode for the documents 1 2 On the Scan Settings window select the Basic tab Press the Scan Mode button The Scan Mode window appears Select Simplex if only the front sides of the documents are to be scanned Select Duplex if both front and reverse sides are to be scanned Set the scan mode This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected mode is displayed to the right of the Scan Mode button 367 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 6
219. e Text Recognition window appears 375 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 3 For Marker Index select an option to specify the range of marked sections for text recognition Text Recognition Searchable PDF Marker Index is incompatible with Grayscale and Black amp White color modes Marker Index Edit Marked String No First marked All marked section only sections Text Recognition Language English es Text Recognition for Pages First Page All Pages ng a Searchable PDF can take a long time s and Pages may not be used with 600dpi Cancel The range of marked sections for text recognition can be selected when the color mode is Auto or RGB Color Even if the color mode is Auto depending on the way sections are marked the document may be detected as black and white and character strings in the marked sections may not be recognized For details of automatic color mode selection refer to 6 9 2 Color Mode page 363 Use First marked section only as shown below Use this option to for example set the title of a document as a keyword for the PDF to be created Example When only the title of the document is highlighted it will be set as a keyword for the PDF allowing the title to be used to search for the PDF file 3 How to Use ScanSnap Thus chapter describes bask operation of ScamSeup When multiple marked sections are located side by side the one at the top will be set
220. e times 2 Rotate the documents 90 degrees and fan again 444 3 Align the edges of the document sheets to be loaded and slightly skew the leading edge of the document Feed direction Scanning the document sheets whose edges are not aligned might o cause paper jams or damage to the document 3 Load the documents into the ADF paper chute as shown in the following diagram Cross section Documents 445 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 Network Connection Troubleshooting Network Connection Troubleshooting If a network connection is not possible first check the scanner status and system settings The following section provides information about general troubles that may occur when connecting to a network If the cause of the problem is unknown or the problem persists check the items in 8 4 Points to Check before Contacting Your FUJITSU Scanner Dealer page 467 and contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider Basic Network Operation Tests The following network operation tests are available on the administrator window and should be performed after the network has been setup Checking basic network operation with a Ping test Checking the network operating status Checking the NTP server settings by synchronizing the system time if using an NTP server Checking the mail server by sending a test mail if scanned data is to be sent as an e mail by fax or when requesting
221. e 362 6 9 2 Color MOSS scccdir cal oaaticrehardansetncey nuecsadeaicanaisas dear bee tges secs peas 363 0 9 3 PAPer SIZ neren ne e a e n a a 364 E Long Page Mode s ccceeesseceecececeecececeeeeeeeeeneedente 365 6 9 4 FRESOMIMOMs seeea cleo vers cetehee sk cette ears died seat ee ees Aes 366 0 9 5 Scam Mode ict ek e amare E ubuntu 367 6 9 6 Document Feed Direction cccetecceeesedeeceeeceecteeencenenees 368 6 9 7 File FORMAL a ett s ee eh e e cca 369 6 9 8 Searchable PDF oz 2ccieesl chateedenetudesvckeavendesiatveeeaiatectdeenses 371 6 9 9 Setting a Keyword for the PDF eeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeees 373 BO 10 P DF Password acces cassette tron cansehte e E Eaa ek Coreen 378 6 9 11 Compression aici eatweaee eecaresecdcsee Saag EN annen n n aaa eeteens tae a 380 6 9712 BiQWiNe SS ici roteieidig neater hate wider eae 383 0 919 Contrast saoer ton ta re ara ed read a ht daar ea eh Leet 384 6 914 SAND OSS e eased kone causes 385 6 9 15 Dropout Colors iesnas ootines nasacomtaaratdcaek nas ue tear RESES 386 6 9 16 Background REMOVAl ccccceeeeeeeeeee tere eeeeeeeeeeenteaaaaeeeeees 387 6 9 17 Blank Page SKID ves cased e arip eenen pest EIEEE e ESER EEEn 388 6 9 18 Page Orientation cccccccccccceeeeteeeeeeescceeeeeesesenseneeeeeeenes 389 6 9 19 Multifeed Detection Layer and Length seeee 392 6 9 20 Edge Cropping sind perio iad es et bh aaee arent 393 Enabling Disabling
222. e local accounts and save them in the scanner by using User Editor Local accounts can be used for authenticating to the scanner For the system requirements for User Editor refer to E 2 1 Requirements for User Editor page 498 497 E 2 System Requirements E 2 1 Requirements for User Editor For use of the User Editor the following requirements apply Software English Versions Operating system Windows XP SP3 or later Windows Vista SP1 or later Windows 7 Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later Windows Server 2008 NET Framework 2 0 SP2 or later NET Framework 3 0 SP2 or later or NET Framework 3 5 SP1 or later Internet Explorer 6 SP2 or later If INET Framework is not installed it will be notified Download NET Framework from the Microsoft website and install it into the computer When installing NET Framework check that there is enough free disk space For NET Framework 2 0 at least 280 MB of additional free disk space is required Hardware Any computer which runs the supported software 32 MB or more of free memory space 64 MB or more of free disk space XGA monitor or better LAN cable Pointing device e g mouse E 2 2 Port Number List 3 Protocol Function From To Port Number Number User Editor User Editor gt Scanner 80 HTTP 6 TCP 443 HTTPS 6 TCP Changing the Port Number is possible 498 E 3 Pre settings E 3 1 Installing User
223. e the window and try connecting again Select the Yes button on the Security Warning dialog box when connecting E Operation Does Not Work Input field entry entered via the on screen keyboard does not appear on the window E Check item Has the input field been selected E Action Select the input field and try again Press the Cancel button and try again To use the LCD touch panel touch the input field directly and try again Saving is not possible after pressing Save on the File Download dialog box E Check item Does the length of the Save As folder path folder path plus file name exceed 259 characters E Action Select a Save As folder that respects the limit Status window stops at Printing scan data on E Check item Is there enough free space in the drive on which the spool folder for the print server exists E Action Make sure that there is enough space in the drive 465 8 3 Other Troubleshooting An error occurs when installing an Admin Tool E Check item Is the language of the Admin Tool already installed different from that of the operating system E Action Uninstall the existing Admin Tool Then install the Admin Tool of the same language as that of the operating system 466 8 4 Points to Check before Contacting Your FUJITSU Scanner Dealer Before contacting your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider check the following points 8
224. earch Target eeceeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 129 4 9 2 Setting the e Mail LDAP Servet eceeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 133 4 9 3 Setting the LDAP Search Parameters eeeeeees 135 Configuring the e Mail Related Settings 137 4 10 1 Setting the e Mail S rver ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 137 4 10 2 Configuring Settings for Sending e Mail eee 139 4 10 3 Setting a File Name Format for When Attaching Scanned DataitO 6 Mail er ives cehce ees adore sei e aaaea eera TE 140 Setting the Fax Server ssssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseees 142 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data 143 4 12 1 Setting the Network Folders ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetttteeeeees 143 E Registering a Network Folder Network Tree 144 E Registering a Network Folder Network Path 146 E Renaming a Network Folder ccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 E Removing a Network Folder ccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 E Viewing the Network Folder Details eee 148 4 12 2 Setting the FTP Server Folders cceeceeeseeeeeeees 149 E Registering an FTP Server Folder aaneen 149 E Changing the FTP Server Folder Settings 151 E Removing an FTP Server Folder 0 0 0 0 cceecececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 151 E Viewing the FTP Server Folder Details eeee
225. eck the specified NTP server IP address host name or FQDN for mistakes and correct them Check the network path between to the NTP server for problems The NTP server may be busy Wait a short time before trying again to synchronize the system time If that does not work the specified server may not be an NTP server so try a different NTP server The specified NTP server cannot provide a trusted date and time t attempted to acquire the date and time from a higher level NTP server but failed Try a different NTP server or have the network administrator investigate Check that the time is correct If the time is incorrect adjust the date time and try again Refer to 4 5 4 Setting the Date Time page 98 adjust the date time and try again 449 8 2 Network Connection Troubleshooting mM Checking the Mail Server by Sending a Test Mail On the Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window or Alert Notification window press the Test button to check if an e mail can be sent to the specified destination After pressing the Test button follow each action described below according to the message that is shown The messages and their corresponding actions are as follows Sending E Action If no error message appears and the Sending indicator disappears the test mail was sent successfully to the mail server Check that the alert notification e mail has arrived at the specified destination If the alert notificat
226. ecking the Consumable Alert Status 1 On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Consumable Alert button The Consumable Alert window appears 2 Check which part needs to be replaced and press the OK button Parts whose Usage Counter value is bigger than the Replace at value should be replaced The value of the Usage Counter is in units of 500 sheets scanned For details on how to check the status of consumable parts on the administrator window refer to 4 14 2 Viewing the Usage Status page 171 a Consumable Alert Usage Counter Replace At Current Status PAD ASSY 6 PICK ROLLER o 100 000 3 Replace the part Refer to the following Replacing the pad assy 7 5 3 Replacing the Pad Assy page 428 Replacing the pick roller 7 5 4 Replacing the Pick Roller page 430 427 7 5 Replacing Parts 7 5 3 Replacing the Pad Assy 1 Remove any documents from the ADF paper chute 2 Pull the top cover release catch toward you place your hands at both sides of the top cover and open the top cover Be careful that the top cover does not shut on your fingers 3 Remove the pad assy Squeeze the edges of the pad assy and remove it in the direction indicated by the arrow Pad assy
227. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaes 304 6 2 3 Regular User Settings Overview eeeeeeeeeeeeeettteeeeees 305 6 3 Logging in Regular User Mode cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 306 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail 0 309 6 4 1 Selecting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book 313 6 4 2 Adding an e Mail Target to the e Mail Address Book 317 6 4 3 Editing an e Mail Target in the e Mail Address Book 321 6 4 4 Deleting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book 323 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax cccscceeeeeeeeeees 324 6 5 1 Selecting a Fax Number from the Fax Number List 327 6 5 2 Adding a Contact to the Fax Number List 0006 329 6 5 3 Editing a Contact in the Fax Number List 00 331 6 5 4 Deleting a Contact from the Fax Number List 332 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 333 6 021 Scalig ucncewe nee eee eee tein 337 6 6 2 POSINOMING x0enc ta eA el St ot SS te 341 6 6 3 PINE SIG Gee cnerescece ences cosysasec ames eater socenmes nat CESE aE EREEREER 343 6 7 Saving the Scanned Data to a Network Folder 344 6 8 Saving the Scanned Data to a SharePoint Folder 348 10 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 Setting the Scan Options cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 356 6 9 1 Gamer Sheet oreo it cies Aad ee
228. eeees 37 226 296 Original document eee 297 P pad ASSY asssssesseessseeeeeereeesrenee 36 421 426 page orientation eeens 389 paper SIZE oo eee cece seeesseseeeeees 364 365 473 paper Size Setting oo ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 364 Paper ype aitanta aai 474 paper weight cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 474 539 part name oo eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 34 Part to clean ooo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeteeees 418 PDF password _ ccccccccccceseeseeseeees 369 378 PDF password lock setting ee 378 pick roller rn 36 422 426 PING arona iann e a aaRS 119 port number list cc eeeeeeeeeeees 53 498 positioning si cen Aien eco Naess 341 power button eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 34 59 307 power Connector uo eee cece cece eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 35 pre settings Central Admin Console ee 233 User Editor dieien tone des eetenter 499 PINI eree e ea aan E E EEEE AAEE EERE 333 print mode setting 343 Print SErVEr as irre a a a 51 printer details nsnnnnnenenenn rennt rnr ren reene 169 printer list eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 333 processing a JOO scrneninctinaniesetientieateins 405 purchasing a carrier sheet ee 435 R registering a network folder network path ccceeteeeeeeees 146 network tree corsiheastemsios Miniter ounce 144 registering a network printer network path eecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 167
229. elected by default When the font size is large part of the dialog box may not be shown correctly In this case use a smaller font size For details about the operating environment required for installing the Central Admin Server software refer to 1 4 2 Requirements for Central Admin Console page 47 When installing the Central Admin Console the same necessary pre settings before logging in with the Admin Tool are required For details refer to 4 2 2 Setting up for Administrator Access via the Admin Tool page 80 239 5 4 Pre settings for Using Central Admin Console 5 4 3 Setting up a Firewall for the Central Admin Server 5 4 4 This section describes the firewall settings for the Central Admin Server Set the following port number for communication in the Central Admin Server to enable management by the Central Admin Console From To Protocol Port Number Scanners Central Admin Server HTTP Port number set for scanner HTTPS communication TCP Central Admin Console gt Central HTTP Port number set for Central Admin Server HTTPS Admin communication TCP For details about setting a firewall refer to the manual for the relevant firewall Configuring the Scanner Settings for Central Admin Management This section describes the scanner settings The following settings for connecting a scanner to the Central Admin Server are required to enable management by the Central Admin Console Adm
230. enance Edit e Mail Addresses Edit e mail targets in the e mail address page 321 book Edit Fax Numbers Edit contacts in the fax number list page 331 Roller Cleaning Clean the inside of scanner page 420 Scan Test Perform a scan test page 436 Administrator Login Show the window for administrator login page 79 Change Password Change a user password page 414 Consumable Alert Indicate when parts need replacing page 426 User Log Check user operations page 402 Job Menu Process a job page 405 45 1 4 System Requirements 1 4 System Requirements 1 4 1 Requirements for Admin Tool For use of the Admin Tool the following requirements apply Software English Versions Operating System Windows XP SP3 or later Windows Vista SP1 or later Windows 7 Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later Windows Server 2008 NET Framework 2 0 SP2 or later NET Framework 3 0 SP2 or later or NET Framework 3 5 SP1 or later 1 Internet Explorer 6 SP2 or later 2 1 If NET Framework is not installed the administrator will be notified Download NET Framework from the Microsoft Web site and install it into the computer When installing NET Framework check that there is enough free disk space For NET Framework 2 0 at least 280 MB of additional free disk space is required 2 Confirm that the latest security patch has been applied If the latest patch has not been applied download operations Such as manual download may not be possib
231. ent Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Account Type Regular User Administrator Gace User Name Password and Confirm Password may be up to 64 characters long Passwords are case sensitive For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 For Comment enter a comment on the account Up to 256 characters long may be entered Comment is case sensitive For Enabled Disabled select whether or not to enable the account When Disabled is selected the user cannot login For Account Type select Regular User for a regular user or select Administrator for the administrator guest admin and fi maintenance cannot be specified as a user name Spaces at the start and end of a user name are omitted if specified White space characters can be used in a password and comment 4 Press the OK button The local account is added 516 E 8 2 Editing a Local Account E 8 3 1 Select the Local Account tab 2 Select a local account to be edited 3 Open the Edit Account dialog box in either of the following ways Select the Local Account menu and then select Properties Press the Properties button on the toolbar 4 Edit the information 5 Press the OK button The information of the local account is changed Deleting a Local Account _ Select the Local Account tab 2 Select a loc
232. enu select Internet Options and note the following points about the settings shown on the Internet Options dialog box In the Accessibility dialog box shown when pressing the Accessibility button on the General tab do not change the formatting and user style sheet settings If these settings are changed the displayed style of the Admin Tool may be corrupted In the Language Preference dialog box shown when pressing the Languages button on the General tab move the same language as for the Central Admin Server operation system to the top If a different language is specified a problem may occur with the input or displays for the Admin Tool On the Security tab if Security level for this zone is set to High part of the Admin Tool window may not be correctly displayed In this case on the Security tab add the scanner or Central Admin Server to the trusted site zone and press the Default Level button Or press the Custom Level button and set Binary and script behaviors to Enable When the font size is large part of the dialog box may not be shown correctly In this case use a smaller font size E Uninstalling the Admin Tool This section uses Windows Vista as an example Uninstall the Admin Tool from Control Panel Programs Programs and Features in the computer in which it is installed Close the Admin Tool before uninstalling a If the Admin Tool is uninstalled while still open normal oper
233. er 1 On the Main Menu window press the Scan to SharePoint button The Scan to SharePoint window appears MM The scan information can be changed by pressing of Scan Settings For details refer to 6 9 Setting the Scan Options page 356 2 Press i for the Save in field Scan to SharePoint E Save in Save as Content Type Overwrite old files Required item Sai on Stele a Default Settings Viewer x gt The Folder List window appears 348 3 Select a SharePoint folder and press the OK button Only SharePoint folders which are in the list may be selected Only the administrator may add folders to the list or edit the details of folders already on the list To change the folders in the list contact the administrator For more details about adding SharePoint folders refer to 4 12 3 Setting the SharePoint Folders page 153 Folder List H http amp Document01 fa Document02 fa Image01 fa Image02 Cancel If the Sign In window appears enter authentication information needed to access the SharePoint server and press the OK button Sign In A a User Name Password Domain Cancel The Scan to SharePoint window is shown again 349 6 8 Saving the Scanned Data to a SharePoint Folder 4 Inthe Save as field enter a file name for the scanned data to be saved CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO to COM9
234. er configuration file to be imported Press the Browse button to select a file 2 Press the Import button The current configuration of the scanners is sent to the Central Admin Server The imported scanner settings are applied to the scanner according to the Scanner Notification Schedule Network Settings button The setting items are the same as those set in the network settings menu in the window for administrator operations For details refer to 4 8 Configuring the Network Settings page 113 Monitoring amp Management button The setting items are the same as those set in the maintenance menu in the window for administrator operations For details refer to 4 16 Maintaining the System page 185 Close button Registers the entered scanner settings and returns to the Scanner Settings window 7 Select the Issue an Update Call check box to issue an update call When the check box is selected even if a scanner is not started or logged in to the update module is sent and applied to the scanner according to the Scanner Notification Schedule However if the update is released while logged in to a scanner the update will be applied after logged out If any other available updates are pending those are also applied at the same time 8 In Scanner Notification Schedule set the schedule to notify scanner settings 9 Press the Register button The entered scanner settings are registered to the selected se
235. er strings in marked sections refer to 6 9 8 Searchable PDF page 371 1 On the Scan Viewer window press the button appropriate for your desired operation such as the Send and Save buttons The window where you can edit character strings in marked sections appears 2 Edit the characters shown on the window 3 Press the OK button The edited characters are set as a keyword for the PDF file 401 6 12 Checking the User Log 6 12 Checking the User Log The latest 100 user operation logs are shown for the current user The user log summary is shown in date time order Even if the Region Timezone or Date Time settings are changed the order of the log entries will not be changed 1 On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the User Log button The User Log window appears User Log Result Code Time Operation Pages OK 00000000 07 16 17 16 24 Save 2 OK 00000000 07 16 17 14 51 Save 2 OK 00000000 07 16 1713 56 Print 2 Error 12010100 07 16 16 59 23 e Mail 2 Error 12030100 07 16 16 55 28 Print 2 Error 12020100 07 16 16 49 11 Fax 2 2 Select the log you wish to view The details of the selected log are displayed Pressing the OK button returns to the User Log window 402 6 13 Maintenance The following maintenance operations are possible Editing the e Mail Address Book Editing the fax number list Roller cleaning Scan test
236. ers via a Central Admin Server 67 3 1 Operating and Managing Scanners Computer Central Admin Console i Admin Tool Set multiple scanners at a time via the network interface Set one scanner at a time via the network interface Directly set one scanner at a time Amunnnunnnunnnnt ALLLLLLLELLELLET Scanner Scanner Scanner OANNENENENUNUNNNENEEEEUNNNNEAEENENNNUNUNEEEEUUUEN 68 3 2 Required Scanner Function Settings Which scanner settings are required differs according to scanner functions to be used by the user The function buttons are displayed on the Main Menu window in accordance with the settings specified by the administrator Buttons are displayed in accordance with the settings specified by the administrator A Logout The following shows the necessary settings for each function to be used 69 3 2 Required Scanner Function Settings System Settings Menu e Mail Fax Print Save Scan o See SharePoint Local Settings Import Scanner E _ _ page 266 Settings Scanner Name N N N N N page 94 Language page 96 Selection Region A A A A A page 97 Timezone Date Time A A A A A page 98 Keyboard N N N N N page 99 Settings Certificate page 100 Management Scanner Settings Multifeed Settings page 102 Scanner page 105 Adjustment Genera
237. erver folder Up to the total of 100 FTP server folders and network folders can be added For details about setting network folders refer to 4 12 1 Setting the Network Folders page 143 For details about setting a file name for scanned data to be saved in an FTP server folder refer to 4 12 4 Setting a File Name Format for When Saving Scanned Data page 156 Note the following when registering an FTP server folder The FTP server folder is registered as a network path If the FTP server folder is on a Windows file server and the length of the full Windows path including the file name exceeds 259 characters the scan data will not be saved Before registering a FTP server folder check that the length of the full file path name is not likely to exceed 259 characters If the selected folder was created using a language foreign to that of the browsing operating system the FTP server folder may not register correctly If the name of the FTP server folder contains unrecognizable characters check the codeset used For FTP path user name and password alphanumeric characters and symbols with the exception of lt gt amp can be used E Registering an FTP Server Folder 1 Select Network Settings gt FTP Server Folder gt FTP Server Folder gt The FTP Server Folder window appears Network Settings gt FTP Server Folder FUP Server Folder Enter the FTP server folder settings Registered FTP Serve
238. etails about adding FTP server folders refer to 4 12 2 Setting the FTP Server Folders page 149 Folder List i Folder Folder01 Folder02 Folder03 Folder04 FTP Folder Cancel 4 Press the OK button This returns you to the Save window If the File Server Authentication window appears enter authentication A information needed to access the file server and press the OK button File Server Authentication EA User Name Password Cancel 345 6 7 Saving the Scanned Data to a Network Folder 5 In the Save as field enter a file name for the scanned data to be saved The following file names cannot be used O sco PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO to COM9 LPTO to LPT9 and are used as delimiters in a folder path The following symbols cannot be used 2 lt gt When the file format is changed in Scan Settings the file name set on the File Names Save window is reset in the Save As field 6 Press Ll to select whether or not to overwrite an existing file with the same name Whether or not the file was successfully saved can be checked in the user log For more details about accessing the user log refer to 6 12 Checking the User Log page 402 7 Press the Scan button When Scan Viewer is Off this will be a Scan amp Save button The scanning starts The scanning status and scan settings are shown during the scan The maximum
239. etecceeeeedeseeceeeeeetees 356 scan to SharePoint aeee 348 SCAN VIGWE derectstecttgretametacalslaned i Mcssleads 398 scanner configuration file format file format for exporting ee 485 file format for importing 484 scanner requirements for central admin 52 scanner settings 74 226 240 266 Screen Calibration n e 439 searchable PDF ruciaacccn tients 371 security cable Slot eeen 35 selecting e mail address 313 fax NnUMber ssices cidesecvicntiacaesteeedeewtncecexe 327 semi transparent documents _ 475 sending e mail aeria aeiae se 309 TA EO AAT fadseosvanta tent eiead 324 setting Central Admin Server 125 245 date time xii Seo ees 98 distribution list sects die Aatentaerines 512 DNS server 22 8 nec teio tenia 115 e mail address 514 e mail LDAP server scce 133 e mail server sssssriressiirriiresssessess 137 fax SEIVER nieisisrrriurrriirindinriddeeteiseress 142 file name format for when attaching scanned data to e mail 140 file name format for when saving scanned data 156 GOUD rieira ea E a N 510 JODQIOUD lt sysiseetiveivelegesdedatieg teense 216 JOOME 0 ea Ae eae aes 210 job SEQUENCE _ cceeeeeeeeeeeees 197 201 LDAP search parameters 135 link speed duplex mode 000 122 login LDAP server ow ceeeeceeeee 127 NTP server cciidecsaneetiiniekeadiadedieiience 117 on screen keyboard asssssesseerrrenree
240. evice Test gt Screen Calibration The Screen Calibration window appears with a red adjustment mark shown on it 2 Touch the with your fingertip After being touched the will move to the next calibration position Each time it stops touch it again Please touch the point in the screen Repeat until the test window appears with the following Calibration dialog box Calibration Calib screen Cursor on off CLR screen Update 3 Trace a line on the screen with your fingertip A line corresponding to how you move your fingertip appears on screen If the screen becomes cluttered press the Calib screen button to remove all the lines and repeat the process from Step 2 439 7 7 Calibrating the LCD Touch Panel 4 When you are satisfied with the LCD touch panel response press the Update button This saves the current calibration data completing the calibration process and returns you to the Screen Calibration window If the red adjustment mark is not touched accurately a Parameter Error Please input again message may appear In this case perform the calibration from Step 2 again being careful to touch each calibration point accurately 440 441 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting This chapter provides information on dealing with scanner operation problems such as paper jams points to check before contacting your FUJITSU scanner dealer and help on how to
241. ewer K The Printer List window appears 333 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data 3 Select a target printer and press the OK button Only printers which were added in the list by the administrator can be selected To change the printers in the list contact the administrator For more details about adding printers refer to 4 13 Setting the Network Printers page 159 Printer List _ FUJITSUX2 1S FUJITSUX2 color FUJITSUX2 mono PrinterO1 JL TET ye ie PrinterO02 Cancel This returns you to the Print window Ifthe Print Server Authentication window appears enter authentication M information needed to access the network printer and press the OK button Print Server Authentication EA User Name Password Cancel Current user printing privileges for the specified printer are checked before printing When printing privileges are being checked data may be spooled temporarily 334 4 Enter a number in No of Copies field According to the printer being used settings from the printers properties window may be used instead 5 Make any required print setting changes The scaling positioning and print mode settings can be changed For details refer to the following 6 6 1 Scaling page 337 6 6 2 Positioning page 341 6 6 3 Print Side page 343 To return the print settings to the factory settings press the Defau
242. f the image of the screenshot to be saved 5 When you refer to a date time the scanner as the connection destination or a comment to define a file name for the file to be saved enter a proper string for the file name in the relevant input field Alphanumeric characters and symbols with the exception of 5 2 lt gt 8 amp can be used To use characters of a different language for a file name enter them into the Save As dialog box If you enter Date Time Connect to and Comment file names are created M in the following order Comment Connect to Date Time 6 Press the Save button The File Download dialog box appears 7 Press the Save button The Save As dialog box appears 8 Enter a file name and specify a folder for saving the file 9 Press the Save button The screenshot is saved in a specified file format Press the Power Off button to turn the scanner off Press the Restart button to restart the scanner The scanner cannot be turned off or restarted when a regular user or administrator is logged into the connected scanner 196 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence After the job sequence job menu and job group settings are performed on the Job Menu a regular user can use each assigned job menu at login and process a job 1 setting a job sequence A job sequence is a single operation that pulls together several user operations e Mail Fax Print Save
243. fer to how to set printer settings how to add a network printer and the printer manual beforehand The Windows XP printer driver has not been installed on the print server E Action Install the Windows XP printer driver on the print server Check that the Windows XP printer driver has been correctly installed on the print server For more details refer to 4 13 Setting the Network Printers page 159 Network printer shared name has been changed E Action Check the shared name on the print server The specified network printer path is invalid E Action Check that the specified network printer path is correct 454 E Failure to Print on a Network Printer If printing on a network printer which has been set in the scanner is not possible try the following steps Also refer to how to set printer settings how to add a network printer and the printer manual beforehand E Action Check if a network connection is possible by trying the same solution for Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address page 451 E Action Check whether or not the printer is ready for printing deal with the cause of the error and try again E Action Contact the administrator to check if printing is allowed on the network printer E Action Try the following Check that printing is possible from the print server application Check that the print server spooling is operating normally 455 8 2 Network Connection Troublesho
244. field The characters input here are displayed on the button name on the LDAP List tab in the e Mail Address Book window When you change the button names check the actual button image shown on the LDAP List in the e Mail Address Book window The button image may not show all characters entered 5 Press the OK button gt The LDAP search parameters are set 136 4 10 Configuring the e Mail Related Settings 4 10 1 Setting the e Mail Server _ Egh Admintoo e Mail cannot be sent if authentication is required by the e mail server before sending 1 Select Network Settings gt e Mail gt SMTP Server gt The SMTP Server window appears Network Settings gt e Mail Enter the SMTP Server settings gt Q S M N o SMTP Server Send e Mail File Names e Mail WW SL E Port Number 2 1 65535 Monitor Connection Timeout mp Ti sec Connection Timeout 3 1 300 Split Mails Segment Size 256 KB 64 10240 Maximum Attachment Size 10 MB 1 20 all Address Warning Limit 100 e1000 Previous Cancel Advanced OK 2 Enter the SMTP server IP address host name or FQDN in the Address input field 3 For SSL select whether or not to use SSL for the communication with the SMTP server and select the SSL method 4 In the Port Number input field enter a port number to be used by the scanner to communicate with the SMTP server 5
245. figuration 2 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 255 E Adding Scanner Configuration 2 0 0 0 eeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 256 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 E Cloning a Scanners Configuration cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 257 E Editing Scanner Configuration ccs eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 257 E Deleting Scanner Configuration 2 0 00 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 258 E Viewing the Scanner List 2 00 ceeeeeeeeeetee eee eeeeeees 259 Monitoring and Maintaining the Scanner Network 260 Updating the System c ccsseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 261 Installing an Add in cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 263 Updating the Scanner Settings ssceeeseseeeeeeeees 266 Setting the Job Mode cccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 269 Viewing the Update Status Lists cceeeeeeeeeee es 272 Viewing the Scanners Operating Status 00 274 Viewing Event Log isis ciccessississcicessscsenstibesvessesusesexiveses 275 E Viewing Event Log ccccceeeceeccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeteneetes 275 E Downloading Event Log ceceeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 276 E Clearing All Events h 5 4ccesteveyveseedensd eedehesi eae kreteni nte 276 Collecting and Exporting Audit Logs cceeeeee 277 5 16 1 Collecting Audit Logs 20 2202003 ceri pied heels 277 5 16 2 Exporting
246. figuring the Network Settings 4 8 3 Setting the WINS Server Buch aminTooi Ceglar A primary WINS and secondary WINS can be set 1 Select Network Settings gt Basic gt WINS Server gt The WINS Server window appears Basic IP Address WINS Server NTP Server Network Status Previous 2 Enter the following numerical addresses Primary WINS Secondary WINS 3 Press the OK button gt The information entered is set 116 4 8 4 Setting the NTP Server ET mno CEEA Set the NTP server 1 Select Network Settings gt Basic gt NTP Server The NTP Server window appears fi Network Settings gt Basic Enter the NTP server settings NTP Server Basic IP Address NTP Server Network Status Previous For Central Admin Console the time synchronization is not possible 2 Enter the NTP server IP address host name or FQDN If an NTP server is not required leave this field blank 3 Press the Sync Time button The result of the time synchronization for the specified NTP server is shown If no error message appears the NTP server setting is valid 4 Press the OK button on the confirmation window 5 Press the OK button gt The NTP server is set The system time is automatically synchronized every 6 hours to the specified NTP server After the setting is changed the time synchronization is performed imme
247. files cannot be overwritten The following properties can be set Single line of text Multiple lines of text Choice Number Currency Date and Time Yes No Person or Group Hyperlink or Picture 353 6 8 Saving the Scanned Data to a SharePoint Folder 11 Press the Scan button When Scan Viewer is Off this will be a Scan amp Save button The scanning starts The scanning status and scan settings are shown during the scan The maximum number of pages that can be scanned is 999 When Blank Page Skip is enabled the number of scanned pages excluding skipped blank pages is shown Additional pages can be scanned in place of skipped blank pages until the maximum number of scanned pages is reached When the scanning has completed the Scan Viewer window appears For details about editing on the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 If the Scan amp Save button is selected when Scan Viewer is Off the scanned data is saved immediately after the scanning is completed and the LCD touch panel screen returns to the Main Menu window For details refer to 6 10 Enabling Disabling the Scan Viewer page 395 12 Check the scanned data For more details about the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 13 On the Scan Viewer window press the Save button When a file is overwritten the
248. fresh List New SelectAll Deselect All Scanner Settings a f Nana IP Address Model ro Add in Group Comment Status ee ey 150000 N1800 Offline 150001 N1800 Free 1850002 N1800 Offline o 150003 N1800 Free 150004 N1800 In use o 150005 N1800 Free 150006 N1800 Offline 150007 N1800 Free F 150008 N1800 Offline o 150009 N1800 Free Click the scanner names to view individual scanner details 2 Press the Import Config button The Import Scanner Config window appears Import Scanner Config The current scanners configuration will be replaced by the imported data Scanner Config File Browse Import Caneel 3 Specify the scanner configuration file to be imported Press the Browse button to select a file 254 4 Press the Import button The scanner configuration file is imported and the scanners are registered Importing a scanner configuration file that contains zero scanner entries will cause all of the existing scanner configuration information to be deleted The imported scanner configuration file overwrites the current scanner configuration If the imported scanner configuration information contains the same MAC address or scanner name as in the existing scanner configuration information the MAC address or the scanner name will be recognized as already existing This is determined in the order of MAC address scanner name In this case on the table shown in 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration
249. g system settings via administrator windows on the LCD touch panel For details about setting modes refer to 3 1 Operating and Managing Scanners page 67 For details of the operations available in each setting mode refer to 1 3 1 Operations with Administrator Right page 38 1 On the Admin Menu window press e The Admin Settings window appears Admin Settings Switch to mode selection Select Mode Start the Installation Wizard Installation Wizard Show the Installation Wizard at next start up Yes 92 2 Press the Select Mode button The Select Mode window appears bea Select Mode Select a mode E ese Select a function e Mail Network Folder Print Cancel ac Fax FTP Server Folder 3 Press Le to select a setting mode 4 Select the check boxes of the functions to be enabled for the setting mode 5 Press the OK button The setting mode is set 4 5 Configuring the System 4 5 Configuring the System 4 5 1 Setting the Scanner Name RER faminto Set a scanner name to provide a network alias for the scanner Do not use a name already being used in the network Name duplication will cause a network connection error For details about how to deal with such errors refer to 4 18 1 Administrator Window Messages page 225 1 Select System Settings gt Local Settings gt Scanner Name gt The Sc
250. g the Scan Options When one color page is scanned the file size criteria are shown as follows These numbers are for reference other documents may vary in size Actual paper size A4 size general catalog File format PDF Scanner paper size setting A4 File size KB for color files Compression High Compression for Color PDF Resolution Medium Medium Low Medium Low High 150 dpi 406 232 197 153 158 200 dpi 647 358 302 238 140 300 dpi 1319 693 580 448 115 600 dpi 3827 2034 1736 1377 File size KB for grayscale files Compression High Compression for Color PDF Resolution Medium Medium Low Medium Low High 150 dpi 380 233 186 153 200 dpi 618 373 293 239 300 dpi 1422 825 606 494 600 dpi 3416 2147 1827 1338 File size KB for black amp white files Compression rate cannot be Resolution selected 150 dpi 104 200 dpi 176 300 dpi 382 600 dpi 1430 382 6 9 12 Brightness The brightness setting can be adjusted to improve the visual appearance of the scanned data 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Quality tab 2 Press the Brightness button The Brightness window appears 3 Select a brightness level Set the brightness level Medium Medium Lon rsr ne ES This returns you to the Scan Settings wi
251. ge View the usage A A A A page 171 Status status 1 Installed View the status of NA A A A page 172 Options installed options 1 User Log Manage user logs NA page 173 System Log Manage the NA page 175 system log Data Management User Data Maintain the user NA A A NA page 177 Store data store 2 System Maintain the NA A A NA page 181 Settings File system settings 3 42 LCD touch panel Central Item Function Admin Admin See Basic Advanced Tool Consol Sai mode mode one Maintenance System Update the NA A A NA page 185 Update scanner system 5 4 software check for released updates Add in View the Add in NA A A NA page 190 Software status 1 Install uninstall an NA NA A A page 189 Add in module 4 Set whether or not NA A A NA page 191 the on screen keyboard is displayed when running an Add in Technical Set the NA A A NA page 192 Support information output level Obtain technical NA NA A NA page 193 support Alert Set the NA A A A page 194 Notification destination for alert notifications A available NA not available 1 2 3 4 5 Operations cannot be performed from the scanner settings edit window but can be viewed on the Central Admin Console Scanner Details window When using the LCD touch panel only the user data delete operation can be performed When using the LCD touch pane
252. ght 2005 2006 CACE Technologies Davis California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the Politecnico di Torino CACE Technologies nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EV
253. haded area shown in the following figure 25 mm 25 mm Control point for scan Front side Page top Feed direction _ Center of paper Page bottom 477 A 5 Multifeed Detection Conditions There are three multifeed detection modes document layer document length and both document layer and length To detect multifeeds with document layer document length or both document layer and length specify Ultrasonic Length or Both in 6 9 19 Multifeed Detection Layer and Length page 392 The following conditions must be satisfied in each of these detection modes Detection by Layer Set sheets of the same thickness in the ADF paper chute for a series of scans Paper weight 52 to 127 g m 14 to 34 Ib 45 to 110 kg ream 0 06 to 0 15 mm Punched holes are not allowed within 25 mm 0 98 in either side of the center of paper Do not glue on any other paper within 25 mm 0 98 in either side of the center of paper Refer to Figure 1 Detection by Length Set sheets of the same length in the ADF paper chute for a series of scans Document length deviation 1 or less Punched holes are not allowed within 25 mm 0 98 in either side of the center of paper Refer to Figure 1 Detection by both Layer and Length Set sheets of the same thickness and length in the ADF paper chute for a series of scans Document thickness 52 to 127 g m 45 to 110 kg for 1 000 sheets 0 0
254. hanged 3 Press the OK button 414 415 Chapter 7 Scanner Care This chapter describes how to clean the scanner and replace parts in order to maintain the scanner in optimum scanning condition Do not use any aerosol sprays or alcohol based sprays to clean the ZAWARNING scanner Dust blown up by strong air from the spray may enter the inside of the scanner This may cause the scanner to fail or malfunction Sparks caused by static electricity generated when blowing off dust and dirt from the outside of the scanner may cause a fire The glass inside the ADF can become hot when the scanner is used Before cleaning inside the scanner or replacing any parts turn off the power unplug the AC adapter from the AC outlet and wait for at least 15 minutes Clean the feed rollers and eject rollers when the power is on Before replacing any parts turn off the power unplug the AC adapter from the AC outlet and wait for at least 15 minutes Z CAUTION gt gt Q 7 1 Cleaning Supplies and Part to Clean 0 sseeeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeseeeeees 417 7 2 Cleaning the Exterior of the Scanner cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenenes 419 7 3 Cleaning Inside the SCaMMe 2 cccecessssseseenessseessnneeneaeesseneennnaneneeeeseeensesae 420 7 4 Cleaning the Carrier SHGCC oncicicccecssssieeseersissesensenerdcadersensancersnsareneannseessenenninenne 425 7 9 Replacing Parts casssvncetsa
255. he scanning starts When the Scan Viewer is shown after a scan you can check whether the number of scanned sheets is the same as that set in the Scan Count window at the area shown below Even if pages are deleted on the Scan Viewer the number of scanned sheets is not changed 412 After scanning has completed the following confirmation window is shown if the number of scanned sheets is set to be checked Contact the administrator to change the setting of whether or not to check the scan count For details refer to 4 17 2 Setting a Job Sequence page 201 The Scan Count is as follows Scanned 1 sheets Expected 3 sheets Press the OK button to continue the scan the Cancel button to end it or the Scan More button to add further pages Cancel A When the Scan More button is shown press the button to add further pages To continue press the OK button To cancel the process and delete the scanned data press the Cancel button 413 6 15 Changing a User Password 6 15 Changing a User Password A user password can be changed when logged in as a user registered in a local account 1 On the Maintenance window press the Change Password button The window for changing a user password appears Change Password E New Password pO Confirm New Password Cancel 2 Enter the new password in New Password and Confirm New Password The user password is c
256. his section describes the file format available for an e mail address book that can be loaded from a file With User Editor a mail address book in CSV format can be edited UNICODE UTF 8 is used for the file character set Describe in CSV format as follows User Name Group Name Distribution List Name First Name Last Name E mail Address The values for each item are as follows Item Value and Format User Name Specify the name of the user Group Specify the name of the group Name Prepend at the beginning of the group name Example group01 To set the levels of the groups delimit them with Example group01 group02 and are replaced with _ Distribution Specify the name of the distribution list List Name Multiple e mail addresses must be separated using semi colons i and are replaced with _ First Name Specify the first name Last Name Specify the last name E mail For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Address Mail Address Setting Values page 483 A distribution list can contain up to 100 e mail addresses Up to 64 characters can be specified Spaces at the start and end of a name are omitted if specified 508 E File Format of Local Accounts Loaded from a File This section describes the file format available for local accounts that can be loaded from a file With User Editor local accounts in C
257. hows the details of the currently available update modules 3 Press the Browse button to specify the update module to be registered Press the Upload button to upload the update module 5 Select the Issue an Update Call check box to issue an update call When the check box is selected even if a scanner is not started or logged in to the update module is sent and applied to the scanner according to the Scanner Notification Schedule However if the update is released while the user is logged into a scanner the update will be applied after the user is logged out If any other available updates are pending those are also applied at the same time 6 In Scanner Notification Schedule set the schedule to notify update modules gt A When issuing a call set a time that does not conflict with that set for Software Update Time Period Restrictions on the Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window 7 Press the Register button This registers the uploaded update module When a new system update is available it will be installed in a scanner if the new version is higher than the current version Targeted scanners are restarted after the new system update has been installed Pending updates are performed in the following order 1 System Updates 2 Add in Installs 3 Scanner Settings 8 Press the Back button The Central Admin Console main window appears again 262 5 10 Installing an Add in A
258. ice Test cccccctinctsetcestcaesdedalesevassesecesdliawbaddisoccssbossenens 44 E Job Mode Settings oncccccssics secsencasatucee sees cectiececnesnnteverdesenctend 44 1 3 2 Regular User Operations ccccceccceccceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeees 45 1 4 System Requirements cccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 46 1 4 1 Requirements for Admin Tool c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 46 1 4 2 Requirements for Central Admin Console 00e0 47 1 4 3 Requirements for Central Admin Servet n 48 1 4 4 Requirements for Related Servers eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 49 1 4 5 Network Requirements for Central Admin 0 06 52 1 4 6 Scanner Requirements for Central Admin cee 52 1 4 7 Port Number List cs casceicseccet ers ett actaceedoan tetiaass esau abaeeneds 53 Chapter 2 Basic Scanner Operations ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 2 1 Turning the Power On Off cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 2 1 1 Turing th Power ON 3 fexresccesccdevescsecs cess cere cxeresesececesncesteve vere 57 2 1 2 Turning the Power Off es cciccecccecces ened wecerecenonicieeecaeenenett 58 2 2 Using the Scanner Buttons c ceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 59 E Using the Power Button cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 59 E Using the Top Cover Scan Button ee eeeeeeeeeees 61 2 3 Using the LCD Touch Panel
259. ign RootCA2 2020 9 15 SecureSign RootCA3 2020 9 15 SIA Secure Client CA 2019 7 9 SIA Secure Server CA 2019 7 9 Swisskey Root CA 2016 1 1 TC TrustCenter Class 1 CA 2011 1 1 TC TrustCenter Class 2 CA 2011 1 1 TC TrustCenter Class 3 CA 2011 1 1 TC TrustCenter Class 4 CA 2011 1 1 Thawte Premium Server CA 2021 1 1 Thawte Server CA 2021 1 1 UTN DATACorp SGC 2019 6 25 UTN USERFirst Hardware 2019 7 10 490 Valid until Issuer YYYY MM DD UTN USERFirst Network Applications 2019 7 10 VeriSign Trust Network 2028 8 2 If the root certificate authority validation period expires SSL connection is not possible 491 Appendix D Scanner Specifications This appendix gives specifications for the scanner 492 D 1 Installation Specifications Item Dimensions W x D x H Specification 300 x 226 x 172 mm 11 81 x 8 90 x 6 77 in Weight 6 0 kg 13 23 Ib LCD touch panel 8 4 inch XGA TFT LCD monitor Analog resistive touch panel Keyboard On screen keyboard Network interface LAN 10Base T 100Base TX Input power Voltage 100 240V 10 Frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption AC 50 W or less This scanner is installed with a Wake On LAN card If the last time the scanner M power was turned off was due to an error of power failure the Wake On LAN function will not work 493 D 2 Basic Scanner Specifications Item Scanner type S
260. ile name that has been edited After entering the file name press the Scan button to start the scan If any further job setup steps are required press the OK button that appears instead 410 6 14 3 Checking the Number of Sheets to Be Scanned When a job is processed the expected number of sheets to be scanned can be specified so that the actual number of scanned sheets can be checked after a scan For either of the following settings the Scan Count window is not shown M The Scan Count is not to be checked The Scan Count is to be checked but the Scan Count window is set not to appear The Allow per Job adjustment check box in the Check the Scan Count on the Job Details window is disabled 1 On the Job Menu window press the Job button 2 On the Scan Count window enter the number of sheets that are to be scanned between 1 and 999 When Print is included in the job sequence the number of sheets to be scanned can be set within the range of 1 to 100 but not 1 to 999 For Print up to 100 pages can be scanned For other than Print up to 999 pages can be scanned Therefore for duplex scanning make sure to set the number of pages so as not to exceed these respective maximums Scan Count Es E3 ES Enter the number of sheets that are to be scanned Expected Count Ooo sheets 1 100 Cancel 411 6 14 Processing a Job 3 Press the Scan button T
261. in Connection window For details refer to 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection page 123 Scanner Central Admin Server window For details refer to 4 8 9 Setting a Central Admin Server page 125 240 5 4 5 Uninstalling the Central Admin Server Software Central Admin Console This section describes how to uninstall the Central Admin Server Software Central Admin Console Refer to this section if uninstallation is required E Uninstalling the Central Admin Server Software This section uses Windows Server 2008 as an example Uninstall the Central Admin Server from Control Panel Programs Programs and Features in the computer in which it is installed Before starting uninstallation disconnect the Central Admin Server from the Q network If the uninstallation process is completed while the Central Admin Server is connected to the network normal operation cannot be guaranteed All files in the installation folder are deleted when the Central Admin Server software is uninstalled Back up the information related to Central Admin Server as required For details refer to 5 17 1 Backing Up Central Admin Server Settings page 281 If the following message appears while uninstalling the Central Admin Server software press the Retry button Even if the same message appears again re start the Central Admin Server and uninstall it again Another application has exclusive access to the file ASPNETDB MDF Please shut
262. in from the Maintenance window or perform the login via the Admin Tool If Central Admin is enabled in a scanner for which automatic login is enabled when the scanner is started or resumed from standby mode preference is given to checking for available scanner settings add in installs and system settings in the Central Admin Server over automatic login When scanner settings Add ins or system settings are available they are installed in the scanner If the number of scanners connecting to the Central Admin Server exceeds the maximum number possible the installation is skipped and automatic login is performed Updates will be applied to the scanner when a logout is performed from the Administrator Login window when the scanner starts next time or when the scanner resumes from standby mode 4 When Auto Login is set to On enter a User Name and Password The scanner follows the Active Directory user name format when authenticating the user login For users registered in the LDAP server When the Server Type of the LDAP server is Active Directory or Active Directory Global Catalog User Name Format Authentication Process SAM Account Name Authenticate the user login name Does not contain sAMAccountName Example user User Principal Name Authenticate the user login name Contains userPrincipalName Example user example com 108 When the Server Type of the LDAP server is
263. indow match the scanner and server s network Link Speed Duplex Mode settings If the problem persists in spite of having set both the scanner and server s network Link Speed Duplex Mode settings to Auto Negotiation select something other than Auto Negotiation and check again For more details about the Network Status window refer to 4 8 7 Checking the Network Operating Status page 121 452 E Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its Host Name or FQDN If a server cannot be connected to by using its host name or FQDN and does not respond to a ping test try the following steps Same as in Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address page 451 E Action Check if a network connection is possible by trying the same solution for Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address page 451 The scanner s DNS server or WINS server settings are invalid E Action Check that the DNS and WINS server settings are correct The DNS server or WINS server is not functioning normally or there is an error with the DNS or WINS server network connection E Action Ping the DNS and WINS servers to check they are functioning normally If the DNS or WINS server is not functioning request the network administrator to check its status 453 8 2 Network Connection Troubleshooting Failure to Add a Network Printer If adding a network printer to from the scanner is not possible try the following steps Also re
264. ing located on the left side from the anterior view Rotate the left side bushing in the direction indicated by the arrow Bushing Shaft Pick roller 433 7 5 Replacing Parts 11 Attach the sheet guide Squeeze the pickup tabs at both ends of the sheet guide with your fingers and fit it back onto its original location Pickup tab gt The tab snaps open attached document jams and other feeding errors may occur Make sure that the sheet guide is firmly and fully inserted If it is not correctly 12 Close the top cover You should hear a click 13 Attach the ADF paper chute Push the ADF paper chute until it locks into place inserting the tab of the ADF paper chute into the hole on the back of the scanner Install the ADF paper chute so that the side guide faces upward 14 Reset the pick roller usage counter The usage counter must be reset by an administrator For details refer to Resetting the Usage Counter page 171 Be careful that the top cover does not shut on your fingers 434 7 5 5 Purchasing the Carrier Sheet If the carrier sheet provided with the scanner can no longer be used for scanning due to damage or wear and tear you can purchase a new carrier sheet separately As a guideline it is recommended to replace the carrier sheet every 500 scans However replace the carrier sheet when it becomes scratched or dirty The part name and the part number of the separately
265. ing Parts page 426 Paper is not fed into the scanner Pick errors are frequent or document feed stops midway E Check item Do the documents satisfy the conditions given in A 2 Paper Quality page 474 E Action Use documents which satisfy the conditions described in A 2 Paper Quality page 474 E Check item Is the pick roller dirty E Action Clean the pick roller For more details refer to 7 3 Cleaning Inside the Scanner page 420 462 E Check item Is the pick roller worn out E Action Replace the pick roller For more details refer to 7 5 Replacing Parts page 426 E Check item Is there any foreign matter in the document feed path E Action Clean the document feed path mM Scanned Data Is Inappropriate Scanned data is elongated E Check item Are the feed rollers dirty E Action Clean the feed rollers For more details refer to 7 3 Cleaning Inside the Scanner page 420 Shadow on the leading edge of the scanned data E Check item Are the feed rollers dirty E Action Clean the feed rollers For more details refer to 7 3 Cleaning Inside the Scanner page 420 Vertical line on the scanned data E Check item Is the glass dirty E Action For more details on cleaning the glass refer to Chapter 7 Scanner Care page 416 Scanned data appears skewed or distorted E Check item Has the document been loaded correctly E Action Load the document correctly 463
266. ings For example for color printing and for black amp white printing For a color printing example the procedure for adding a printer is as follows 1 From the Start menu on the print server select Control Panel gt Printers and Faxes The Printers and Faxes window appears Double click the Add Printer The Add Printer Wizard window appears Follow prompts on the window until the Use Existing Driver window appears Select Keep existing driver recommended and press the Next button Use Existing Driver A driver is already installed for this printer You can use or replace the existing fiver Fujtsu 5 m Do you want w keep the eating driver or use the new one C Replace existing driver 5 Follow the prompts on the window until the Printer Sharing window appears 6 Specify the shared name Enter FUJITSUX 2 Color for color printing Add Printer Wizard Printer Sharing You can share this printer with other network users IF lise want to share this printer you must provide a share name You can use the ested name or type a new one The share name will be visible to other network aaa Do not share this printer FUJITSUX 2 Color 162 Since the shared name is displayed on the windows of the scanner it is recommended to name the printer with an alias that indicates the contents of the properties settings as follows Network Settings gt Print Setup the network prin
267. ion e mail has not arrived at the expected destination check that the part of the e mail address before the has been entered correctly Test e mail could not be sent E Action Check that the computer connected to the SMTP server is running properly Check if an e mail can be sent to the address from other computers in the network Ping the SMTP server to check that it and its network connection are working properly If the SMTP server does not respond to the ping test check that the system network is functioning normally by pinging the SMTP server from another computer in the network If it is only the scanner s network connection that does not work refer to Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address page 451 for further solutions if the problem seems to be with the SMTP server s network connection request the network administrator to check that the SMTP server and its network connection are functioning normally Check that the same port number has been correctly set for the scanner to SMTP server connection in 4 10 1 Setting the e Mail Server page 137 and 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 450 8 2 2 Other Network Connection Troubleshooting There are many reasons why a network connection may not be possible The following section provides information about general troubles that may occur when connecting to a network If the cause of the problem is unknown or the problem persists check
268. is logged in out The scanner power is turned on or it is resumed from standby mode The scanner power is turned off or it is set to standby mode 2 To filter scanners shown in the list specify filter conditions and press the Apply button The scanners satisfying the filter conditions appear 3 To clear all error marks V shown on the Scanner Operation Monitor window press the Clear All Errors button When the scanner operation monitor view consists of multiple pages error marks of all scanners are cleared 274 5 15 Viewing Event Log Event logs output from the scanners or the Central Admin Server can be viewed The latest 100 event log items can be viewed on the Scanner Admin Operations window Log for all events that occur on the Central Admin Server Log for events that occur in the scanners where Type is Error or Warning To view all event logs check the Event Log window E Viewing Event Log 1 Press the Event Log button in the Central Admin Console main window The Event Log window appears Event Log Admin Operations Operation Monitor Config List Select the type of events that you wish to check and click the Refresh List Export Clear Log button C Filter Conditions Origin Server V Scanner Type WlError W Warning Wilnfo Refresh List Date Time Origin Type Message Info 0A021105 Scanner has been registered Info 0A021105 Scanner has been registered Info 04021105 S
269. istrator Access via the Admin Tool This section describes the required settings for logging in via the Admin Tool The following are required for administrator login via the Admin Tool 4 5 1 Setting the Scanner Name page 94 4 7 3 Changing the Admin Password page 112 4 8 1 Giving the Scanner an IP Address page 113 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection page 123 4 8 2 Setting the DNS Server page 115 4 8 3 Setting the WINS Server page 116 E Checking the Internet Explorer Cache Settings Check the Internet Explorer cache settings 1 From the Internet Explorer Tools menu select Internet Options The Internet Options dialog box appears 2 On the General tab press the Settings button on the Browsing history The Temporary Internet Files and History Settings dialog box appears 3 For Check for newer versions of stored pages select Automatically 4 For Disk space to use specify 63 MB or above 5 Press the OK button Different browser versions may require a different set up procedure Do not use a proxy server setting If any updates or service packs are available for Internet Explorer make sure they M are applied 80 E Setting the Internet Explorer Trusted Sites Enter the target scanner URL as Internet Explorer trusted sites If not set connection to a scanner is blocked and certification cannot be installed 1 From the Internet Explorer Tools menu select Interne
270. it Fax Number Recipient abc Fax No 123456789 Cancel 5 Press the OK button gt The edited fax number list contact is saved 331 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax 6 5 4 Deleting a Contact from the Fax Number List Fax contact numbers deleted from the list are no longer accessible to any user 1 Open the Fax Number List window in either of the following ways On the Send Fax window press Bj On the Main Menu or Job Menu window press the Maintenance button then on the Maintenance window press the Edit Fax Numbers button Select the fax contact that is to be deleted Press E The Delete Fax Number confirmation window appears Check that the correct fax contact has been set for deletion and press the OK button Delete Fax Number ES OK to delete the following data Recipient abc Fax No 123456789 The contact is deleted from the fax number list 332 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data 1 On the Main Menu window press the Print button The Print window appears M The scan information can be changed by pressing of Scan Settings For details refer to 6 9 Setting the Scan Options page 356 2 To change the printer press pi Print E Printer No of Copies En i r ee 3 Duplex 9 N W Scaling 100 Print Side long Edge fh Positioning Center Scan es Default Soa a Cancel Settings My Vi
271. itoring amp Management gt Data Management gt User Data Store The User Data Store window appears 2 Press the Clear button The delete confirmation window appears 3 Press the Yes button gt The user data store is cleared 180 4 15 2 Maintaining the System Settings The scanner s system settings set by the administrator can be saved in CSV format backed up restored or returned to their factory default values E Downloading the System Settings in CSV Format AdminToo System settings downloaded in CSV format may be viewed by using spreadsheet software CSV system settings files are of the following format Function_name Option_name Value The default file name is Configuration_download csv 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Data Management gt System Settings File gt The System Settings File window appears 2 Press the Get CSV button Bulk manage the system settings Download system settings as viewable file Get CSV System Settings File Download system settings backup file Backup Select a backup file to restore from Restore Browse Restore in the same scanner Import from another scanner Restore data other than unique settings Reset system settings to factory defaults and Reset clear logs Reset system settings to factory defaults Secure initialize clear the user data store and logs and initialize the free space The File
272. ize the time of computers on the network with the correct time It is used when a client makes a time query through the network Fax Server The fax server refers to the computer equipped with a fax modem or a dedicated fax board connected with a telephone line It is used for sending faxes This scanner supports the following fax servers RightFax Business Server Version 9 3 This fax server can be used to send the scanned data by fax 51 1 4 System Requirements 1 4 5 Network Requirements for Central Admin This section describes the required network conditions for Central Admin For Central Admin the following network conditions are required HTTP HTTPS communication is possible from the Central Admin Server to the scanner HTTP HTTPS communication is possible from the scanner to the Central Admin Server HTTP HTTPS communication is possible from the Central Admin Console to the Central Admin Server Wake On LAN Magic Packet routing is possible from the Central Admin Server to the scanner when Wake On LAN is used The connection between a scanner and Central Admin Server has the following limitations Communication via an HTTP proxy is not supported Networks where IP addresses using NAT NAPT are not supported 1 4 6 Scanner Requirements for Central Admin Up to 1 000 scanners can be managed with Central Admin If 1 000 scanners are registered on the server no more scanners can be registered as targets for centr
273. k box under Security in the Settings area is not selected E Action 1 In Internet Explorer set the following settings in the Tools menu Internet Options 2 On the Advanced tab select the Use SSL 3 0 check box under Security in the Settings area 458 8 3 Other Troubleshooting This section describes problems that may occur during scanning and gives information on how to deal with them Before requesting repair check the following list of common problems If the problem still cannot be solved after consulting the troubleshooting suggestions check the points in 8 4 Points to Check before Contacting Your FUJITSU Scanner Dealer page 467 and then contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider The possible problems are as follows Problem List Scanner cannot be turned on Scanner cannot be turned on page 460 Scanner does not start up The The last attempt to restart message is shown on the window and the scanner does not start up page 460 Scanner does not resume from standby mode page 460 Data cannot be scanned properly Scanning does not start page 461 Even after pressing the top cover Scan button scanning does not start page 461 Multifeed errors occur frequently page 462 Paper is not fed into the scanner Pick errors are frequent or document feed stops midway page 462 Scanned data is inappropriate Sca
274. k on again To shutdown the scanner correctly press the Shutdown button on the Login window When the scanner is left in standby mode for a long period of time it may take a long time to be resumed The idle time before standby mode entered can be changed For details refer to 4 7 2 Setting the Time to Standby Mode page 110 Automatic login without displaying the Login window is possible For more details about how to set automatic login refer to 4 7 1 Setting the Login Settings page 107 If automatic login is set login via the Admin Tool is possible while the main menu or job menu is displayed 60 mM Using the Top Cover Scan Button When a button with is displayed on the LCD touch panel the Scan button becomes available When a button with gt is displayed the Scan button can be pressed to start the scan The LCD touch panel Scan button with may appear as follows Scan Scan amp Send Scan amp Print Scan amp Save Scan More One of those buttons on the LCD touch panel can be pressed to start the scan 61 2 3 Using the LCD Touch Panel 2 3 Using the LCD Touch Panel When using the LCD touch panel buttons only need to be lightly pressed to select them For details about the LCD touch panel refer to the following 4 1 1 Administrator Windows via the LCD Touch Panel page 75 6 2 Using LCD Touch Panel Windows Regular User page 303 Do not use a pen or other
275. k roller 6 Remove the shaft Slightly lift the left side of the shaft by approximately 5 mm slide the shaft to the left and lift it up and away Pick roller Shaft The pick roller bushing may be hard to rotate Do not try to turn it with your Q fingernail Use a paper clip to turn the roller bushing if you can not rotate it with your fingertip 431 7 5 Replacing Parts 7 Remove the pick roller from the shaft Lift up the lock tab of the pick roller and pull out the shaft Retaining clip Shaft Pick roller chipped or broken If worried try lifting the retaining clip using a paper clip as shown in the following diagram Take care if lifting the pick roller lock tab with your fingernail as it may get 8 Attach the new pick roller onto the shaft Insert the shaft into the new pick roller aligning the protrusion on the shaft with the matching notch in the pick roller Pick roller pra a Protrusion Shaft a Make sure that the pick roller shaft is fully inserted If it is not correctly attached document jams and other feeding errors may occur 432 9 Insert the shaft back in the scanner Insert the top end of the shaft from above into the roller bushing located on the right side as seen from the front then set down the shaft until it is fixed in the scanner Then adjust it slowly by setting it down Shaft Bushing Pick roller 10 Fix the bush
276. kup folder is not empty A file or folder exists in the backup folder Specify an empty folder If a folder which does not exist is specified it will be created 293 5 18 Messages Code Message Action 7A040023 Restoration from this version of backup file is not possible The backup file saved by executing the AmBackup exe command in the Central Admin Server of the previous version cannot be restored with the AmRestore exe command in the Central Admin Server of new version Refer to 5 17 4 Migrating Data to an Updated Version of the Central Admin Server Software page 285 and try backing up again 294 5 18 4 Audit Log Export Command Messages Code Message Action 7A050010 Scanner Central Admin Check that the Central Admin Server Server is not installed has been installed correctly Detail error message Check whether the command is being XXXXXXXXXX executed with administrative privileges for the computer 7A050012 Audit log export failed Check the error message and try the Detail error code following XXXXXXXXXX Check that there is enough free disk Detail error message space in the destination export to XXXXXXXXXX folder Check that the destination export to folder is specified correctly Check that the destination export to folder the destination export from folder and log file have write access Check that there is not a
277. l an adjustment that advances the system time by 20 minutes or more results in a session timeout and causes the scanner to logout However the specified time adjustment will be made 98 4 5 5 Setting the Keyboard HA Admin Too Set the keyboard 1 Select System Settings gt Local Settings gt Keyboard Settings The Keyboard Settings window appears System Settings gt Local Settings Local Settings Keyboard Settings Enter the settings for the keyboard Keyboard Language English US i Certificate Management Previous 2 Select a keyboard language 3 Press the OK button The keyboard is set 99 4 5 Configuring the System 4 5 6 Managing Certificates Certificates to be used for server authentication in SSL communication can be imported or removed E Importing a Certificate File AdminToo X 509 certificate files cer crt can be imported Up to 100 certificate files can be imported 1 Select System Settings gt Local Settings gt Certificate Management gt The Certificate Management window appears Manage network authentication certificates Trusted Root Certificate Authorities No certificates have been imported Certificate Management Specify an authentication certificate file Import Browse 2 Specify an authentication certificate file Press the Browse button to specify a certificate file 3
278. l only the system settings reset or clear operation can be performed Operations cannot be performed from the scanner settings edit window but can be performed from the Central Admin Console Scanner Admin Operations window When using the LCD touch panel the update cannot be performed 43 1 3 User Types and Operations HM Device Test LCD touch panel Central Item Function elt Admin See Basic Advanced Tool Console ag mode mode Screen Calibrate the LCD A A NA NA page 439 Calibration touch panel Scan Test Perform a scan A A NA NA page 436 test A available NA not available E Job Mode Settings LCD touch panel Central It Functi See ene ee Admin S em CAES ON Basic Advanced Tool c l Geis mode mode onsog Job Set a job NA NA A A page 201 Sequences sequence Job Menus Set a job menu NA NA page 210 Job Groups Set a job group NA NA A A page 216 A available NA not available 44 1 3 2 Regular User Operations Item Function See e Mail Send the scanned data by e mail page 309 Fax Send the scanned data by fax page 324 Print Print the scanned data page 333 Save Save the scanned data to a network page 344 folder Scan to SharePoint Save the scanned data to a SharePoint page 348 folder Scan Settings Set the scan options page 356 Scan Viewer Enable disable the scan viewer page 395 Maint
279. l Scanner page 106 Settings Login Settings Login Settings page 107 Standby Mode _ page 110 Admin Password A A A A A page 112 N Necessary A Advisable Not required 70 Network Settings Menu e Mail Fax Print Save Gena See Basic IP address N N N N N page 113 DNS Server A A A A A page 115 WINS Server A A A A A page 116 NTP Server A A A A A page 117 Proxy Server A A page 118 Ping page 119 Network Status page 121 Network Admin Admin page 123 Connection Scanner Central page 125 Admin Server Authentication Server Login LDAP A A A A A page 127 Server rt C1 1 1 1 eMalLbaAP page 133 Server Customize LDAP page 135 Search e Mail SMTP Server N N page 137 Send e Mail A page 139 File Names A page 140 e Mail Fax Fax Server N page 142 71 3 2 Required Scanner Function Settings Menu e Mail Fax Print Save an J See SharePoint Network Folder Network Folder N page 143 File Names A page 156 Save FTP Server Folder FTP Server N page 143 Folder
280. l addresses or fax numbers so care should be taken when managing such data ifa log file error is detected during scanner operation the log file will be cleared and the log entry Error 81001003 Corrupted system log file was deleted is recorded E Viewing the System Log Details EM GaminiToa The system log summary is shown in date time order Even if the Region Timezone or Date Time settings are changed the order of the log entries will not be changed 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt System Log The System Log window appears System operation log records Date Time Type Message 01000001 z 09 434 18 14 25 Information SharePoint Folder Add Setting Info Display Name Shared D 01000001 09 13 18 14 15 Information SharePoint Folder Add Setting Info Display Name Images System Log 01000001 09 13 18 14 11 Information SharePoint Folder Add Setting Info Display Name Documents 01000001 09 13 18 13 47 Information SharePoint Folder Settings we Info Scan to SharePoint On 01000001 09 13 18 12 47 Information SharePoint Folder Remove Set Info Display Name Shared D 01000001 09 13 18 12 43 Information SharePoint Folder Remove Set Info Display Name Images 01000001 09 13 18 12 39 Information SharePoint Folder Remove Set Info Display Name Documents 01000001 09 13 18 12 28 Information SharePoint Folder Settings we
281. l cannot be adjusted For details refer to 4 6 3 Setting General Scanner Settings page 106 387 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 17 Blank Page Skip The scan process can be set to skip any blank pages in the scanned data For example when a stack of documents containing both two sided and one sided documents is scanned in duplex scan mode this feature removes only the reverse side i e blank page of one sided documents from the scanned data Medium Dark blank pages may not be recognized as such by the scanner No scanned data is produced if all of the sheets in the document stack are recognized as blank pages The following types of documents may be accidentally recognized as blank pages Ifthe Brightness setting see 6 9 12 Brightness page 383 is set to Dark or Before discarding the scanned documents make sure to check for pages accidentally removed from the scanned data Almost blank pages containing only a few characters Pages of only one color white or other including black 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Advanced tab 2 Press the Blank Page Skip button The Blank Page Skip window appears 3 Select whether or not blank pages are to be skipped Set whether to skip blank pages This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected setting is displayed to the right of the Blank Page Skip button 388 6 9 18 Page Orientation Automatically ro
282. lders refer to 4 12 2 Setting the FTP Server Folders page 149 A network folder can be added in the following ways Network Tree Select a network folder from the network tree For details refer to Registering a Network Folder Network Tree page 144 Network Path Set a network folder by directly entering the path alias for the file server folder For details refer to Registering a Network Folder Network Path page 146 For details about setting a file name for scanned data to be saved in a network folder refer to 4 12 4 Setting a File Name Format for When Saving Scanned Data page 156 Note the following when registering a network folder The network folder is registered as a network path If the network folder is on a Windows file server and the length of the full Windows path including the file name exceeds 259 characters the scan data will not be saved Before registering a Windows network folder check that the length of the full file path name is not likely to exceed 259 characters If the selected folder was created using a language foreign to that of the browsing operating system the network folder may not register correctly If the name of the network folder contains unrecognizable characters check the codeset used If the number folders to be displayed is large they may take a long time to appear For a network folder set a readable and writable folder 143 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Sca
283. le For Windows XP KB933566 must be applied to Internet Explorer Hardware Any computer which runs the supported software 32 MB or more of free memory space 64 MB or more of free disk space XGA monitor or better LAN cable Pointing device e g mouse 46 1 4 2 Requirements for Central Admin Console For use of the Central Admin Console the following requirements apply Software English Versions e mitt System Windows XP SP3 or later Windows Vista SP1 or later Windows 7 Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later Windows Server 2008 Admin Tool NET Framework 2 0 SP2 or later NET Framework 3 0 SP2 or later or NET Framework 3 5 SP1 or later 1 Internet Explorer 6 SP2 or later 2 1 If NET Framework is not installed the administrator will be notified Download NET Framework from the Microsoft Web site and install it into the computer When installing NET Framework check that there is enough free disk space For NET Framework 2 0 at least 280 MB of additional free disk space is required 2 Confirm that the latest security patch has been applied If not applied problems with the window display may arise MS08 024 KB947864 and subsequent security update programs are required Hardware Any computer which runs the supported software 32 MB or more of free memory space 64 MB or more of free disk space XGA monitor or better LAN cable Pointing device e g mouse 47 1
284. leted and the LCD touch panel screen returns to the Main Menu window If the SMTP Authentication window appears enter authentication information V needed to access the SMTP server and press the OK button SMTP Authentication User Name Password I as Faxing scan data to 1234567890 325 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax Ifthe Scan button is pressed when Scan Viewer is On the scanning status and scan settings are shown during a scan The maximum number of pages that can be scanned is 999 When Blank Page Skip is enabled the number of scanned pages excluding skipped blank pages is shown Additional pages can be scanned in place of skipped blank pages until the maximum number of scanned pages is reached When the scanning has completed the Scan Viewer window appears For more details about editing on the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 For more details about displaying the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 10 Enabling Disabling the Scan Viewer page 395 The results of the fax sending is notified to the e mail address set in the Notification To Sender s e Mail Address field by the fax server If data fails to be sent to the fax server an error notification e mail with the following title is sent from the scanner to the e mail address of the user who logs in Network Scanner XXXX Error 326 6 5 1 Selecti
285. lex mode 1 On the Print window press the Print Side button gt The Print Side window appears 2 Select a print mode Q According to the printer settings from the printers properties window may be used instead E Print Side Set the print side setting Simplex Duplex Duplex Single sided Long Edge Short Edge This returns to the Print window The selected mode is displayed to the right of the Print Side button 343 6 7 Saving the Scanned Data to a Network Folder 6 7 Saving the Scanned Data to a Network Folder Save the scanned data to a network folder or an FTP server folder 1 On the Main Menu window press the Save button The Save window appears Eag M The scan information can be changed by pressing of Scan Settings For details refer to 6 9 Setting the Scan Options page 356 2 Press Bl Save aS gi Save in SSN180000803 134021001 Ww amp lt oO ra Wn Overwrite old files Soci ow Senni a Cancel Settings Mke Default vera gt The Folder List window appears 344 3 Select a folder Only folders which are in the list may be selected Only the administrator may M add folders to the list or edit the details of folders already on the list To change the folders in the list contact the administrator For more details about adding network folders refer to 4 12 1 Setting the Network Folders page 143 For more d
286. llation folder of the new Central Admin Server software In the following cases overwrite the ServiceSetting dll file in the Bin folder that was copied to an arbitrary location in Step 1 with the file of the same name from the previous version of the Central Admin Server software When migrating data from Windows Server 2003 to Windows Server 2008 When migrating data from Windows Server 2008 to Windows Server 2003 The ServiceSetting dll file is stored in the following location Under the AmManager Bin folder in the installation folder of the previous Central Admin Server software 2 Execute AmBackup exe in the Bin folder which was copied to an arbitrary folder of the previous version of the Central Admin Server For details about AmBackup exe refer to 5 17 1 Backing Up Central Admin Server Settings page 281 The data of the previous version of the Central Admin Server is backed up 285 5 17 Maintaining Central Admin Server Settings 3 Execute AmRestore exe in the following folder of the new version of the Central Admin Server For details about AmRestore exe refer to 5 17 2 Restoring Central Admin Server Settings page 283 Under the AmManager Bin folder in the installation folder of the Central Admin Server software The data backed up in Step 2 is restored in the new version of the Central Admin Server This concludes migrating the data from a previous version of the
287. low on from the last page of the current scanned data For Print up to 100 pages can be scanned For other than Print up to 999 pages can be scanned When Blank Page Skip is enabled the number of scanned pages excluding skipped blank pages is shown Additional pages can be scanned in place of skipped blank pages until the maximum number of scanned pages is reached When the scan has completed the Scan Viewer window opens and shows any additionally scanned pages 400 6 11 5 Deleting a Scanned Page Specified pages can be deleted from the scanned data shown on the Scan Viewer window If specified pages are deleted the remaining scanned data is sent as an e mail attachment or faxed printed or saved to a network folder without the deleted pages 1 On the Scan Viewer window use a a gt D to display the page you want to delete 2 Press a A confirmation message appears 3 Press the OK button The page is deleted A Ifthe scanned data consists of only one page that page cannot be deleted To re scan the document press the Cancel button The deleted page is removed from the scanned data This operation cannot be undone 6 11 6 Editing Marked Characters to Be Set as Keywords After character strings in marked sections are scanned the recognized text can be edited before it is finally set as a keyword for the PDF file For more details about setting whether or not to edit charact
288. lt button window may be used instead According to the printer being used settings from the printers properties 6 Press the Scan button When Scan Viewer is Off this will be a Scan amp Print button The scanning starts The scanning status and scan settings are shown during the scan The maximum number of pages that can be scanned is 100 When Blank Page Skip is enabled the number of scanned pages excluding skipped blank pages is shown Additional pages can be scanned in place of skipped blank pages until the maximum number of scanned pages is reached When the scanning has completed the Scan Viewer window appears For details about editing on the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 Ifthe Scan amp Print button is selected when Scan Viewer is Off the A scanned data is printed immediately after the scanning is completed and the LCD touch panel screen returns to the Main Menu window For details refer to 6 10 Enabling Disabling the Scan Viewer page 395 Current user printing privileges for the specified printer are checked before printing When printing privileges are being checked data may be spooled temporarily 7 Check the scanned data For more details about the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 335 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data 8 On the Scan Viewer wind
289. m Document Loading Capacity page 476 2 When loading multiple document sheets fan the document stack 1 Lightly grip the ends of the document stack in both hands and fan two or three times 2 Rotate the documents 90 degrees and fan again 3 Align the edges of the document sheets 3 Pull up the extension to hold the documents and lift up the stacker Pull and lift up the stacker as shown in the figure below Extension Stacker 297 6 1 Loading Documents The stacker holds the document sheets after they have been scanned It can M be pulled out and adjusted to the size of the document being scanned 4 Load the documents into the ADF paper chute Load the document front side down with the top of the document entering the scanner first when multiple document sheets are loaded the last page is on the top If Face up is selected on the Paper Face Direction window load the VY document front side up with the bottom of the document entering the scanner first For details about how to load the document refer to 6 9 6 Document Feed Direction page 368 298 5 Adjust the side guides to the width of the documents Move the side guides so that they touch both sides of the documents If there is any space between the side guides and the edges of documents the scanned data may be skewed 299 6 1 Loading Documents 6 1 2 Loading Documents Using a Carrier Sheet With an optional ca
290. mail For details about setting values refer to 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail page 309 Job Items 1 amp Mail Delete This Item Insert New Item e Mail Settings To Browse V Send a copy to user e mail address Ge Browse E Send a copy to user e mail address Bee Browse El Send a copy to user e mail address File Name Scanner Name MMddyyyyhhmmss Name Format e Mail address of user D Fixed e mail address From SMTP Authentication l Request return receipt Yes No Subject Body When the File Format is JPEG or TIFF a separate image file will be attached to the e mail for each scanned page Press the Browse button to set a different e mail address from the LDAP M List window Job 5 qyu ns s Job Groups LDAP List User Name FirstName LastName Search Base LDAP Filter Conditions Search Position Head abc User Name e Mail Address Find First Name ElLast Name El Common Name E Display Name Cancel To filter the LDAP List refer to Filtering the LDAP List page 209 for more details Press the Name Format button to specify a file name on the File Names e Mail window For details about setting values refer to 4 10 3 Setting a File Name Format for When Attaching Scanned Data to e Mail page 140 204 8 If Fax is selected for the job item in Step 6 perf
291. mail Address displayName mail Initials Homepage initials wiWWWHomePage Use Defaults OK J Cancel Search Item Description First Name Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the First Name search item The default value is givenName Last Name Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the Last Name search item The default value is sn Common Name Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the Common Name search item The default value is cn Display Name Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the Display Name search item The default value is displayName 246 Search Item Description Initials Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the Initials search item The default value is initials Comment Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the Comment search item The default value is description Workplace Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the Workplace search item The default value is physicalDeliveryOfficeName Phone Number Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the Phone Number search item The default value is telephoneNumber e Mail Address Enter the schema name that is to be associated with the E mail Address search item The default value is mail This search item cannot be skipped Homepage Enter the schema name that is to
292. min scanners can be targeted for Central Admin 1 Select Network Settings gt Network Admin gt Scanner Central Admin Server The Scanner Central Admin Server window appears Network Settings gt Network Admin Network Admin Enter the Scanner Central Admin Server settings Admin Connection Central Admin E o Scanner Central Admin Server Address Port Number 1 65535 20444 Roaming Mode Job Mode eo fo This scanner s server side status is Unregistered Update Scheduler o Scheduled Date Time MM dd yyyy HH mm Previous Cancel 2 For Central Admin select whether or not to enable Central Admin Server If registration with the Central Admin Server is successful the text will change to This scanner s server side status is Registered Even when setting values are correct if the network is disconnected or the Central Admin Server is in a suspended state registration will fail In either case if the Central Admin is On the process will be run again the next time the scanner is turned on or resumed from the standby mode 3 Enter the Central Admin Server IP address host name or FQDN in the Address input field 4 Inthe Port Number input field enter a port number to be used by the scanner to communicate with the Central Admin Server 5 For Roaming Mode select whether or not to enable roaming mode 6 For Job Mode select whether or not to enable
293. mode PDF Password Other than PDF file format Compression High Compression for Color PDF Color Mode Grayscale or Black amp White Resolution 600dpi Other than PDF file format Other than High Compression for Color PDF Color Mode Black amp White 359 6 9 Setting the Scan Options Tab Item Settings which become invalid Conditions which make settings invalid Quality Brightness Carrier Sheet Marker Index of the text recognition settings Contrast Carrier Sheet Marker Index of the text recognition settings Sharpness Dropout None Color Color Mode Auto or RGB Color Other than None Carrier Sheet Color Mode Auto or RGB Color Background Removal Carrier Sheet Marker Index of the text recognition settings Advanced Blank Page Skip Carrier Sheet Paper Size long page mode Page Auto Orientation Paper Size long page mode Other than Auto Carrier Sheet Paper Size long page mode Resolution 600dpil Multifeed Detection Carrier Sheet Paper Size long page mode Edge Cropping 360 1 When the Scan Settings window is opened from the Print or Send Fax window the Save tab is not displayed 2 Text Recognition in
294. mode settings or to cancel the next scheduled upload of the job mode settings press the Cancel button to delete the job mode settings Even if available job mode settings are canceled job mode settings already sent to a scanner will not become invalid To not use job mode settings in a scanner on the Network Settings Central Admin Server window set Job Mode to Off 3 To create and release a new set of job mode settings press the Job Mode Settings button The job mode edit window appears 269 5 12 Setting the Job Mode 4 Configure job mode settings The contents of the last configured job mode settings are shown sob s X Close 2 Help Job Sequences ob Menus ob Groups Jobs List Filter Conditions Job Name Comment Find Job Sequences button The setting items are the same as those set in the Job Sequences tab in the job mode settings menu in the window for administrator operations For details refer to 4 17 2 Setting a Job Sequence page 201 To set Print or Save for a job sequence a network printer or network folder must be previously added on the job mode edit window The job sequences and job mode edit window settings are related in the following way The network printers shown on the Printer List window when Print is selected as a job item are the network printers set on the job mode edit window The network folders shown on the Folder
295. n E 3 Job Report mez 406 To view the job report press the Job Report button on the Job Progress window This will show the job report To view detailed information for the job report select a function name on the Job Report window and press a This will show the job report details Job Detail Information a GESS Error Code 12030100 Date 07 16 Time 16 55 28 eee Print a 2 ea aA Error could not print PrinterO1 appears if the status is shown as Error Press the button to send detailed information of the job report to an administrator by e mail The e mail address is the e mail address set on the administrator Alert Notification window If the job sequence is processed successfully the LCD touch panel screen returns to the Job Menu If an error occurs during the job process the OK button appears on the Job Progress or Job Report window Pressing the OK button returns to the Job Menu 407 6 14 Processing a Job 6 14 1 Enabling Disabling the Message Screen You can select whether to show the Message Screen for checking the contents of a job M When Message Screen is disabled it is not possible to select whether or not to show the Message Screen This section uses an example where buttons from Job1 to Job6 have been set 1 On the Job Menu window press Ll for Message Screen Pressing the button toggles the setting
296. n 107 login via the LCD touch panel _ 78 M magnification wesc Atidceeeen eeiepeceavees 105 Main MENU Sectes onssactctaceeteateateiensogeceeartande 303 maintaining Central Admin Server settings 281 system settings a 181 management srnrenroranio iinei 226 management file a n 482 management settings eeen 482 managing system log wancthacceetieauend cemerteieste 175 USO OJ piperin ieee inkudo eiere 173 Marked section eeens 373 maximum number of e mail targets that can be stored in the e mail address book 317 maximum number of fax contact N MDE S eea e atara iaa ida Taapsee 329 mMenu tictedeeresctestisecestensktnasieabel toatl cans 75 76 MESSAGE SCFEEN oe eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 408 migrating data to an updated version of the Central Admin Server software _ 285 monitoring and maintaining the scanner RMIGLWORK sakarani antaa aeania Ad one nikeae 260 multifeed detection ww 102 392 MY LISt iiini aeii 313 N network folder alias a n 146 network folder details 0 eee 148 network printer alias 0 166 167 network requirements ccccceeeeeeeeees 52 network settings oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeee teens 113 NTP Server onenei tnet na 51 O obtaining technical support cceceeeeeeees 193 technical support on the Central Admin Server 284 OSET sac tcc harceed hed soa a A kb cose pecans 105 operations cccceesecceeeeeeee
297. n 99 PrOxy SETVET annneatneienie neat 118 FEGiONAIMEZONE nsee 97 scanner configuration 251 scannet NAME neces eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 94 setting mode Acciacca einen 92 SharePoint folders aeee 153 Wake On LAN cccceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 122 WINS server foscsnacesietescniceceneete 116 setting MOUS ag ciiesececsdedeneedeesieetn cee edeated ead 67 setting up for administrator access Via the Admin Tool eseese 80 Settings grOUp dss achesaihsslce delle 256 SharePoint server assesseer 50 Sharphess cevvseesaesteeess sotto westeh a a ed 385 Sheet guide sec cceeeeeeeeeseeeeceeteeeeseeees 36 Sideg ide cies i ahaaa ie Oly aaae ie 34 simplex duplex eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeereeeee 343 SMTP sever sete ncn adlndnneinetdine 50 specifications eee eeeeeeseeeseeeeeereeeeee 492 SLACKER astiuclteepalrtatneneceteuastecuslas Sungueuancee 35 standby Mode ou seeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 59 110 standby mode setting eceeeeeeeeeeee 110 switching the keyboard layout 495 system requirements Admin Tool 2csucsisevitieletaitiwehe 46 Central Admin Console _ 00 47 Central Admin Server oo eee 48 system settings aeee 94 system update seeen 261 541 text recognition ssssssessseesseesreereene 369 371 TOD GOVGR y h aisn akaa a a aE ara a ai 35 top cover release catch ccceeeeeeeeeees 34 turning the power on off eeens 57 U uninstalling Add in module aeee 190 AdMIN TOO
298. n Add in for scanner can be installed by uploading an Add in module and setting update calls Up to six Add in modules can be installed The new Add in update module will be released and applied to the scanners when one of the following occurs Scanner is started or resumed from the standby mode Scanner is logged out Scanner is notified of any update modules Scanner has an automatic update scheduled When update calls are set up updates can be applied to the scanners that are in power off or standby mode using Wake On LAN If the Add in module is already available the module is replaced However if the date of the last modified Add in module version is the same as or earlier than the currently available one the module cannot be uploaded Add ins can be updated according to the time specified on the scanner side M For details refer to 4 8 9 Setting a Central Admin Server page 125 1 Press the Admin Operations button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Admin Operations window appears 2 Select the Add in Installs link The Add in Installs window appears Add in Installs Upload and release Add ins to the scanners Add in Groups m Registered Add in Module Add in Group Default Current Release Add inName None Installation Method Release Date m Upload amp Release a New Add in Specify the Add in installation settings o j e Add in Upload Back
299. n be checked on the Scan Viewer window Perform a scan test to check that the scanner scans normally For details refer to 7 6 Performing a Scan Test page 436 Administrator Login button Shown when automatic login is enabled in the administrator settings Shows the Administrator Login window on which administrator login can be performed For details refer to 4 2 1 Administrator Login via the LCD Touch Panel page 78 Change Password button Shown when logged in as a local account user Shows the Change Password window on which the password of the currently logged in user can be changed For details refer to 6 15 Changing a User Password page 414 404 6 14 Processing a Job This section uses an example where buttons from Job1 to Job6 have been set 1 On the Job Menu window press the Job button When you are included in multiple job groups the Job Menu windows can be switched by using the job menu switch buttons on the Job Menu List window which appears when a list button is pressed Job Menu JobMenu1 Message a Scan LEKO Screen S Viewer The Message Screen appears f either the title or message is not set in Message Screen on the Job Details window even when Message Screen is set to On the Message Screen will not be shown For details refer to Step 4 of 4 17 2 Setting a Job Sequence page 201 If Off is selected for Message Screen scanning is
300. n e mail can be sent to all distribution lists and e mail addresses registered in the group at the same time Up to five levels can be set for groups E Adding a Group 1 Select the Address Book tab 2 Inthe group list select a group to which the new group is to be added 3 Open the Add Group dialog box in either of the following ways Select the Address Book menu and then select Add Group Press the Add Group button 4 Enter a Group Name This can be up to 64 characters long The following symbols cannot be used Add Group Insertion Point Group Name 5 Press the OK button The new group is added 510 E Changing the Group Name 1 Select the Address Book tab 2 Inthe group list select the group name to be changed 3 Open the Edit Group dialog box in either of the following ways Select the Address Book menu and then select Properties Press the Properties button on the toolbar 4 Enter a Group Name 5 Press the OK button The group name is changed E Deleting a Group Note that deleting a group also deletes the sub groups and e mail addresses Q belonging to the group 1 Select the Address Book tab 2 In the group list select a group to be deleted 3 Perform either of the following Select the Address Book menu and then select Delete Press the Delete button on the toolbar The delete confirmation window appears 4 Press th
301. n error interrupts this process leaving some scanned data in the scanner this will automatically be deleted at the next start up 32 Secure initialize When initializing the data in the scanner the free disk space can be also overwritten with meaningless random data When the user data store is cleared from the scanner the old cipher key is deleted and a new cipher key is generated This totally eliminates the possibility of access to any user data remaining in the free disk space There is no input pathway to the scanner for files via external memory media and input pathways of files via the network are limited to the minimum Security patches are provided to protect the scanner against virus attacks Taking these measures enables the scanner to be protected against virus infection 33 1 2 Part Names and Functions 1 2 Part Names and Functions E Front View Extension ADF paper chute Side guides Top cover release catch Power button Scan button LCD touch panel Top cover Stacker Part Name Function Extension Can be pulled out and adjusted to the size of the document being scanned ADF paper chute Holds the documents waiting to be scanned Side guides Adjust to the width of the paper to prevent skewing of the scanned pages Top cover release catch Pull to open the top cover Power button Turns on scanner or brings up the Login window from standby mode
302. n four digits File numbers are the numbers assigned to individual split files For example if the original file name is abc the file number is 1 and the total number of split files is 5 the file will be shown as abc0105 The Scan to SharePoint window is shown again 8 Press L of the Content Type field The Content Type window appears 351 6 8 Saving the Scanned Data to a SharePoint Folder 9 Select a content type used to manage the scanned data on the SharePoint server and press the OK button Content Type a Document Picture Cancel The selected content type is set According to the selected content type a list of properties defined on the SharePoint server is shown in the Scan to SharePoint window 352 10 Set properties in either of the following ways Enter properties directly in the input fields that correspond to the properties to be edited Press for a property to be edited and set the property in the Edit Properties window Edit Properties y s ES Title Date Modified The following properties cannot be set via the Edit Properties window Description Categories Date Picture Taken If properties that cannot be set on the Edit Properties window are required when saving to a SharePoint folder the file will be saved in a checked out state The checked out state can be released once the mandatory fields have been set Checked out
303. n the condition of documents When the following types of documents are used scanner parts must be cleaned more frequently than indicated above Coated paper Documents with large areas of printing Specially treated paper such as carbonless paper Paper containing large amounts of calcium carbonate filler Documents written in pencil Documents with insufficiently fused toner 418 7 2 Cleaning the Exterior of the Scanner M Cleaning Parts Other Than the LCD Touch Panel Parts other than the LCD touch panel such as the exterior the ADF paper chute and the stacker must be cleaned using a dry cloth or a cloth slightly moistened with Cleaner F1 or a mild detergent Cleaning Wipes can also be used Never use paint thinner or other organic solvents Make sure that water does not get inside the scanner when cleaning When a large amount of Cleaner F1 is used it may take some time until it is dry Use an appropriate amount to moisten the cloths Also wipe off any extra cleaner from the part by using a dry cloth Mild detergent or Cleaner F1 mM Cleaning the LCD Touch Panel To prevent the LCD touch panel screen from becoming dirty it should be regularly cleaned with a soft dry cloth Take care when cleaning the LCD touch panel It can be easily damaged and should never be scratched or banged with hard objects Always use a dry not damp cloth to clean the screen If dust is allowed to collect and compact arou
304. nd binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the Politecnico di Torino CACE Technologies nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes software developed by the University of C
305. nd press the OK button The Windows XP compatible driver is installed 160 E Setting the Printer Properties Use the following procedures to set a printer 1 From the Start menu on the print server select Control Panel gt Printers and Faxes gt The Printers and Faxes window appears 2 Right click on a printer and select Properties gt Printer properties appear 3 Press the Printing Defaults button on the Advanced tab 2x Color Management Security Device Settings General Sharing s Bh ab Available from 1200 AM Driver Fujitsu New Driver Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster Start printing after last page is spooled Start printing immediately Print directly to the printer I Hold mismatched documents TA Print spooled documents first I Keep printed documents Enable advanced printing features Printing Defaults Print Processor Separator Page gt The printing defaults window is displayed 4 Change the settings and press the OK button xi Layout Paper Qualty Orientation Landscape p Page Order Front to Back Back to Front Pages Per Sheet 1 X Advanced Coa gt The printer properties are set 161 4 13 Setting the Network Printers It is recommended that the same printer be added to the print server multiple times for each instance of property sett
306. nd the frame of the screen it can cause the LCD touch panel to malfunction 419 7 3 7 3 Cleaning Inside the Scanner Cleaning Inside the Scanner Clean the interior of the scanner with a cloth slightly moistened with Cleaner F1 or the Cleaning Wipe As scanning is repeated paper powder and dust may accumulate inside the scanner possibly causing scanning to malfunction The interior of the scanner should be cleaned after approximately every 1 000 scanned sheets However this criteria varies according to the type of documents scanned For example it may be necessary to clean the scanner more frequently when documents with insufficiently fused toner are scanned The glass scanner windows inside the ADF can become hot when the A CAUTION scanner is used Before cleaning inside the scanner or replacing any parts turn off the power unplug the AC adapter from the AC outlet and wait for at least 15 minutes When you perform cleaning make sure that the inside of the scanner is free of any foreign object and be careful not to get your hand or the cloth caught on the pick spring metal part as a deformed pick spring metal part may cause injury Do not use water or a mild detergent when cleaning the interior of the scanner When a large amount of Cleaner F1 is used it may take some time until it is dry Use an appropriate amount to moisten the cloths Also wipe off any extra cleaner from the part by using a dry cl
307. ndow The selected level is displayed to the right of the Brightness button 383 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 13 Contrast The color contrast setting can be adjusted to improve the visual appearance of the scanned data 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Quality tab 2 Press the Contrast button gt The Contrast window appears 3 Select a contrast level Contrast Set the contrast level Le e EEE vse Lon Low 1 1 Ew This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected level is displayed to the right of the Contrast button 384 6 9 14 Sharpness The sharpness setting adjusts the sharpness of characters on an image to improve the visual appearance of the scanned data When using the sharpness setting the sharpness level can be adjusted with this setting 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Quality tab 2 Press the Sharpness button gt The Sharpness window appears 3 If the sharpness setting is to be used select a sharpness level Sharpness Set the sharpness level Medium Medium Weak Strong a Ba meee This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected level is displayed to the right of the Sharpness button 385 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 15 Dropout Color The colors red green and blue primary colors can be deleted during scanning For example if a document
308. ndow appears 2 Select the check box for the job group to be edited 3 Press the Edit button The Settings For Selected Group s area becomes active 4 Change the detailed job group settings 5 Press the OK button The details of the job group are changed E Deleting a Job Group This section describes how to delete a job group 1 Press the Job Groups button The Job Groups List window appears 2 Select the job group to be deleted 3 Press the Delete button The confirmation window appears 4 Press the OK button The job group is deleted 220 E Viewing the Detailed Settings for a Job Group This section describes how to view the detailed settings for a job group 1 Press the Job Groups button The Job Groups List window appears 2 Select the job group to view The details for the selected job group appear in view mode in the Settings For Selected Group s area The information for the selected job group shown in view mode in the Settings For Selected Group s area cannot be edited To edit this information select a job group and press the Edit button E Assigning Job Menus to Users Not Included in a Job Group Users who are not included in any job group automatically belong to a Default Group This section describes how to assign job menus to those users 1 Select the Job Groups tab The Job Groups List window appears Job Sequences Job Menus Job Gro
309. ned in the following order A002 pdf A004 pdf A005 pdf A006 pdf 5 For Date Format select a date format 6 For Delimiter select a delimiter 7 Press the Preview button The specified file name format is displayed to the right of the Preview button 8 Check the file name format 9 Press the OK button The file name format is set 158 4 13 Setting the Network Printers 2 faminto CHR Set a printer connected to the network The procedure for setting a network printer is as follows 1 Check the printer driver For details refer to Checking the Printer Drivers page 160 2 Set the printer properties For details refer to Setting the Printer Properties page 161 3 Register the network printer Up to 100 network printers can be registered A network printer can be registered in the following ways Network Tree Select a network printer from the network tree For details refer to Registering a Network Printer Network Tree page 164 Network Path Directly enter the network printer path name For details refer to Registering a Network Printer Network Path page 167 Read the printer manual beforehand for information about setting a printer adding a network printer and other cautions Make sure that there is enough space in the drive before printing Do not set a virtual printer Ifa printer connected to different print servers is to be registered as a network
310. ness to Light to avoid image bleed through To prevent the rollers from becoming dirty avoid scanning documents containing large areas written or filled in with pencil If scanning of such documents is unavoidable clean the rollers frequently For details about cleaning the pad assy and pick roller refer to Chapter 7 Scanner Care page 416 To operate correctly the leading edges of all document sheets must be evenly aligned The curling of the leading edge must be within the following tolerances More than 30 mm Feed direction lt lt Less than 3 mm Leading edge Side being of document scanned More than 30 mm Feed direction _ Less than 5 mm Leading edge Side being of document scanned 475 A 3 Maximum Document Loading Capacity The maximum number of sheets that can be loaded into the ADF paper chute is determined by the length and weight of the document paper The following graph shows the maximum document loading capacity of ADF according to paper size and weight Ad Letter or smaller Legal 60 950 D L 2 40 gt oO 2 30 Oo 20 0 52 64 80 104 127 Paper weight g m Unit Standard paper weights g m2 52 64 75 80 90 104 127 Ib 14 17 20 21 24 28 34 kg 45 55 64 5 69 77 5 90 110 476 A 4 Area not to be Perforated ADF feed problems can occur while scanning if the document has any holes punched etc in the s
311. ng a Fax Number from the Fax Number List When sending a fax instead of directly entering a fax number with keyboard fax numbers may be selected from a fax number list To enter a fax number using the fax number list refer to Step 2 of 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax page 324 1 On the Send Fax window press Le The Fax Number List window appears Fax Number List E Search Target Search Position Head abc Cancel 2 Press a search parameter button either the Recipient or Fax No button to select a search item 3 In Search Target enter a search string 4 Press L in Search Position The Search Position window appears 327 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax 5 Select a search position setting Search Position Select a search method Head Anywhere Tail abc abc abc If Anywhere or Tail is selected searching takes a long time The window returns to the Fax Number List The selected position is displayed to the right of the Search Position button 6 Press e The search results are displayed on the right side Five results are displayed at a time Fax Number List En Es ES Search Target Search Position N Head abc ccc P Cancel 7 Select a fax number 8 Press the OK button The fax number is added to the field in the Send Fax window Only one fax number can be entered at a time 328
312. ngs Set the desired scan options such as Carrier Sheet Color Mode and Paper Size For details about setting values refer to 6 9 Setting the Scan Options page 356 A Scan Settings PDF TIFF MTIFF JPEG File Format Fax uses the TIFF setting Print uses the JPEG setting Searchable PDF No Yes Marker Index No X Text Recognition Text Recognition Language Save Englist Text Recognition for Pages First Page No Yes 3 PDF Password Require PDF Password Compression Medium oa Carrier Sheet Off OAR B4 11 x 17 Color Mode Auto RGB Color Grayscale Black amp White Fax uses the Black amp White setting Auto X Custom Paper Size Basic Paper Size Resolution 200dpi X Scan Mode Simplex Duplex Ponen REE Face down Face up Brightness Medium X Contrast Medium M Quality Sharpness None Dropout Color None Background Removal Medium Blank Page Skip Off Auto Auto Page Orientation Print uses the Off setting Advanced Multifeed Setu None Ultrasonic 2 Length Both Off On Edge Cropping Width Edge Cropping z Pp 6 Seta job item For Job Items select one of following items e Mail Fax Print Save Job Items A 1 eMail _ Delete This item _ Insert New Item A Up to ten items can be set 203 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence 7 If e Mail is selected for the job item in Step 6 perform settings related to sending e
313. nned Data E Registering a Network Folder Network Tree 1 Select Network Settings gt Network Folder gt Network Folder gt The Network Folder window appears Network Settings gt Network Folder Network Folder Setup the network folders Network Folder List Network Folder File Names Save Previous 2 Press the Add button The window for selecting a network folder appears Desired domains may not be shown in the Network Folders In this case Q directly enter the path alias for the file server or wait for a few minutes and re open the window for adding a network folder 144 E 3 Select a domain mmj Network Settings gt Network Folder Network Folder Network Folder File Names Save Cancel Network Path The network tree expands and the subordinate computer names are displayed If an authentication window is displayed enter a user name and password If authentication is successful the subordinate computer names are displayed 4 Select a computer m The network tree expands and the subordinate network folder names are displayed If an authentication window is displayed enter a user name and password If authentication is successful the subordinate network folder names are displayed 5 Select a network folder Fol The selected folder will be opened to show any sub folders which themselves may be selected in turn up to seven levels
314. nned data is elongated page 463 Shadow on the leading edge of the scanned data page 463 Vertical line on the scanned data page 463 Scanned data appears skewed or distorted page 463 Quality of scanned data is poor page 464 Scanned data is partially cut off page 464 Scanned data is skewed page 464 Cannot login Cannot login with administrator password page 464 The Login window is not displayed when connecting via the network page 465 Operation does not work Input field entry entered via the on screen keyboard does not appear on the window page 465 Saving is not possible after pressing Save on the File Download dialog box page 465 Status window stops at Printing scan data on page 465 An error occurs when installing an Admin Tool page 466 459 8 3 Other Troubleshooting E Scanner Cannot Be Turned On Scanner cannot be turned on E Check item Has the power button been pressed E Action Press the power button E Check item Are the AC cable and AC adapter properly connected to the scanner E Action Connect the AC cable and the AC adapter Disconnect AC cable from the scanner to turn off the scanner and connect the cable again After turning the power off wait for at least 10 seconds before turning the power back on again If the problem persists even after taking the above mentioned actions contact your FUJITSU sc
315. not be saved such as a SharePoint library Slide Library type Do not set a server site and folder URL path that exceeds 184 characters When a folder is added to Scan to SharePoint Folders list if the specified folder name already exists in the list a parenthesized sequence number starting from 2 will be appended to the folder name E Renaming a SharePoint Folder Display Name 1 Select Network Settings gt SharePoint Folder gt SharePoint Folder The SharePoint Folder window appears 2 From the Scan to SharePoint Folders list select the SharePoint folder that is to be renamed 3 Press the Edit button The Scan to SharePoint folder details window appears 154 4 Enter the name that is to be shown for the selected SharePoint folder Scan to SharePoint folder details Display Name Documents Folder Hierarchy SharePoint Folder Cancel 5 Press the OK button gt The SharePoint folder is renamed mM Removing a SharePoint Folder 1 Select Network Settings gt SharePoint Folder gt SharePoint Folder gt The SharePoint Folder window appears 2 From the Scan to SharePoint Folders list select the folder that is to be removed 3 Press the Remove button gt A confirm removal window appears for the selected folder 4 Check that the correct folder is being removed then press the Yes button gt The selected folder is removed 1
316. nt e mail has been opened 5 For Character Encoding select a character encoding for e mails 6 Press the OK button The settings for sending e mail are set 139 4 10 Configuring the e Mail Related Settings 4 10 3 Setting a File Name Format for When Attaching Scanned Data to e Mail gl ena ED Set a file name format for when attaching scanned data to an e mail The File Name entered on the Send e Mail window is displayed as the default value for this setting The following file names cannot be used CON PRN AUX CLOCK NUL COMO to COM9 LPTO to LPT9 The following symbols cannot be used for a file name 2 lt gt 1 Select Network Settings gt e Mail gt File Names e Mail The File Names e Mail window appears Network Settings gt e Mail e Mail V Specify the file name format used when attaching scan data to e mails Scanner Name MMddyyyyhh File Name Format 1 Prefix Ea oor SMTP Server Send e Mail File Names e Mail Previous Cancel 140 2 Select a file name format When multiple file names are selected file names are created in the following order Prefix Scanner Name User Name Date Time The date format and delimiter are set according to the Date Format and Delimiter settings For example for prefix file scanner name Scanner user name user date 20101231 time 12 00 30 delimiter _ the file name is
317. ntName or userPrincipalName Login Name Regular User Login Possible Top sAMAccountName Bottom userPrincipleName User A userA OK userA example com OK User H userH NG userH sub example com OK The SAM Account Name is the Active Directory user login name sAMAccountName The User Principal Name is the Active Directory user login name userPrincipalName 132 4 9 2 Setting the e Mail LDAP Server Guat fmn CEHA If an e mail LDAP server is set the searches within the LDAP LIST on the e Mail Address Book window can be performed 1 Select Network Settings gt Authentication Server gt e Mail LDAP Server The e Mail LDAP Server window appears fi Network Settings gt Authentication Server Authentication Server W Login LDAP Server e Mail LDAP Server Customize LDAP Search Previous This server is used to search for e mail addresses Server Type Use Login LDAP i ss on z Address Port Number Search Base DN ces cn Users dc example dc com Search Timeout 1000 i LDAP Server Access Authorization Password eg cn root dc example dc com Anonymous user connection will be attempted if an Authorized User DN is not entered Maximum Results Cancel 2 For Server Type set the connection settings for the e mail LDAP server Select Use Login LDAP to reuse the user login LDAP server settings for e mail a
318. ntents of system settings backup files If changed the file may no longer be used as a backup Trying to restore from a changed user data store backup file may render the scanner inoperable 182 mM Restoring the System Settings dmintoo Restore the system settings The system settings can be restored in the following ways Return the system settings backup file to the same scanner Import the system settings backed up from another scanner to the current scanner 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Data Management gt System Settings File The System Settings File window appears 2 Select the backup file of the system settings to be restored Press the Browse button to select a file 3 Perform either of the following steps To return the system settings backup file to the same scanner select Restore in the same scanner To import the system settings backed up from another scanner to the current scanner select Import from another scanner 4 Press the Restore button A confirmation message appears 5 Press the Yes button The system settings are restored After the system settings are restored the scanner is restarted During system settings restoration do not press and hold down the power button for longer than 4 seconds It may cause the scanner to function abnormally The network interface connection will be lost when the scanner is restarted to complete the restoration of
319. ntral Admin Console Check the status of log collection 5 16 1 Collecting Audit Logs To automatically collect audit logs in the Central Admin Server enable the audit log collection in the Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window For details refer to 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 The audit logs are managed according to the date on which they are collected in the Central Admin Server Do not change the Central Admin Server date and time setting to a date that has already passed If the audit log is collected disk space for saving the audit log is required Refer to the following for estimates of the required disk space Under the following conditions one log per day requires 25 KB Power on off once Login Logout 20 times Number of scan operations 100 times 277 5 16 Collecting and Exporting Audit Logs 5 16 2 Exporting Audit Logs To export audit logs collected in the Central Admin Server execute AmExportLog exe in the command prompt on the computer installed with the Central Admin Server software Command storage location Under the AmManager Bin folder in the installation folder of the Central Admin Server software Command executable format AmExportLog d OutputFolder v The italic text represents variable character strings To show the status of the process specify v An AuditLogs folder is created in the specified output folder In this Audi
320. ntral Admin Console are as follows format by using the export function Edit Scanner Configuration Settings for the configuration of scanners can be added edited and deleted in the Central Admin Console Files can also be imported or exported in CSV format Network Scanner Admin Tool Start An Admin Tool of a specified scanner can be started up from the Central Admin Console Function Used to See Scanner View information for each scanner in 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration the Central Admin Console Also you Configuration page Management can export the information in CSV 251 Software Update Update modules for scanner system security installed options Add ins can be pre defined in the Central Admin Server and applied to multiple scanners Update Call Pre defined system update modules and Add ins can be applied to multiple scanners at once Scanner Notification Schedule A time zone for an update can be specified 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration page 251 5 8 Monitoring and Maintaining the Scanner Network page 260 5 9 Updating the System page 261 5 10 Installing an Add in page 263 5 13 Viewing the Update Status Lists page 272 227 5 1 Function List Function Used to See Scanner Settings Update Create scanner settings in the Central Admin Serve
321. o User settings for all groups 8 Press the Edit button The Group Member Settings window appears Job Sequences Job Menus Joy Groups Group Member Settings Member Name Format User Principal Name SAM Account Name Search Base LDAP 1110 234 165 42 Group Membership List Member Search LDAP Local Account lt Job Group Name gt Filter Conditions JobGroup1 Head abc Filter Conditions Find Member Name Details User Principal Name ISAM Account Name First Name L Last Name Find E Common Name El Display Name Ge Member Name Details Ba Member Name Details ls OK If Cancel _ 9 For Member Name Format select the member name format The Member Name of the Group Membership List or Member Search is shown according to the selected format 10 Enter the LDAP server and character string to be used for LDAP searches in the Search Base field 11 In the Member Name list of Member Search select the check box of a user name Active Directory group or local account to be added to a job group To view detailed information about a user Active Directory group or local M account select the Member Name or Details link The detailed information can be viewed on the Member Details window To filter the LDAP List refer to Filtering the LDAP List page 223 for more details 218 12 Press the lt lt lt button The use
322. ocal Accounts 506 E Loading from a Scanner eee eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 506 E Loading from a File eee ee eeee cece eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 507 E File Format of Mail Address Book Loaded from a File 508 E File Format of Local Accounts Loaded from a File 509 Editing an e Mail Target in the Mail Address Book 510 E 7 1 Setting a Group x ccxu2dear teeta ia eee oie dee oe ee ee 510 EAdding A Groupi om eee eee an esee ence agueneucevtanes Eaa n 510 E Changing the Group Name eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 511 E Deleting a Group veces cctesescneeie re erteecnectipeetesencenecarerieees 511 E 7 2 Setting DISIIDULIOMIEISE x6 ccdeucel uss ce ead able ecedeepepebcdeescd ies 512 E Adding a Distribution List 1 0 0 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 512 E Editing a Distribution List eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 513 E Deleting a Distribution List ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 513 E 7 3 Setting an e Mail Address c cc cccceceseceeeeeeeeeseesenenceceees 514 E Adding an e Mail Address eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 514 E Editing an e Mail Address eeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 515 E Deleting an e Mail Address 000 eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 515 Editing Local Accounts cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 516 E 8 1 Adding a Local Account wz sciiscccscecsics be rencteten eterna eek 516 E 8 2 Editing a Lo
323. on it is still recommended that the old settings be backed up before proceeding with the upgrade installation To back up the Central Admin settings refer to 5 17 1 Backing Up Central Admin Server Settings page 281 If the Central Admin Server is already installed skip to 5 4 2 Installing the Central Make sure that the Central Admin Server date and time values are set correctly If the date time difference between the values set in the server and actual values is large normal operation may not be possible After the Central Admin Server software is installed a Windows user account Account name iSCentralAdmin is added This user is required for Central Admin Server therefore do not change or delete the account 234 For details about the operating environment required for installing the Central Admin Server software refer to 1 4 3 Requirements for Central Admin Server page 48 When installing the Central Admin Server software the same necessary pre settings before logging in with the Admin Tool are required For details refer to 4 2 2 Setting up for Administrator Access via the Admin Tool page 80 To install the Central Admin Server software on Windows Server 2008 login as an administrator Do not install with Administrators group rights If the following error message appears installation was not successful An installation package for the product Microsoft SQL Server Native Client cannot be found Try the inst
324. on Language English ez Text Recognition for Pages First Page All Pages a Searchable PDF can take a long time es and Pages may not be used with 600dpi resoli Cancel 371 6 9 Setting the Scan Options For Text Recognition Language select a language used when text is to be recognized in the document Under Text Recognition for Pages specify the pages to be output in searchable PDF Press the OK button This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected setting is displayed to the right of the Text Recognition button 372 6 9 9 Setting a Keyword for the PDF A character string such as the title of a black and white document can be used as a keyword for the created PDF file The keyword is useful when searching the PDF file Mark a character string to be set as a keyword with a water based highlight pen so that the character string is completely covered When you perform a scan the marked character strings are recognized and set as keywords for the PDF file Hereinafter a line drawn with a water based highlight pen is referred to as a marked section and a water based highlight pen as a highlight pen Searchable PDF File The text is set as a x keyword for the PDF file x gt ScanSnap Xx The highlighted character Scanned data string is recognized as text The file is searchable since the keyword has been set Marked sections should
325. on List xccccceatcetecrerenet sss ee cece tae 227 5 2 Central Admin Console Window ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 230 5 3 Central Admin Console Quick Guide ceceeeeees 231 5 4 Pre settings for Using Central Admin Console 233 5 4 1 Installing the Central Admin Server Software 005 233 E Importing the Certificate cc c cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeete 237 5 4 2 Installing the Central Admin Console n 238 5 4 3 Setting up a Firewall for the Central Admin Server 240 5 4 4 Configuring the Scanner Settings for Central Admin Management vecdcccczspltaibatenanrutsasyedaavainr aucaiadecdcoticeeaeeseat etads 240 5 4 5 Uninstalling the Central Admin Server Software Central FRONT Cs OBS ONS eese ee i eee ieee eara a ee mn Sots saees aeeaiei 241 E Uninstalling the Central Admin Server Software 241 E Uninstalling the Central Admin Console eeee 241 5 5 Central Admin Server Login via the Central Admin Console iiie as aaaea ERE a eaii 242 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server cccccssseeseseees 245 E Setting the Operating Environment 0 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeees 245 E Changing the Admin Password eseccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 248 E Clearing the User Roaming Data n 250 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration c csssceeeeeeeeeeeeees 251 E Importing Scanner Configuration 2 0 0 0 cceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 254 E Exporting Scanner Con
326. on the Security Alert window The Login window appears 2 Enter the user name and password of the administrator ___ Getting Started Operator s Guide User Name Password 3 Press the Login button The download window appears 82 4 Press the Next button for the Network Scanner Admin Tool download Network Scanner Admin Tool Next Network Scanner User Editor Next Scanner Central Admin Server Next Scanner Central Admin Console Next Screenshot Logout The Network Scanner Admin Tool download window appears 5 Press the Download button Download Network Scanner Admin Tool Version 1 The Network Scanner Admin Tool requires OS Windows R XP SP3 or later Windows Vista R SP1 or later Windows R 7 Windows Server R 2003 SP2 or later Windows Server R 2008 Microsoft R NET Framework 2 0 SP2 or later Microsoft R NET Framework 3 0 SP2 or later or Microsoft R NET Framework 3 5 SP1 or later Memory 32MB or more Disk space 64MB or more Attention NET Framework is required for use of this tool therefore confirm that it has been installed If not already installed a message will appear telling you to install NET Framework from the Microsoft Web site When installing NET Framework at least 280MB of additional free disk space is required Logout D Downloading is not possible while a scanner operation is in p
327. onger length than legal size If a paper size other than Auto is selected and only one side of the documents is scanned artwork on the reverse side of the paper may bleed through onto the front side scan If this happens blank pages may not be recognized as such and thus may not be skipped by the Skip Blank Page function For more details refer to 6 9 17 Blank Page Skip page 388 When the Custom button is selected any paper size for the scanned data can be specified on the Custom window If the paper height is 355 6 mm 14 in or longer the paper size setting must be set to allow long pages For details refer to Long Page Mode page 365 364 E Long Page Mode When scanning pages which are longer than standard documents the Allow long pages setting must be specified 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Basic tab 2 Press the Paper Size button gt The Paper Size window appears 3 Press the Custom button The Custom Paper Size window appears 4 For Unit select a paper size unit 5 For Allow long pages select Yes Custom Paper Size fad a A Unit Allow long pages Width e 2 00 8 50 O Height 2 91 14 00 Long Page paper size is incompatible with the Auto color Cancel 6 Enter a paper size 7 Press the OK button Pressing the OK button on the confirmation window returns you to the Scan Settings window Custom is displayed to the right of th
328. ons You can also set whether to receive an e mail notification if a new update is released To use the proxy server to check for released updates set the HTTP proxy server as v necessary For details about settings refer to 4 8 5 Setting the Proxy Server page 118 mM Checking for New Updates Manually 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt System Update gt The System Update window appears Update the scanner s embedded system System Version Current System Version gt Was Updated On 09 16 Run Update Select a system update file to upload Upload Browse Check for Updates Check for Updates Check for updates at scanner startup C 2 Press the Check for Updates button Checking for new updates is performed When a necessary update is available a message is displayed Apply the update as necessary 187 4 16 Maintaining the System mM Checking for Updates at Scanner Startup You can set the function for automatically checking for updates each time the scanner is started 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt System Update The System Update window appears 2 Select the Check for updates at scanner startup check box mM Requesting e Mail Notification When a New Update is Available The administrator can set to receive an e mail notification if a new update is released 1 Select Monitoring amp M
329. or power off status For details refer to Using the Power Button page 59 Scan button Starts the scan process For details refer to Using the Top Cover Scan Button page 61 LCD touch panel Accepts user input and displays the scanner control windows The LCD touch panel buttons are used to setup scans For details refer to 2 3 Using the LCD Touch Panel page 62 34 Part Name Function Top cover Frames the LCD touch panel and covers the upper scanner ADF mechanism Must be opened to clean inside the scanner or when replacing consumable parts Stacker Open before scanning Scanned documents are ejected on the stacker E Rear View Ventilation ports oo000 ooo000 00000 00000 0000 LAN connector Power connector Security cable slot Part Name Ventilation ports Function Lets out the heated air from the inside of the scanner to the outside Power connector Connects the scanner to the AC adapter LAN connector Connects the scanner to the network Security cable slot Slot for commercially available security cable to prevent against theft The following security cable is recommended Cylindrical part diameter 25 mm max length 50 mm max Type Right angle includes bent part if a straight cable is used
330. ord has been lost or forgotten contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider 1 Select System Settings gt Login Settings gt Admin Password gt The Admin Password window appears System Settings gt Login Settings Login Settings Y Change the administrator password Current password po New password Login Settings Standby Mode Admin Password Confirm New Password pO If the password is lost you will not be able to login Keep a record of the new password in a safe location Previous 2 Enter the current password and a new password 3 Press the OK button gt The new admin password is set 112 4 8 Configuring the Network Settings 4 8 1 Giving the Scanner an IP Address Such faminto An IP address must be set in order to connect the scanner to a network 1 Select Network Settings gt Basic gt IP Address The DHCP or IP address setting window appears fi Network Settings gt Basic Enter the network addresses DHCP cer ole Previous Cancel OK E og E E oe 2 Select whether or not a DHCP is used 3 When Off is selected enter the following numerical addresses P Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway 4 Press the OK button gt The information entered is set 113 4 8 Configuring the Network Settings Ifthe IP address is the same as one already in use network comm
331. ore removing a network printer check that the network is functioning normally E Viewing the Printer Details 1 Select Network Settings gt Print gt Network Printer The Network Printer window appears 2 Select the desired network printer from the printer list 3 Press the Details button The information for the selected network printer is displayed Network Settings gt Print Printer details Network Printer Printer Alias Printer01 A4 color Network Path 169 4 14 Viewing the Scanner Details 4 14 Viewing the Scanner Details 4 14 1 Viewing the System Status 1 amp 2 mintoa CEN 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt System Status The system status information is displayed Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details Status Details h System Status Usage Status Installed Options System Log Previous Check the scanner s system information Status System Version Scanner Version Initial Use 06 15 Cumulative On Time 00000168 hours ABBYY TM FineReader TM 7 X 8 X 9 X Engine C ABBYY 2009 OCR by ABBYY All rights reserved ABBYY FineReader are trademarks of ABBYY Adobe Adobe PDF Scan Technology and the Adobe PDF Signature are either registered trademarks or tradenames of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries 170 4 14 2 Viewing the Usage Status RSP mintoa
332. orm settings related to sending a fax For details about setting values refer to 6 5 Sending the Scanned Data by Fax page 324 42 Fax M Delete This item _ Insert New Item Fax Settings Recipient Fax No e Mail address of user Fixed e mail address Notification To Sender s e Mail Address SMTP Authentication Press the Browse button to set a different e mail address from the LDAP WA List window Job Sayuenses LDAP List User Name FirstName LastName v Search Base LDAP Filter Conditions Search Position Head abc User Name e Mail Address Find First Name ELast Name E Common Name Display Name To filter the LDAP List refer to Filtering the LDAP List page 209 for more details If Print is selected for the job item in Step 6 perform settings related to printing For details about setting values refer to 6 6 Printing the Scanned Data page 333 4 3 Prit Delete This Item Insert New Item Print Settings k Printer Alias Network Peer Network Path 5 __ __ User Name Print Server Authentication Password No of Copies 1 Scaling D Shrink to Fit 100 Positioning Center D Top Left Print Side Simplex Single sided Duplex Long Edge gt Duplex Short Edge window A Press the Browse button to set the network printer from the Printer List 205 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence
333. oth 1 Turn off the scanner power and wait for at least 15 minutes For details about turning off the power refer to 2 1 Turning the Power On Off page 57 2 Pull the top cover release catch toward you and open the top cover Top cover release catch 420 Be careful that the top cover does not shut on your fingers 3 Clean the following parts with a soft cloth slightly moistened with Cleaner F1 or with the Clean ing Wipe Ultrasonic sensor Also on the ADF paper chute Pad assy PAD ASSY f Pick spring metal WH Gray part 1 ILLAN A lt 1 ae 7 SSSA Eject rollers x 2 Idler rollers x 4 Ui 4 fA Feed rollers i 7 TI p H Gl Pick roller Glass x 2 Also on the top cover Pad assy x 1 Wipe the pad assy downwards When cleaning the pad assy be careful not to get your hand or the cloth caught on the pick spring metal part Ultrasonic sensors x 2 Clean lightly with a soft cloth to wipe their surfaces clean Idler rollers x 4 Gently rotate the idler rollers by hand as you wipe them clean Take care not to damage the soft rubber The idle rollers should be cleaned carefully and thoroughly as dirty idle rollers can adversely affect the paper pickup performance 421 7 3 Cleaning Inside the Scanner Glass x 2 Clean lightly with a soft cloth to wipe their surfaces clean A A vertical black line on the sc
334. oting 8 2 3 Failure to Access the Scanner using a Web Browser Admin Tool or Central Admin Server If access is not possible when attempting to connect to the scanner using a Web browser or the Admin Tool or when attempting to connect to the Central Admin Server from the Central Admin Console try the following steps Same as in Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address page 451 E Action Check if a network connection is possible by trying the same solution for Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address page 451 The DNS server or WINS server is not functioning normally or the scanner name has not been registered in the DNS or WINS server E Action Check the connectivity of the specified IP address If it is possible to connect the scanner using the Admin Tool with a specified IP address specify the scanner s IP address in the DNS or WINS server Check the DNS or WINS server settings using the Admin Tool or Web browser A misconfigured firewall between the computer installed with the Admin Tool or Web browser and the scanner is denying access E Action If there is a firewall between the computer installed with the Admin Tool or Web browser and the scanner check that its settings are not preventing access The URL of the target scanner is not registered as a trusted site E Action Set the scanner URL as a trusted site for Internet Explorer 1 In Internet Explorer set the following settings in the
335. ow press the Print button The scanned data is sent to the print server and printed The document name for the scanned data to be printed is the name of the scanner ti Printing scan data on PrinterO1 The printing status is displayed in the user log until printing has finished The network printer printing result is not displayed For more details about the user log refer to 6 12 Checking the User Log page 402 If the printing fails an error message e mail with the following title is sent from the scanner to the currently logged in user s e mail address registered in the LDAP server Network Scanner XXXxX Error 336 6 6 1 Scaling Set the print size for the scanned data The setting selected here will be used every time the user prints a document 1 On the Print window press the Scaling button gt The Scaling window appears 2 Select the print scale of the scanned data Set the print scaling If Shrink to Fit is selected the scanned data is reduced to fit the printable area of the paper If the scanned data is smaller than the printable area it is printed at 100 If 100 is selected the scanned data is printed at 100 If the scanned data is larger than the printable area only part of it will be printed fer Printing results will vary as shown below depending on the positioning setting For more details on the positioning setting refer to 6 6 2 Positioning page 34
336. ows User name admin Password password Session timeout time is 20 minutes fixed Selecting links and buttons extends the session timeout time by 20 minutes However the session timeout time is extended automatically when the Scanner Admin Operations window or Scanner Operation Monitor window of the Central Admin Console is shown so as not to result in a session timeout 1 Select the Start menu gt All Programs gt Scanner Central Admin Server gt Scanner Central Admin Console The Central Admin Console starts 2 Set the Connect to field OM Scanner Central Admin Console olowa A Ext Disconnect Q About Connect to Specify the IP address host name or FQDN of the target server Port Number Use HTTPS 242 If the port number was changed in 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245 enter the port number changed for Port Number To use SSL select the Use HTTPS check box If Central Admin Console is started while there is insufficient free memory a script error may occur Try again after ensuring that there is enough free memory For Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008 when first connecting to the Central Admin Server a confirmation window for whether or not to add the specified URL to the trusted site zone may appear In this case after adding the Central Admin Server URL as a trusted site close the Central Admin Console once and re open 3 Press the
337. p DNS clients who are permi Designated administrators All workstations and serve All domain controllers in th All domain quests All domain users Designated administrators Members in this group can Built in account for guest Group for the Help and Su Servers in this group can Designated administrators This is a vendor s account Example 2 When searching for user C user D user E OU department DC example DC com Active Directory configuration is as follows 4 Active Directory Users and Computers EA File Action View Window Help 121d e Ams exen ee evar ee 73 Active Directory Users and Computer department 2 objects Saved Queries Organizational Organizational section B 3 section A Ea D Domain Controllers E ForeignSecurityPrincipals Users 130 Example 3 When searching for user C user D OU section A OU department DC example DC com Active Directory configuration is as follows Active Directory Users and Computers File Action View Window Help e Am se xr nR e 2favege n Domain Controllers ForeignSecurityPrincipals Users Example 4 When searching for all users no Search Base DN setting or DC example DC com amp Active Directory Users and Computers lt File Action view Windo
338. pages can be scanned in place of skipped blank pages until the maximum number of scanned pages is reached When the scanning has completed the Scan Viewer window appears For details about editing on the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 If the Scan amp Send button is selected when Scan Viewer is Off the scanned data is attached to an e mail and sent immediately after the scanning is completed and the LCD touch panel screen returns to the Main Menu For details refer to 6 10 Enabling Disabling the Scan Viewer page 395 10 Check the scanned data For more details about the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 11 On the Scan Viewer window press the Send button If the SMTP Authentication window appears enter authentication information needed to access the SMTP server and press the OK button SMTP Authentication A a a User Name Password Cancel The scanned data in the specified file format is sent as an e mail attachment If Split Mails is set to On split e mails will be sent If the number of e mail recipients exceeds the specified maximum number a warning message appears 311 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail ms Mailing scan data to abc example com The Main Menu window is shown again The following item
339. pecification ADF Automatic Document Feeder Remarks Image sensor Color CCD x 2 Light source White cold cathode fluorescent discharge lamp x 2 One for front side and the other for reverse side Scannable area Maximum Legal 8 5 x 14 in When Custom paper Minimum A8 portrait 52 x 74 mm size Seting is useda or 2x3 in page length of up to 3 048 mm 120 in is allowed for document scanning Paper weight 0 06 to 0 15 mm 52 to 127 g m 14 to 34 Ib 45 to 110 kg ream Scan speed Black amp White Simplex 20 sheets min 200 dpi Ad Letter Grayscale Duplex 40 pages min Portrait 1 Color ADF paper chute capacity 50 sheets Letter A4 80 g m 20 Ib Optical resolution Output resolution 600 dpi 150 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 600 dpi 4 time such as data transfer time 494 The maximum hardware limitation Actual scanning time includes software processing D 3 Changing the Functions on the On Screen Keyboard The scanner supports the on screen keyboard that enables entering characters on the LCD touch panel For details on how to show hide the on screen keyboard refer to 2 4 Using the On Screen Keyboard page 63 D 3 1 Switching the Keyboard Layout There are two types of keyboard layouts on the on screen keyboard alphabetic layout and numeric and symbols layout The keyboard layout can be switched in the following ways
340. r The Save to Scanner dialog box appears 3 Enter the information to connect to the scanner Save to Scanner Connect to Port Number 80 Use HTTPS User Name Password Cancel Enter the scanner IP address host name or FQDN for Connect to To enter an IP address use the xxx xxx xxx xxx format where xxx is a value from 0 to 255 Fora host name or FQDN up to 255 characters can be entered For Port Number enter the number of the port to be used for communication with the scanner within the range of 1 to 65535 The default value is 80 Select the Use HTTPS check box to use HTTPS for communication from the scanner For User Name enter the name of the user to login to the scanner For Password enter the password for the user to login to the scanner Connect as a user that can login to the scanner M To edit a mail address book login as a regular user To edit local accounts login as an administrator 4 Press the Save button Mail address books or local accounts are saved in the scanner 519 E Saving the Edited Information to a File Save the edited mail address book or local accounts to a file in CSV format f Select Address Book tab to save mail address books Select Local Account tab to save local accounts Perform either of the following Select the File menu and then select Save to File Press the Save to File button on the toolbar
341. r Executive size A standard international paper size 184 2 x 266 7 mm approximately 7 25 x 10 5 in Feed roller Rollers that feed documents through the ADF Idler roller Rollers that feed documents through the ADF Interface The connection that allows communication from the computer to the scanner Landscape orientation A document with its long side horizontal and its short side vertical See also Portrait orientation LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol A protocol for accessing a directory database over a TCP IP network 530 Legal size A standard international paper size 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 in Letter size A standard North American paper size 215 9 x 279 4 mm 8 5 x11 in MMR ITU T CCITT T 6 compression A compression method used when the color mode is black and white Multifeed detection A scanner function which detects accidental feeding of multiple sheets into the ADF Noise Isolated white black dots appearing on black white areas of an image Pad assy PAD ASSY A collection of rubber pads and metal leaf springs that is used to help separate a single document sheet from a batch in the ADF paper chute for feeding into the ADF Paper jam A warning that appears when a document sheet is jammed in the document feed path or document feeding is interrupted by a slipping sheet Pick roller Rollers that feed documents through the ADF Portrait orientation A document with
342. r Active Directory group or local account is added to the Group Membership List Up to 1 000 members can be added as job group members To delete a member added to the Group Membership List select the check box in the Member Name list and then press the gt gt gt button To filter job group members enter the Member Name and Details in part or in full and then press the Find button To clear filtered results delete the entered Member Name and Details and press the Find button If the login LDAP server type is changed all job group members of the old server type are automatically deleted the next time the group members are edited 13 Press the OK button The number of members registered as job group members is shown in Number of Members on the Settings For Selected Group s window 14 To include the guest account as a job group member select the Include guest account as a member check box 15 To include local accounts other than the guest account as job group members select the Include all local accounts as members check box 16 To include all LDAP users as job group members select the Include all LDAP users as members check box 17 Press the OK button A job group is added to the Job Groups List window 219 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence E Editing a Job Group This section describes how to edit a job group 1 Press the Job Groups button The Job Groups List wi
343. r and upload release them to multiple scanners The contents of the scanner settings can be changed per settings group Update Call Scanner settings can be applied to multiple scanners at once 5 8 Monitoring and Maintaining the Scanner Network page 260 5 11 Updating the Scanner Settings page 266 5 13 Viewing the Update Status Lists page 272 Automatic Update Automatically update scanner systems security installed options scanner settings and Add ins on the date specified on the scanner side Updates can be performed on a specified date as the scanner is automatically resumed for updates from standby mode when update calls or Wake On LAN cannot be used 4 8 9 Setting a Central Admin Server page 125 5 11 Updating the Scanner Settings page 266 Status Monitoring Monitor the error status operating status and consumable part status for each scanner Normalcy Monitoring Monitoring of scanner errors can be performed in the Central Admin Server Errors can be notified to the Central Admin Console or to the administrator by e mail Operating Status Monitoring The power status and login status of each scanner can be displayed in the Central Admin Console Consumables Monitoring When a consumable part needs to be replaced in the near future a notification can be displayed in the Central Admin Console 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server page 245
344. r Folder List FTP Server Folder File Names Save Previous 149 4 12 Setting Folders for Saving Scanned Data 2 Press the Add button The window for setting an FTP server folder appears Network Settings gt FTP Server Folder FTP Server Folder W Enter the FTP server settings Folder Alias FTP Server Folder FTP Path Port Number 1 65535 File Names ji Save User Name Password fe eere Protocol Passive Mode ef Encryption Proxy See the Proxy Server Menu Off Implicit Cancel 3 Enter a Folder Alias for the FTP server folder 4 Enter an FTP Path for the FTP server folder 5 Seta Port Number for the FTP server 6 In the User Name and Password input fields enter the authentication information for logging in to the FTP server 7 For Authentication specify whether or not to save the entered User Name and Password 8 For Protocol specify how to access the FTP server 9 For Passive Mode specify whether or not to access in passive mode For the Central Admin Console to use a Central Admin Server with an Q enabled firewall set the Passive Mode to On 10 For Encryption specify the type of encryption 11 For Proxy specify whether or not a proxy server is to be used The Proxy setting is only available when a proxy server has been set on the Proxy Server window For details about proxy server settings refer to 4 8 5 Setting the Proxy Server page
345. r User Editor S Welcome to the Network Scanner User Editor Setup Wizard AION E The installer will guide you through the steps required to install Network Scanner User Editor on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law gt The Select Installation Folder window appears 501 8 Select the target folder s and user s and press the Next button To select a different folder press the Browse button To check the free space available for the currently selected folder press the Disk Cost button Installation fails if the length of any installation path folder path plus installation file name exceeds 259 characters Select an installation folder that respects this limit J Network Scanner User Editor kala Select Installation Folder A x The installer will install Network Scanner User Editor to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder C Program Files FUJITSU Network Scanner User Editor Browse Disk Cost Install Network Scanner User Editor for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer Everyone Just me Cancel
346. r s LCD touch panel Setting mode The administrator can operate the LCD touch panel in the following setting modes Basic mode A setting mode for Administrators with basic knowledge of computers Basic required scanner settings can be performed Advanced mode A setting mode for Administrators with advanced knowledge of networks and servers Settings which are more advanced than those of Basic mode such as authentication server server environment or advanced scanning settings can be performed For details about the configuration of setting modes refer to 4 4 Setting the Setting Mode for the LCD Touch Panel page 92 In addition using the wizard on the LCD touch panel you can configure minimum settings required to setup the scanner You can also use the wizard to restrict the configurable functions For details about the configuration with the wizard refer to 4 3 Setting the System Settings with the Installation Wizard on the LCD Touch Panel page 90 Admin Tool Scanner settings management and updates can be implemented via the network interface by using the Admin Tool installed on a computer Settings can be performed for one scanner at a time Central Admin Console Scanner settings management and updates can be implemented via the network interface by using the Central Admin Console installed on a computer for multiple scanners together In this case settings made with the Central Admin Console are applied to scann
347. rch Parameters E amintoo CAE Set the LDAP search parameters LDAP search parameters are search conditions specified for the left and middle buttons displayed on the LDAP List in the e Mail Address Book window The buttons are for example the First Name and Last Name buttons on the following window e Mail Address Book LDAP List My List Search Target First Last e Mail O Name Name Address By pressing a search condition button the display order of the e mail addresses registered in the e mail address book can be changed according to the search condition specified for the button For details about the e Mail Address Book LDAP List tab refer to 6 4 1 Selecting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book page 313 1 Select Network Settings gt Authentication Server gt Customize LDAP Search gt The Customize LDAP Search window appears Network Settings gt Authentication Server Customize the LDAP List tab Left Buttom Item s to be searched First Name Last Name Common Name Display Name Authentication Server Login LDAP Server e Mail LDAP Server Customize LDAP Result Format Button Name Search FirstName 3 ineme Middle Button Item s to be searched First Name Last Name Common Name Display Name Result Format Button Name LastName ranam EA Previous 135 4 9 Configuring the LDAP Settings
348. rinter Previous 2 Press the Add button The window for selecting a network printer appears Some domains may not be shown in the window for selecting a network printer In this case directly enter the network printer path name or wait for a few minutes and re open the window for selecting a network printer 164 C 3 Select a domain mm Network Settings gt Print Network Printer Cancel Network Path The network tree expands and the subordinate computer names are displayed If an authentication window is displayed enter a user name and password If authentication is successful the subordinate computer names are displayed 4 Select a computer m The network tree expands and the subordinate network printer names are displayed If an authentication window is displayed enter a user name and password If authentication is successful the subordinate network printer names are displayed 5 Select a network printer A network printer that has already registered cannot be added 165 4 13 Setting the Network Printers 6 Press the OK button The window returns to the Network Printer window and the registered network printer is added to the network printer list Once the network printer is registered do not change the shared name or printer alias on the print server To change the shared name or printer alias remove the registered network printer first and then ch
349. rocess The File Download Security Warning dialog box appears 83 4 2 Administrator Login 6 Press the Run button File Download Security Waming E5 Do you want to run or save this file P Name AdminTool msi Tye Windows Installer Package MB From fun C See CUGRETTT While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can D potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not run or save this software What s the risk If NET Framework is not installed the Microsoft Web site is accessed when M installing the Admin Tool After installing NET Framework try again from Step 1 7 Press the Next button 4g Network Scanner Admin Tool 0 Welcome to the Network Scanner Admin Tool Setup Wizard The installer will guide you through the steps required to install Network Scanner Admin Tool on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law gt The Select Installation Folder window appears 84 8 Specify an installation folder for the Admin Tool and the target user setting To select a different folder press the Browse button To check the free space av
350. rrier sheet you can scan documents larger than A4 size such as A3 Double Letter and B4 To do this you fold the document in half and scan both sides continuously in duplex mode one side at a time The scanned images will be merged and saved as one image page When scanning a document larger than A4 size change the settings as follows When using a carrier sheet set the size of the scanned document to be output For more details refer to 6 9 1 Carrier Sheet page 362 When a carrier sheet is used for scanning load and scan one page at a time Continuous scanning is not possible even when multiple document sheets are loaded You can merge both front and back side images of a document smaller than A4 size M to output a single double page image 1 Fold the sheet to be scanned in half so that its front side faces outwards Fold the sheet tightly and smooth out the crease Otherwise the sheet may be skewed during scanning 300 2 Open the carrier sheet and insert the document Align the fold with the right edge of the Carrier Sheet so that the document fits into the Carrier Sheet at the upper corner When placing the carrier sheet with the printed black and white pattern to be at the M top the front of the carrier sheet has the thick vertical line at the right side f Face up is selected on the Document Feed Direction window align the fold side with the right edge of the carrier sheet so that the
351. rrupted file may cause the scanner to function abnormally 179 4 15 Managing the User Data Store and System Settings mM Restoring the User Data Store AdminToo The scanner s user data store can be restored from a backed up user data store file Restoring user data overwrites all user information stored at the time of restoration and returns all e mail address books fax number list and scan settings to the time the backup was taken During user data restoration do not press and hold down the power button for longer than 4 seconds as it may cause the scanner to function abnormally A User logs cannot be backed up therefore cannot be restored 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Data Management gt User Data Store gt The User Data Store window appears 2 Select a user data store backup file Press the Browse button to select a file 3 Press the Restore button An OK to overwrite confirmation message appears 4 Press the Yes button After the user data store is restored a restore completion message appears 5 Press the OK button E Clearing the User Data Store Buch AdminTool Clearing the user data store cannot be undone Even if the user data store is cleared the local accounts are not removed To remove the local accounts use the User Editor For details about how to edit the local accounts refer to E 8 Editing Local Accounts page 516 1 Select Mon
352. rver may not assign valid IP addresses because of restricted number of leases or MAC address validation Check the DHCP server connection status and the details of the server settings For more details about the Network Status window refer to 4 8 7 Checking the Network Operating Status page 121 451 8 2 Network Connection Troubleshooting Another host or communication device is connected using the same IP address as the scanner E Action If the same IP address has already been used by another host or communication device then even if the other device has been given a different IP address the server may not recognize the scanner s duplicate IP address until it is rebooted Restart the server If a duplicate IP address connection from another host or communication device exists on a LAN it will be unusable If a duplicate IP address connection from another host or communication device exists pull out its LAN cable and restart the server Access is denied due to the establishment of a firewall between the server and the scanner E Action If a firewall has been established between the server and the scanner check that it has not been set to deny access to the network The network Link Speed Duplex Mode for the scanner and server are different or Auto Negotiation is not supported by the server E Action For this scanner the default Link Speed Duplex Mode value is Auto Negotiation On the Network Status w
353. s LCD touch panel Admin Central Item Function Basic Advanced Tool Pale See mode mode i a Local Settings Import Import scanner NA NA NA A page 266 Scanner settings Settings Scanner Set the scanner A A A NA page 94 Name name 1 Language Set the language A A A NA page 96 Selection Region Set the region A A A A page 97 Timezone timezone 1 Date Time Set the date time A A A A page 98 1 2 Keyboard Set the keyboard NA A A A page 99 Settings Certificate Manage NA A A A page 100 Management certificates 3 Scanner Settings Multifeed Set the multifeed NA A A A page 102 Settings detection method Scanner Set the offset and NA A A NA page 105 Adjustment magnification settings General Set general NA A A A page 106 Scanner scanner settings Settings 38 LCD touch panel Admin Central Item Function Basic Advanced Tool pee See mode mode Login Settings Login Set the login NA A A A page 107 Settings settings 1 Standby Set the standby NA A A A page 110 Mode mode and or automatic logout Admin Change the A A A NA page 112 Password admin password 1 A available NA not available 1 Operations can be performed in the Installation Wizard 2 The Date Time input field and Get Time button cannot be used 3 Certificates canno
354. s XX XX XX XX XX X is an alphanumeric Optional character IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX is a value from 0 to Optional 255 Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX is a value from 0 to Optional 255 Scanner Name Up to 15 alphanumeric characters long Required hyphens may also be used Port Number Numerical value from 1 to 65535 Optional Use HTTPS 0 Do not use HTTPS default Optional 1 Use HTTPS Model Up to 64 characters long Optional Add in Group Up to 32 characters long 1 Optional Settings Group Up to 32 characters long 1 Optional Comment Up to 256 characters long Optional System Updates 0 Enable default Optional 1 Disable 1 The following character strings cannot be used Default All __ is two underbars entered one after another __ default _al__ 484 B 2 2 Scanner Configuration File Format for Exporting This section describes the scanner configuration file format requirements for exporting The default value for the file name is scannerinfo csv The file character set should be the same as the value on the Central Admin Console Central Admin Server Settings window The default value is UNICODE UTF 8 A title line can be added as the first line in a file when the file is exported The file is in CSV format The values for each item are as follows Item Value and Format Remarks MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX X is an
355. s are E Error W Warning Info Clearing All Events Press the Event Log button in the Central Admin Console main window The Event Log window appears Press the Clear Log button A confirmation window for whether or not to clear the events appears Press the OK button gt All the events are cleared 276 5 16 Collecting and Exporting Audit Logs Scanner system logs and user logs can be collected and saved in the Central Admin Server System logs collected in the Central Admin Server are referred to as audit logs system and user logs as audit logs user Both types of logs are referred to collectively as audit logs By automatically collecting system logs and user logs in the Central Admin Server you can record users past operations To view audit logs export those collected in the Central Admin Server to an arbitrary folder by executing a command The status of audit logs collection can be checked in the Scanner Details window Audit log export command Export audit logs Central Admin Server Server in which audit logs are saved epee a AP audit logs Audit logs e J 4 Automatically collect system logs user logs STNNNERCEENRAERRUNENCERANRNNENNUCCON ANANNNERUUNNENG v Computer CUO Peas MALLLLELLELELELELEJS Scanner Scanner Scanner JITITITIIIIIIITI TTI itil titiiiiiitil iii iit ih Ce
356. s are set by the administrator in advance V The maximum number of e mail addresses to be specified in the To field Whether to split an e mail to be sent and the maximum size of a split e mail The maximum size of an attached file To change these settings contact the administrator For more details refer to 4 10 1 Setting the e Mail Server page 137 For photos and images a high compression rate can be used to create a smaller file For details refer to 6 9 11 Compression page 380 If the file format is JPEG or TIFF a file will be attached for each page in the scan fthe number of pages is over ten and Scan Viewer is On a confirmation message appears after the Send button on the Send e Mail window is pressed f the number of pages is over ten and Scan Viewer is Off a confirmation message appears after the Scan amp Send button on the Scan Viewer window is pressed If the e mail fails to be sent an error message e mail with the following title is sent from the scanner to the From address Network Scanner XXXxX Error 312 6 4 1 Selecting an e Mail Target from the e Mail Address Book The following explains how to use an e mail address book to specify destinations when sending an e mail instead of directly entering e mail addresses with a keyboard The details to select e mail addresses from an e mail address book are described in Step 2 and Step 3 of 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by
357. s reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that 1 source code distributions retain the above copyright notice and this paragraph in its entirety 2 distributions including binary code include the above copyright notice and this paragraph in its entirety in the documentation or other materials provided with the distribution The name of Juniper Networks may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Portions Copyright 2001 Daniel Hartmeier All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
358. scanned If using edge cropping the width of the edges to be cropped can be adjusted with this setting The following are the areas of documents to be scanned when edge cropping is used and when not used Edge Scannable area of documents Cropping Off Original document Scanned data On Document edge Original document Edge cropping width Scanned data 393 6 9 Setting the Scan Options On the Scan Settings window select the Advanced tab 2 Press the Edge Cropping button The Edge Cropping window appears 3 If edge cropping is to be used enter the width of the edges to be cropped Edge Cropping EH a Edge Cropping Cancel 4 Press the OK button This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected setting is displayed to the right of the Edge Cropping button Ifthe edge cropping width top to bottom left to right edge cropping width total is larger than the document the edge cropping setting is not applied If page orientation is set edge cropping is performed after the page orientation is corrected Example In the following example Left feed is selected for page orientation Original document Page Orientation Edge Cropping A Scanned data is rotated 90 degrees left x Feed direction 394 6 10 Enabling Disabling the Scan Viewer The Scan Viewer can be set to appear
359. sconnect Scanner Settings Job Menu Settings 48 Download Manual Q About 2Hep SGCZASGNEP 41 Job Sequences Job Menus Job Groups Jobs List Filter Conditions Job Name Comment Find J TT 4 2 Administrator Login 4 2 Administrator Login 4 2 1 Administrator Login via the LCD Touch Panel QA E When Automatic Login is Not Set The default user name and password for the administrator are set as follows M User name admin Password password The scanner setup can be configured by one user 1 Enter the user name and password of the administrator Shutdown A Login If Active Directory Global Catalog is selected for the login LDAP server the UPN Suffix input field is displayed A UPN suffix is not required when logging in as an administrator Even if entered it is ignored 2 Press the Login button If the user name and password are valid the System Settings window appears 78 E When Automatic Login is Set When automatic login has been set login to the administrator windows from the regular user window 1 From the Maintenance window press the Administrator Login button The Administrator Login window appears Administrator Login E User Name pO Password 2 Enter the administrator user name and password 3 Press the OK button When authenticated the system settings window is shown 79 4 2 Administrator Login 4 2 2 Setting up for Admin
360. ser Editor Next Scanner Central Admin Server Next Scanner Central Admin Console Next Screenshot Logout gt The Central Admin Console download window appears 3 Press the Download button Scanner Central Admin Console Version WEE The Scanner Central Admin Console requires OS Windows R XP SP3 or later Windows Vista R SP1 or later Windows R 7 Windows Server R 2003 SP2 or later Windows Server R 2008 Microsoft R NET Framework 2 0 SP2 or later Microsoft R NET Framework 3 0 SP2 or later or Microsoft R NET Framework 3 5 SP1 or later Memory 32MB or more Disk space 64MB or more Attention NET Framework is required for use of this tool therefore confirm that it has been installed If not already installed a message will appear telling you to install NET Framework from the Microsoft Web site When installing NET Framework at least 280MB of additional free disk space is required Togou Do not close the Web browser or logout until installation is complete o Downloading is not possible while a scanner operation is in process 238 Follow the instructions displayed on the window When Installation complete is displayed the installation is complete Press the Close button After installation is completed log out from the scanner on the Web browser and close the Web browser After installation the Central Admin Console can be started by selecting the Start menu All Programs
361. size A standard international paper size 210 x 297 mm approximately 8 27 x 11 7 in A5 size A standard international paper size 148 x 210 mm approximately 5 83 x 8 27 in A6 size A standard international paper size 105 x 148 mm approximately 4 13 x 5 83 in ADF Automatic Document Feeder A unit that allows the user to scan a number of pages consecutively Documents are transported from the ADF paper chute past the scanning area to the output tray Actual scanning is performed by the CCD sensors inside of this unit B5 size A standard international paper size 182 x 257 mm approximately 7 17 x 10 12 in B6 size A standard international paper size 128 x 182 mm approximately 5 04 x 7 17 in Brightness Refers to the brightness level of the scanned data Business card size A standard paper size 51 x 89 mm Portrait orientation is used for this scanner Carrier Sheet A carrier sheet is a plastic sheet specifically used for loading non standard documents onto the scanner 529 Default settings The settings installed at time of factory shipping dpi dots per inch Dots per inch Number of dots lined along one inch The measurement of resolution normally used for scanners and printers Higher dpi means better resolution Duplex scan mode A scan mode where both sides of each document sheet are scanned See also Simplex scan mode Eject roller Rollers that feed documents in the ADF to the stacke
362. ss Book tab 2 Select the distribution list to be edited 3 Open the Edit Address dialog box in either of the following ways Select the Address Book menu and then select Properties Press the Properties button on the toolbar 4 Edit the information 5 Press the OK button The details of the distribution list are changed M Deleting a Distribution List 1 Select the Address Book tab 2 Select the distribution list to be deleted 3 Perform either of the following Select the Address Book menu and then select Delete Press the Delete button on the toolbar The delete confirmation window appears 4 Press the OK button The distribution list is deleted 513 E 7 3 Setting an e Mail Address Set an e mail address in the mail address book E Adding an e Mail Address 1 Select the Address Book tab 2 Select a group to which the new distribution list is to be added 3 Open the Add Address dialog box in either of the following ways Select the Address Book menu and then select Add Address Press the Add Address button on the toolbar 4 Enter the information of the e mail address to be added First Name and Last Name may be up to 64 characters long First Name and Last Name can be skipped For details about e mail address settings values refer to B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values page 483 Add Address x Insertion Point First Nam
363. started to finalize the update OK to update now OK update and restart immediately Login will not be possible until the restart completes Cancel return to the Update screen without updating When installed options or the system including installed options are updated M the following window appears Update the scanner s embedded system Current System Version gt n a Was Updated On 09 13 New System Version e gt n a Installed Options The system needs to be restarted to finalize the update OK to update now OK update and restart immediately Login will not be possible until the restart completes Cancel return to the Update screen without updating OK 4 Press the OK button The system update process is started After the system has updated the scanner is restarted Wait for the system to restart During system update do not press and hold down the power button for longer than 4 seconds as this may cause the scanner to function abnormally The network interface connection will be lost when the scanner is restarted to complete the system update To continue with other settings wait a short time for the scanner to restart then login to the network interface again 186 4 16 2 Checking for New Updates Puch amino You can check whether new updates are available from the published server for the scanner system security system and installed opti
364. stem update module will be released and applied to the scanners when one of the following occurs Scanner is started or resumed from the standby mode Scanner is logged out Scanner is notified of any update modules Scanner has an automatic update scheduled Updates can be applied to the scanners that are in power off or standby mode using Wake On LAN In the following cases update modules cannot be uploaded The module type is either a system or security option and the same or upgraded module version has already been registered For an installed option update module the same update module is already uploaded Add ins can be updated according to the time specified on the scanner side M For details refer to 4 8 9 Setting a Central Admin Server page 125 1 Select the System Updates link in the Scanner Admin Operations window of the Central Admin Console The System Updates window appears System Updates Upload and release system updates to the scanners Model List m Registered System Update Model f 6010N N1800 Current Release Type None Version Target Model Release Date m Upload amp Release a New System Update System Update Module Browse Upload Back To cancel release of the update module press the Cancel button to delete the module 261 5 9 Updating the System 2 In Model List select N1800 Registered System Update s
365. t amp Clear window appears Select the check box for the user s whose user roaming data is to be deleted and press the Clear button User Roaming Data Select amp Clear Select the user s whose user roaming data is to be deleted from the scanner central admin Clear All server then click the Clear button Filter Conditions User Name Refresh List Select All Deselect All Info Last Modified User Name Pages 1 Select All and Deselect All apply to the current page only Back The Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window is shown again 250 5 7 Setting Scanner Configuration Scanner configuration is set by adding editing and deleting scanner configuration Scanner configuration is information used to identify scanners on the Central Admin Server when registering configuration information from a scanner to the Central Admin Server The registered scanners can be reviewed and modified by the Central Admin Server functions Initially scanner configuration for each scanner in the scanner group is automatically added To prevent scanner configuration from automatically being added clear the Automatically add new scanners to the Central Admin configuration when they are discovered check box in the Central Admin Server Settings window in advance Scanner configuration can be registered on the Central Admin Server in the following ways Import from the Sc
366. t Options The Internet Options dialog box appears 2 On the Security tab select Trusted sites 3 Press the Sites button The Trusted sites dialog box appears 4 Clear the Require server verification https for all sites in this zone check box 5 Enter the URL of the scanner in the Add this website to the zone field and press the Add button Example http IP_address or scanner_name Different browser versions may require a different setup procedure If any updates or service packs are available for Internet Explorer make sure they are applied 81 4 2 Administrator Login E Installing the Admin Tool To setup the scanner via the network interface install the Admin Tool to your computer 1 To access a scanner specify the scanner name as a URL using a Web browser According to the settings described in 4 8 8 Setting the Admin Connection page 123 specify the URL in one of the following ways SSL is Off no port number change http scanner_name or IP_address SSL is Off port number change http scanner_name or IP_address port_number For port_number enter the changed port number SSL is On no port number change https scanner_name or IP_address SSL is On port number change https scanner_name or IP_address port_number For port_number enter the changed port number For SSL the Security Alert window is displayed when connecting Press the Yes button
367. t be imported E Network Settings LCD touch panel Central It Function Admin Admin See 2 ee Basic Advanced Tool Console a mode mode Basic IP Address Set the IP A A A NA page 113 address 1 DNS Server Set the DNS A A A A page 115 server 1 WINS Server Set the WINS A A A A page 116 server NTP Server Set the NTP NA A A A page 117 server 2 Proxy Server Set the proxy NA A A A page 118 server 39 1 3 User Types and Operations LCD touch panel Admin Central Item Function Basic Advanced Todi A See mode mode onos Ping Check the A A A NA page 119 network connection with a Ping test Network Check the A A A NA page 121 Status network operating status Network Admin Admin Set the admin A A A A page 123 Connection connection 3 Scanner Set the Central A A A A page 125 Central Admin Server 1 4 Admin Server Authentication Server Login LDAP Set the login NA A A A page 127 Server LDAP server e Mail LDAP Set the e mail NA A A A page 133 Server LDAP server Customize Customize the NA A A A page 135 LDAP LDAP search Search parameters e Mail SMTP server Set the e mail A A A A page 137 server SMTP server Send e Mail Set the e mail NA A A A page 139 related settings File Names Set the file name NA A A A page 140 e Mail format used for when attaching scanned data to e mails 40
368. t by Central Admin Server ceeeeeeseeeeneeee 526 522 Updating System Settings from the Central Admin Server The following shows the compatibility of system setting updates between different versions of the Central Admin Server and the scanner system version The version of the Central Admin Server software can be checked on the Central Admin Console login window ScanSnap N1800 ieee 2ever Scanner System Version Compatibility ersion 3 0 x ss001 01 01 xx xxxx Yes 2 X X or earlier No fi 6010N CEAN Server Scanner System Version Compatibility ersion 3 0 x is001 01 04 xx xxxx or later Yes Can be used in the range of functions supported by the scanner 523 F 2 Functional Compatibility Between the Scanner and Central Admin Server The following shows the functional compatibility between different versions of the scanner system and the Central Admin Server The version of the Central Admin Server software can be checked on the Central Admin Console login window ScanSnap N1800 abc tant SEBEL Scanner System Version Compatibility ersion 3 0 x ss001 01 01 xx xxxx Yes 2 X X or earlier No fi 6010N one came SIKET Scanner System Version Compatibility ersion 3 0 x is001 01 04 xx xxxx or Yes later Can be used in the range of functions supported by the scanner 524 F 3 Backing Up Restoring Data
369. tLogs folder a folder is created for each date to save audit logs The date of a folder corresponds to that of when audit logs are collected in the Central Admin Server Therefore the date may differ from that on the scanner when the logs are created File name format of an output audit log Audit log system ScannerName_MACAddress_syslog csv Audit log user ScannerName_MACAddress_usrlog csv Return value 0 Succeeded Other than 0 Failed Do not execute this command twice at the same time If a file name already exists the existing file will be overwritten When exported audit logs are deleted from the Central Admin Server If an error occurs while exporting the audit logs that have been exported are deleted from the Central Admin Server 278 5 16 3 File Format of Audit Logs Audit log files are formatted as follows Audit logs use the UTF 8 character set Audit logs are in a CSV format Audit logs contain the following output Audit log system This log contains the following output items Sequence_number Date Time Type Code Message These items are defined as follows Log Item Description Sequence A file sequence number between 1 and number 4294967295 This number increments from 1 as files are added and resets to 0 indicating an overflow after 4294967295 Date Corresponds to the system log Date
370. tates each scanned data page that contains text through 0 90 180 or 270 so the text is upright This function determines a document orientation based on Roman characters printed on the document Therefore it may not work properly for the following kinds of documents When scanning such documents do not set automatic page orientation Documents with many extremely large small characters Documents on which the pitch of lines or characters is extremely narrow or characters overlap Documents with many characters that contact underlines or ruled lines Documents with many photographs or figures and only a few characters Documents which have a background pattern behind characters Documents with characters printed in various direction e g plans Documents written in languages other than English Documents with only capital letters Handwritten documents Unclear or smeared characters 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Advanced tab 2 Press the Page Orientation button The Page Orientation window appears 3 Select whether or not automatic page orientation is required ES Page Orientation Should page orientation be used If every page is to be rotated in the same direction set the angle What is the bind direction Only available for Duplex scans TA Long Edge Short Edge Only Off and Auto are allowed for 600dpi resolution Cancel 389 6 9 Setting
371. tatus Icon Labels Scanner Name p Error Notification Settings E Send error notification e mails Data Import Export CSV File Character set Shif_JIS gt Log Retention Keep records for 3 gt days Audit Log Settings Collect Audit Logs Save for 3 gt days 245 5 6 Setting the Central Admin Server Select the Automatically add new scanners to the Central Admin configuration when they are discovered check box to add a new scanner automatically In Network Connection set up the network to communicate with scanners and the Central Admin Console In Screen Settings configure the Central Admin Console main window In LDAP Server configure the LDAP server Configure the LDAP server used for job mode settings or user authentication when LDAP is used for administrator login to Central Admin Server If Other LDAP Server is selected for LDAP Server Type press the Adjust button to set the search items for LDAP searches and the LDAP server schema Press the Use Defaults button to reset the input values to default settings When a server type other than Other LDAP Server is selected for the LDAP Server Type the search item schema cannot be adjusted the Adjust button is disabled Adjust the search item schema First Name Comment givenName description Last Name Workplace sn physicalDeliveryOfficeName Common Name Phone Number cn telephoneNumber Display Name E
372. tection Layer and Length Multifeed is an error that occurs when two or more sheets are fed simultaneously into the ADF The scanner can be set to detect multifeeds and stop the scan with an error message Multifeeds are to be detected by layer and length The following explains how to set whether or not multifeeds are to be detected and setup multifeed detection method For multifeed requirements refer to A 5 Multifeed Detection Conditions page 478 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Advanced tab 2 Press the Multifeed Setup button The Multifeed Setup window appears 3 If multifeeds are to be detected select which detection method is to be Multifeed Setup Set the multifeed detection method to be used used Problems can occur if Length or Both is used with the Auto Paper size An error will occur if the Length or Both multifeed setting is used with the Auto paper size and the document bundle being scanned contains different size pages When a multifeed is detected with Ultrasonic you can choose to ignore the multifeed and continue scanning by pressing the Retry button on the error message window This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected setting is displayed to the right of the Multifeed Setup button 392 6 9 20 Edge Cropping For scanned data the width of the area for edge cropping can be adjusted so that unwanted sections are not
373. teeeeeeeeeeteeeee 207 E Deleting a Job SEQUENCE ee eee eeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 208 E Filtering Job Sequences 5 ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 208 E Filtering the LDAP List vnctac csi tond earner clued acess 209 4 17 3 Setting a Job Meni ss 0 oo acce ded de seiren ebeceahiw deed ceseant 210 E Adding a Job Menu 2 2 s ccs1cceeeeeeeeeeete eee ete 210 E Cloning a Job Menu c cececeeeeeeeceeeeceeeceeeneeeeeeteees 214 E Editing a Job MGM 20 vec coscseseosdvesesocc enecescemaegee penance sgieses 214 E Deleting a Job Menu eeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 215 E Viewing the Detailed Settings for a Job Menu 215 4 17 4 Setting a Job Group Saeed ond eed cntetc tended nd aire nd oieteed 216 E Adding a Job Group 5 as scoustevey vari ceese hich ani acess 216 E Editing a Job Group a 2ncnece eu Heeekeaaieee us 220 E Deleting a Job Group cecececeeecececeeeeceeeeee ene eeeeeteeees 220 E Viewing the Detailed Settings for a Job Group 221 E Assigning Job Menus to Users Not Included in a Job ETa Ti o A E are eam T EE tomer capes 221 E Filtering the LDAP List sc scehcicenadmeee as 223 4 18 MCSSAQCS r aieea ea d aaaea d edee AAEH Oena 224 4 18 1 Administrator Window Messages esessssssssseseserrrerrrenee 225 Chapter 5 Administrator Operations Central Admin Console ssssssssssssssnnsnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 226 5 1 Functi
374. ter Windows Server R 2008 Microsoft R NET Framework 2 0 SP2 or later Microsoft R NET Framework 3 0 SP2 or later or Microsoft R NET Framework 3 5 SP1 or later Memory 512MB or more Disk space 700MB or more Attention Since NET Framework and SQL Server 2005 Express are required to use this software confirm that they have been installed If these components need to be installed the following minimum amounts of free disk space will be required NET Framework 2 0 280MB SQL Server 2005 Express 200MB Downloading is not possible while a scanner operation is in process Do not close the Web browser or logout until installation is complete Installation requires 700 MB of free disk space which includes 200 MB required to install SQL Server 2005 Express Edition Follow the instructions displayed on the window The following settings will be required Determine the port number and protocol to be used in advance Port number for scanner communication Port number for Central Admin Console communication After installation the port number and protocol settings can be changed on the Central Admin Console Scanner Central Admin Server Settings window After installation is complete restart the computer Admin Console page 238 When installing the Central Admin Server over an older version of the software all of the old Central Admin system settings should be automatically reused However as a precauti
375. ters Printer List Network Printer Printer01 A4color PrinterO2 A4mono Printer03 A3 Previous Follow the prompts on the window The Completing the Add Printer Wizard message indicates that the printer addition has completed Press the Finish button The printer is added on the Printers and Faxes window Right click the added printer and select Properties Printer properties appear Press the Printing Defaults button on the Advanced tab The printing defaults window is displayed Select Color on the Paper Quality tab and press the OK button Printing Defaults Layout Paper Quality P Tray Selection ooe f Color a C Black amp White Color _ j Advanced Printing is set to Color After this if the printer set for color printing on the print server is added to the scanner printer list the user can specify to use this printer already set for color printing For details about adding the printer to the scanner printer list refer to Registering a Network Printer Network Tree page 164 or Registering a Network Printer Network Path page 167 163 4 13 Setting the Network Printers E Registering a Network Printer Network Tree 1 Select Network Settings gt Print gt Network Printer The Network Printer window appears Network Settings gt Print Setup the network printers Printer List Network P
376. the Scan Options In duplex mode the bind direction can be selected when the page rotation angle is set The following table shows the bind directions and the resulting scanned data Bind Direction Scanned Data Long Edge Select this setting when scanning a document with opposing left and right pages facing pages with long side as the middle crease The scanned data is output with the same orientation as the original document Original document Scanned data Front side Reverse side Front side Reverse side E Feed direction Short Edge Select this setting when scanning a document with opposing top and bottom pages facing pages with the short side as the middle crease The front side of the document is output with the same orientation as the original data whereas the data on the reverse side is rotated 180 degrees Original document Scanned data Front side Reverse side Front side Reverse side B D Rotated 180 degrees Feed direction 390 4 Press the OK button This returns you to the Scan Settings window The selected setting is displayed to the right of the Page Orientation button Irrespective of what page orientation is decided pages may still be manually rotated as desired in the Scan Viewer window For details refer to 6 11 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer page 398 391 6 9 Setting the Scan Options 6 9 19 Multifeed De
377. the Scan Viewer cceeeee 395 Editing the Scanned Data in the Scan Viewer 398 6 11 1 Viewing Scanned Data ccccceeeceeeee tree eeteeeeeeeeeeetttaeeees 398 6 11 2 Rotating a Scanned Page aid acdecrscceti c ions Ge etverd ce reese 399 6 11 3 OMIMNGtr AGES s f2 0s ck a ice ea ee coat 399 6 11 4 Scanning an Additional Page ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettetteeeeees 400 6 11 5 Deleting a Scanned Page cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenttaaeeeeees 401 6 11 6 Editing Marked Characters to Be Set as Keywords 401 Checking the User Log cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 402 Maintenance issii sira hh iia niiair 403 Processing a JOb ssssassnsssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenne 405 6 14 1 Enabling Disabling the Message Screen n 408 6 14 2 Changing a File Name for Save e Mail Attachment 410 11 6 14 3 Checking the Number of Sheets to Be Scanned 411 6 15 Changing a User Password cccccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 414 Chapter 7 Scanner Care sncccnnceniiinenninnae 416 7 1 Cleaning Supplies and Part to Clean naissances 417 E Cleaning Supplies sisccctstcecdectice Peis vesihenccevodasiniaatiortun eae 417 E Which Parts and When cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 418 7 2 Cleaning the Exterior of the Scanner n se 419 E Cleaning Parts Other Than the LCD Touch Panel 419 E Cleaning the LCD Touch Panel n a 4
378. the System Log Buch AaminTool 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Status Details gt System Log The System Log window appears 2 Press the Clear All button The confirmation window appears 3 Press the Yes button The system log is cleared 176 4 15 Managing the User Data Store and System Settings 4 15 1 Maintaining the User Data Store The scanner s user data store can be backed up restored and deleted The user data store contains the following information My List e Mail Address Books Scan Settings User Logs Fax Number List Name of the last network printer used Name of the last network folder used Name of the last SharePoint folder used Local Accounts Scanner login user names are authenticated with the LDAP server and when a new name is encountered the scanner automatically adds an entry for that user to the user data store The user data store may contain up to 1 000 users Once 1 000 user names have been used to login new user logins are no longer possible until the entire user data store is cleared It is recommended that the user data store be backed up before it is cleared Refer to Backing up the User Data Store page 178 and Clearing the User Data Store page 180 for details When restoring from a user data store backup if a backed up user name corresponds to that of an existing user in the current user data store the backup user data will overwrite the c
379. the items in 8 4 Points to Check before Contacting Your FUJITSU Scanner Dealer page 467 and contact your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider E Failure to Connect to a Server Using Its IP Address If a server cannot be connected to by using its IP address and does not respond to a ping test try the following steps Connection error between a server and the scanner or problem with the LAN cable E Action Check that the LAN cable has been attached to both the scanner and server correctly If the server is connected using a LAN cable straight type in case Auto MDI MDI X automatic selection is not supported a LAN cable crossover type switch or router is required between the scanner and server If this is not the case the LAN cable may be faulty Find a LAN cable that functions normally and try again IP address or subnet mask is invalid E Action On the IP Address window check that the IP address or subnet mask settings are correct For more details about the IP Address window refer to 4 8 1 Giving the Scanner an IP Address page 113 When using DHCP the DHCP server does not operate normally or there is a problem with the DHCP server settings E Action If using DHCP on the Network Status window check that IP address subnet mask and default gateway settings are all correct If these settings are not correct the DHCP server may not operate normally or the DHCP se
380. the operations described below because they are not included in the Central Admin Server settings 5 17 1 Backing Up Central Admin Server Settings All data managed in the Central Admin Server excluding audit logs can be backed up Central Admin Server settings can be restored using the backup file Make backups periodically just in case To back up Central Admin Server settings execute AmBackup exe in the command prompt on the computer installed with the Central Admin Server software When backing up the Central Admin Server is in a temporarily suspended state and connection from the Central Admin Console or uploading downloading of user roaming data and release of updates to scanners are not possible On the Scanner Operation Monitor window the operating status of all scanners is indicated as Unreported Command storage location Under the AmManager Bin folder in the installation folder of the Central Admin Server software Command executable format AmBackup exe BackupFolderName The italic text represents variable character strings Return value 0 Succeeded Other than 0 Failed 281 5 17 Maintaining Central Admin Server Settings Specify a folder without files and sub folders as the backup folder If the specified backup folder does not exist it is created Do not change the backup folder structure If changed restoration may not be processed correctly Do not change the
381. the system settings To continue with other settings wait a short time for the scanner to restart then login to the network interface again As the network interface connection to the scanner requires the IP address or scanner name if this is changed by the restoration of the system settings i e if the backed up IP address or scanner name is different to the pre restoration IP address or scanner name the new IP address or scanner name will be needed If not known the current state of these settings can always be checked by physically logging in to the scanner via the LCD touch panel interface 183 4 15 Managing the User Data Store and System Settings E Resetting Factory Defaults uch dminToo The system settings or entire system can be reset to factory defaults 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Data Management gt System Settings File The System Settings File window appears 2 Perform either of the following steps To reset system settings to factory defaults press the Reset button for Reset system settings to factory defaults and clear logs To reset system settings to factory defaults clear the user data store and logs and initialize the free space press the Secure initialize button for Reset system settings to factory defaults clear the user data store and logs and initialize the free space A confirmation message appears 3 Press the Yes button The system set
382. tings user data store and logs are reset to factory defaults After factory default settings have been restored the scanner is restarted During factory defaults reset do not press and hold down the power button for longer than 4 seconds It may cause the scanner to function abnormally After the factory default settings are restored the scanner name IP address and other settings will need to be set again as described in Configuring the System page 94 184 4 16 Maintaining the System 4 16 1 Updating the Scanner s System Software AdminToo The scanner system security system and installed options can be updated as follows 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt System Update gt The System Update window appears Update the scanner s embedded system System Version Current System Version mm o gt a Was Updated On 09 16 Run Update Select a system update file to upload Upload Browse Check for Updates Check for Updates Check for updates at scanner startup Cancel 2 Select a system update file Press the Browse button to select a file 185 4 16 Maintaining the System 3 Press the Upload button The Current System Version and Was Updated On values are displayed Update the scanner s embedded system Current System Version mss Was Updated On 07 13 rera na New System Version _ 0 The system needs to be re
383. tinnneheiiotentias 468 E Document Feed Trouble cccccecccceeeeeeeenseeseeeeeees 468 E Problem with Central Admin Server Software 469 E Sending an Original Document and Scanned Data 469 8 5 Checking the Scanner Labels cccccssseeeeeeeeeeees 470 8 6 Pre Maintenance Preparations ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 471 Appendix A Paper Specifications ccccsceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 472 Ail Paper Size icsi ia 473 A 2 Paper Quality vsccccecceecszcccscssczcancetnastnvevkevtoaceceeccenacsassecedechl 474 A 3 Maximum Document Loading Capacity 476 13 A 4 Area not to be Perforated 0 cccceececeeeececeececeeeeeeees 477 A 5 Multifeed Detection Conditions ccccseeseseeeeeeeees 478 A 6 Conditions for Using the Carrier Sheet 480 AGT Paper OIL wastes a a EE ete tA acl hea She ae 480 A62 Paper Quality x ssc senate nae i a renee da hotel 480 Appendix B Management Settings and Files 482 B 1 e Mail Address Setting Values tssceeeeeeeeeeeeees 483 B 2 Scanner Configuration File Format ccceeeeeeee 484 B 2 1 Scanner Configuration File Format for Importing 484 B 2 2 Scanner Configuration File Format for Exporting 485 Appendix C Root Certification Authority cscceeeeeeeees 488 C 1 Root Certification Authority List
384. to change without notice PFU LIMITED assumes no liability for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of this Product and any claims by a third party Copying of the contents of this manual in whole or in part as well as the scanner applications is prohibited under the copyright law
385. to start the scanner with the LAN cable disconnected Enter a non duplicated scanner name Reboot the scanner Re connect the LAN cable to the scanner The connection is lost if the scanner name is changed via the network interface To continue with other settings wait a short time for the scanner to restart then login to the network interface again 95 4 5 Configuring the System 4 5 2 Setting the Language _ RER AaminToo 1 Select System Settings gt Local Settings gt Language Selection The Language Selection window appears System Settings gt Local Settings Local Settings Scanner Name Language Selection Region Timezone Date Time Select a language Language English US ve Show the Language Selection screen at next start up Keyboard Settings Certificate Management Previous You can select whether or not to display this window again at the next scanner startup To display the window again for Show the Language Selection screen at next start up select Yes To not display this window at next start up select No 2 Select a language Select the desired language for the operating environment gt This returns to the Language Selection window 3 Press the OK button A language setting confirmation message appears in the selected language 4 Press the OK button 96 4 5 3 Setting the Region Timezone _ Buc AdminTool
386. tocol for accessing a directory databases over a TCP IP network It can be used to administrator networked users e mail addresses and operating environments When connected using encryption SSL this is called the LDAPS Server The LDAP server can be used to perform the following User authentication at login Finding or entering e mail addresses in an address book SMTP Server SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a protocol for sending e mail The SMTP server can be used to perform the following Sending the scanned data as an e mail Sending the scanned data by fax File Server The file server shares the disk on a server with other computers on a network and enables use of the disk from an external computer Using this file server enables scanned data to be saved to a file server network folder SharePoint Server SharePoint is the collective name for the elements of an Internet Explorer based document management platform provided by Microsoft Using a SharePoint server enables scanned data to be saved to a SharePoint folder on the SharePoint server 50 FTP Server FTP File Transfer Protocol is a standard network protocol used for copying files between hosts on the network based on TCP IP An FTP server which connects with SSL encryption is called an FTPS Server Using this FTP server enables scanned data to be saved to an FTP server network folder Print Server The print server refers to the computer
387. ton either the left middle or e Mail Address button to select a search item Left button Middle button e Mail Address Book v Last e Mail Name Address Search Position Head abc Selected e Mail Addresses Cancel The administrator can customize and specify the search parameters and button names allocated to the left and middle buttons For details about customizing the search parameters and the button names refer to 4 9 3 Setting the LDAP Search Parameters page 135 4 Inthe Search Target field enter a part of or entire e mail address to be searched for For My List the search string and the search results from the previous search can be cleared by pressing Laj button 5 Press L in Search Position The Search Position window appears 314 6 Select a search position setting Search Position Select a search method Head Anywhere Tail abc abc abc If Anywhere or Tail is selected searching takes a long time When the LDAP server contains thousands of entries Anywhere abc o and Tail abc searches can take a long time The window returns to the e Mail Address Book LDAP List The selected position is displayed in Search Position 7 Press e The search results are displayed on the right side Five results are displayed at a time e Mail Address Book e Mail Address Search Position Head
388. trying XXXX 13001 Error has occurred Type Check the error details and other event Error type Details Error logs details 13002 Inhospitable execution Check the error details and other event environment process logs cannot continue Details Error details 13003 Database could not be Check the database operating status accessed Details Error details 13004 Schedule could not be Restart the Scanner Central Admin set Details Error details Server service 288 Code Message Action 13005 Settings used for Restart the Scanner Central Admin communication between the Server service Central Admin Server and Central Admin Console could not be changed Details Error details 13901 Scheduler could not be Restart the Scanner Central Admin started XXXX Server service 13902 Schedule notification failed Check the operating status of the Web XXXX site using IIS Manager If the operating system of the Central Admin Server is either Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008 check the operating status of the Web site AmService and the application pool AmService 13903 Schedule XXXX expired The release schedules for seven or and was deleted XXXX more days ago were deleted Check events the status of updates to the scanner and issue any necessary update calls to scanners with Pending status 13904 Error has occurred XXXX Restart the Scanner Central Admin Server service 1190
389. ts highlighted character strings cannot be set as a keyword The scanner may fail to correctly recognize the following kinds of documents characters as text However by changing the color mode and or improving the image quality for scanning such documents may be successfully recognized Handwritten documents Documents including smaller characters and scanned in low quality Skewed documents Documents including texts written in italic characters Superscript subscript letters and complex mathematical formulas Characters are written against an unevenly colored or patterned background Example Shaded characters Documents containing a lot of characters to which effects are applied Example Characters to which effects such as Shadow and Outline are applied The recognition time may be long for documents of complex layout as well as documents including unreadable characters due to print through smudges or skewed sheets and containing text of uneven thickness or small black spots Conversion to searchable PDF may take extra time 1 On the Scan Settings window select the Save tab 2 Press the Text Recognition button The Text Recognition window appears 3 For Searchable PDF select Yes Text Recognition Searchable PDF Marker Index is incompatible with Grayscale and Black amp White color modes Marker Index Edit Marked String No First marked All marked section only sections Text Recogniti
390. ts can be adjusted Length magnification setting If the scanned output is found to be vertically distorted stretched or squashed relative to the actual documents being scanned the length magnification in the vertical scanning direction can be adjusted 1 Select System Settings gt Scanner Settings gt Scanner Adjustment The Scanner Adjustment window appears System Settings gt Scanner Settings Scanner Settings Enter the scan offset and magnification settings Multifeed Settings 79 Magnification Cee ee Front Side Offsets er 1 1 Horizontal Offset Adjustment General Scanner x0 5mm 4 lt lt 4 Settings 2 Vertical Offset ol x0 5mm 4 lt lt 4 Reverse Side Offsets 3 3 Horizontal Offset a x0 5mm 4 lt lt 4 4 Vertical Offset x0 5mm 4 lt lt 4 Previous Cancel 2 Enter a magnification value for the vertical offset in the Length Magnification input field 3 Enter a value for horizontal offset in the Horizontal Offset field Enter a value for vertical offset in the Vertical Offset field 4 Press the OK button The offset and length magnification settings are set 105 4 6 Setting the Scan Options 4 6 3 Setting General Scanner Setting HA Admin Tool Usually it is not necessary to make any setting changes The operating mode for scanning can be set 1 Select System Settings gt Scanner Settings gt General Scanner Se
391. ts reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 21 Portions Copyright 1996 Juniper Networks Inc All right
392. tting the Login Settings page 107 Only one administrator or user can login to the scanner at same time 1 Push the power button The Login window appears 307 6 3 Logging in Regular User Mode 2 Enter a user name and password User Name Shutdown If Active Directory Global Catalog is selected for the login LDAP server the UPN Suffix input field is displayed User names including a UPN suffix may be up to 64 characters long The entered UPN suffix is remembered and used again at the next login ifa UPN suffix is entered and the UPN suffix will be appended to the user name For example if the user name is user and the entered UPN suffix is example com it is authenticated as user example com In this case this is the User Principal Name Do not enter a UPN suffix when it is not required A UPN suffix is not required when logging in with a guest account Even if entered it is ignored 3 Press the Login button gt If the user name and password are valid the Main Menu window appears 308 6 4 Sending the Scanned Data by e Mail g If an LDAP server is set register the user e mail address with the LDAP server If a local account is set register the user e mail address If the user e mail address is not registered e mails cannot be sent 1 On the Main Menu window press the e Mail button The Send e Mail window appears ez v The scan information
393. tting the Scan Options Top amp Bottom Multifeeds will be detected from the top of the page to 1 upper limit and from 2 lower limit to the bottom of the page b 25 mm 25 mm ao Up to 510 mm Outside of multifeed detection area Center of paper For multifeed detection a length of at least 5 mm is required Specify a value for 2 that is at least 6 mm greater than that for 1 2 can have a maximum value of 510 mm If the paper size setting is long page mode but the length of the document is longer than 510 mm multifeed cannot be detected by length When Middle is selected if the document is shorter than 1 multifeed will not be detected When Top amp Bottom is selected if the document is shorter than 2 multifeed will not be detected for the bottom part If the values specified for 1 and 2 exceed the actual paper size multifeeds will not be detected For Select the intelligent multifeed detection mode select the multifeed detection mode to be used when a sheet with attached paper is scanned Press the OK button The document area to be monitored for multifeeds is set 104 4 6 2 Adjusting the Scan Starting Position Offset Magnification Usually it is not necessary to make any setting changes Configure the following setting items Offset settings When the scanned output is found to be displaced relative to the actual documents being scanned the scan offse
394. ttings The General Scanner Settings window appears System Settings gt Scanner Settings Scanner Settings Y Enter other scanner related settings Operating Mode Performance Image Quality mode is designed to produce high resolution images but has the following drawbacks Multifeed Settings Scanner Adjustment General Scanner Settings Image file sizes increase and scan speeds decrease At a resolution of 600dpi a maximum of 100 pages may be scanned The Background Removal option cannot be used Previous Cancel 2 Set the operating mode for a scan Image Quality mode is designed to produce high resolution images but has the following drawbacks Image file sizes increase and scan speeds decrease Ataresolution of 600 dpi a maximum of 100 pages may be scanned The Background Removal option cannot be used 3 Press the OK button gt The information entered is set 106 4 7 Configuring the Login Related Settings 4 7 1 Setting the Login Settings EES AdminTool CREA Set the login settings Authentication mode setting Specify whether to use an LDAP server account or a local account saved on the scanner during the authentication process at login If both accounts are used you can set the search order for the authentication information Automatic login settings When the scanner is turned on or restarted the system performs an automatic login without displa
395. ttings group When a new set of scanner settings is available first any existing network printer and network folder settings are deleted then the new scanner settings are written over the old scanner settings Once the new scanner settings have been applied any changes to the settings of individual scanners are retained until the next time a new set of scanner settings becomes available from the Central Admin Server Pending updates are performed in the following order 1 System Updates 2 Add in Installs 3 Scanner Settings 10 Back button The Central Admin Console main window appears again 268 5 12 Setting the Job Mode The job mode can be set by registering a new job mode and setting a release schedule After registering a new set of job mode settings the job mode settings are replaced 1 Press the Admin Operations button in the Central Admin Console main window The Scanner Admin Operations window appears 2 Select the Job Mode Settings link The Job Mode Settings window appears Job Mode Settings Modify and release the Job Mode settings used by the scanners m Registered Job Mode Settings Current Release Version Date None Release Date Scheduled Release Version Date None Release Date m Create amp Release a New Set of Job Mode Settings Edit the Job Mode Settings Job Mode Settings Settings Release Schedule Hour 0 Min Back To cancel release of the job
396. tton The Settings For Selected Group s area become active Job Sequences Job Menus Job Groups List Job Group Name Last Modified Settings For Selected Group s Job Group Name Assign the following Job Menu Select Modes Available To User Both Job amp Multi Function Job Only Initial Post Login Menu e Multi Function Menu Job Menu Group Member Settings Number of Members 0 Include guest account as a member Include all local accounts as members Include all LDAP users as members OK Cancel 3 Enter the job group name for Job Group Name 4 Press the Select button gt The Select Job Menu window appears Job Sequences Job Menus Joy Groups Select Job Menu Job Menu Name Last Modified jobMenut 7 17 2010 3 07 10 PM JobMenu2 7 17 2010 3 07 24 PM 5 Select a job menu 6 Press the OK button A job menu is set on the Settings For Selected Group s area 217 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence 7 Set whether or not to display the Multi Function Menu If the same user is included in multiple job groups the Modes Available To User settings of the group that appears first in the list on the Job Groups List window are used For example if a user belongs to the 3rd and 5th groups in the list the settings for the 3rd group will be used Therefore specify the same Modes Available T
397. tton The specified Add in settings file is stored in the folder for managing Add ins program installation folder in C drive Setting the On Screen Keyboard When Running an Add in Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt Add in Software The Add in Software window appears When multiple Add ins are installed select the target Add in from the list In the Show On Screen Keyboard field select whether or not to show the on screen keyboard when running an Add in Press the Set button This setting is reflected in the Add in list 191 4 16 Maintaining the System 4 16 4 Setting the Information Output Level REH faminto 1 Select Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance gt Technical Support gt The Technical Support window appears Monitoring amp Management gt Maintenance Maintenance Set the information output level for technical support Information Output Level System Update Add in Software Technical Support Alert Notification Previous Cancel 2 Enter the desired information output level Set the level requested by your FUJITSU scanner dealer or an authorized FUJITSU scanner service provider 3 Press the OK button The information output level is set amp If the Information Output Level is set to 5 the output data may contain private user information such as e mail addresses so care should be taken when managing such data
398. tware The language for the backup and restore Central Admin Servers must be the same If languages are different the Central Admin Server may not operate correctly when restoring The admin password is not backed up and restored by using the AmBackup exe and AmRestore exe commands Even if the AmRestore exe command is executed the admin password is not changed For Windows Server 2008 to use HTTPS for communication to a scanner or computer installed with the Central Admin Console additional settings may be required for the target Central Admin Server to be restored For more details refer to Importing the Certificate page 237 283 5 17 Maintaining Central Admin Server Settings 5 17 3 Obtaining Technical Support on the Central Admin Server If any problems occur when setting up or using the Central Admin Server technical support information on the Central Admin Server can be collected to help determine the cause of the problem To obtain technical support information execute AmInvestigate exe in the command prompt on the computer installed with the Central Admin Server software When obtaining technical support the Central Admin Server is in a temporarily suspended state Do not try to obtain technical support unless requested by your FUJITSU scanner dealer or a problem occurs Command storage location Under the AmManager Bin folder in the installation folder of the Central Admin Server software
399. ul that the top cover does not shut on your fingers Z CAUTION 3 Remove the jammed document Staples paper clips etc can cause document jams Take care not to damage the glass or the sheet guide when removing stapled or paper clipped documents 443 8 1 Removing Jammed Documents 4 Holding both sides of the top cover close the top cover Be careful that the top cover does not shut on your fingers Confirm that the top cover is completely closed If not completely closed document jams and feeding errors may occur When closing the top cover do not slam it shut by pushing the LCD touch panel as this may damage it You should hear a click Although no error message is displayed document pages may remain in the ADF even after scanning is completed or canceled Follow the procedure from Step 1 to Step 4 above to remove any such pages from the ADF If document pages become blocked while scanning check the scanned data Document pages which could not be scanned correctly may be shown in the Scan Viewer window In this case delete all pages not correctly scanned using o For more details about the Scan Viewer window refer to 6 11 5 Deleting a Scanned Page page 401 If document jams or multifeed errors occur frequently try the following procedures 1 Align the edges of the document sheets 2 Fan the documents 1 Lightly grip the ends of the document stack in both hands and fan two or thre
400. unication problems will occur In this case try the following steps 1 Disconnect the LAN cable 2 Press the Shutdown button on the LCD touch panel to turn the scanner off Press the power button to start the scanner with the LAN cable disconnected 4 Enter a non duplicated IP address 5 Re connect the LAN cable to the scanner When DHOP is set to On the following scanner settings are assigned by the DHOP server IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Server WINS Server Domain Suffix Even if DNS or WINS server is set priority is given to the scanner settings over the DHCP settings The connection will be lost if the scanner s IP address is changed via the network interface To continue with other settings login to the network interface again If connecting via an IP address use the new IP address 114 4 8 2 Setting the DNS Server Buch GaminTooi Ceglar A primary DNS and secondary DNS can be set 1 Select Network Settings gt Basic gt DNS Server gt The DNS Server window appears Basic DNS Server Secondary DNS ol ol ol NTP Server o DNS Dynamic Update Network Status Previous 2 Enter the following numerical addresses Primary DNS Secondary DNS 3 For DNS Dynamic Update select whether or not to dynamically update the DNS 4 Enter a DNS Suffix 5 Press the OK button The information entered is set 115 4 8 Con
401. ups Job Groups List New Edit Job Group Name Last Modified Default Group 115 2010 5 45 29 PM 2 Select the default job group 221 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence 3 Press the Edit button The Settings For Selected Group s area becomes active Job Sequences Job Menus Job Groups Job Groups List Settings For Selected Group s Job Group Name Assign the following Job Menu Modes Available To User Both Job amp Multi Function Job Only Initial Post Login Menu e Multi Function Menu Job Menu Group Member Settings Include guest account as a member OK Cancel 4 Press the Select button The Select Job Menu window appears 5 Select a job menu 6 Press the OK button A job menu is set on the Settings For Selected Group s area 7 For Modes Available To User set whether or not to display the Multi Function Menu 8 Press the OK button A job menu is assigned to users who are not included in a job group 222 E Filtering the LDAP List This section describes how to filter the LDAP List on the Job Group Member Settings window 1 For Filter Conditions of the LDAP List select the filtering method 2 Enter the filter character string 3 Select the filter target If multiple items are selected a search operation tries to find entries containing any of the search items 4 Press
402. urrent user data Addition of new users cannot cause the 1 000 user limit to be exceeded or the user data store restoration will fail If this happens delete all user data once and then restore from a user data store backup When the user data store is restored from a backup the Fax Number List and local accounts are also reverted to their old state The following example illustrates how the number of users could exceed 1 000 1 100 users A001 to A100 login 2 The user data store is backed up with 100 users A001 to A100 3 The user data store containing users A001 to A100 is cleared 4 960 new users A001 to A050 and B001 to B910 login 177 4 15 Managing the User Data Store and System Settings 5 The user data store containing users A001 to A100 backed up in Step 2 is restored Users A001 to A100 are to be restored of whom 50 are already in the current user data store users A001 to A050 and so will be overwrite targets Users A051 to A100 are considered new users and thus need to be added to the user data store However 960 existing users 50 new users 1010 users As the number of users would exceed the 1 000 user limit the Step 2 user data store containing users A001 to A100 is not restored The user data store contents are organized as follows Common Data one per scanner Fax Number List E Local Accounts Individual Data one set per user User A 1 __ e Mail Address Book
403. used Name of the last network folder used SharePoint folder If the same network printer folder or SharePoint folder is not set for each scanner the name of the latest one used is not shown Job Roaming Info User job settings can be shared between multiple scanners by allowing job settings to be managed on the Central Admin Server A regular user can login on different scanners while retaining their preferred Job Menu window When Roaming Mode or Job Mode is On in the Scanner Central Admin Server window of Network Settings if communication with the Central Admin Server is not possible at login a confirmation message will appear If the OK button is pressed the settings saved in the scanner are used Pressing the Cancel button returns to the login window 305 6 3 Logging in Regular User Mode 6 3 Logging in Regular User Mode Do not move or shake the scanner when it is turned on Z CAUTION This may damage components in the scanner and cause data to be lost Depending on the authentication mode and the specified user name the following authentication process is performed for login authentication For users registered in the LDAP server Specify a user name from the user information registered with the LDAP server When the Server Type of the LDAP server is Active Directory or Active Directory Global Catalog User Name Format Authentication Process SAM Account Name A
404. used for displaying the on screen keyboard 63 2 4 Using the On Screen Keyboard mM Using the On Screen Keyboard Key Function Tab Switches focus to the input field Enter Performs the following Closes the on screen keyboard if it is displayed Inserts a line feed when multiple lines are input in the input field Commits the input in the Login window When logged in via the LCD touch panel the administrator cannot select the menu items using the on screen keyboard Select buttons in the menu by pressing the LCD touch panel E Keyboard Layout A keyboard layout can be selected on the Keyboard Settings window The on screen keyboard is compliant with the QWERTY layout The French on screen keyboard is compliant with the AZERTY layout The keyboard layout of the on screen keyboard can be switched by pressing a specific key For details refer to D 3 Changing the Functions on the On Screen Keyboard page 495 64 65 Chapter 3 Administrator Operations Overview 3 1 Operating and Managing SCanmers ccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 2 Required Scanner Function Settings ssccccccessesseneeeeeeeeeseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 66 3 1 Operating and Managing Scanners The administrator can configure and manage the scanner in the following ways LCD touch panel Scanner settings management can be implemented directly via the scanne
405. uthenticate the user login name Does not contain sAMAccountName Example user User Principal Name Authenticate the user login name Contains userPrincipalName Example user example com When the Server Type of the LDAP server is Other LDAP Server User Name Format Authentication Process uid Authenticate the user login name uid Example user cn Authenticate the user login name cn Example user For users registered in a local account Specify a user name from the user information of the local account Authentication is performed with a specified user login name for a local account saved in a scanner Note that the authenticated user info is also used when saving scans to a network folder When the scanner is turned on or restarted automatic login without displaying the Login window is possible Login is not possible if the Active Directory account option is User must change password at next logon Contact an administrator to change a password and then try logging in 306 When using a scanner without using an LDAP server or registering a local account enter the following user name and password For details about the LDAP server refer to LDAP Server page 50 User Name guest Password guest However this cannot be used if login with the guest account is disabled For details about automatic login or enabling login with the guest account refer to 4 7 1 Se
406. viation Enterprise Linux Used Option Solaris 10 Solaris 10 Operating System Red Hat Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Suse Linux Enterprise Server Suse Linux Enterprise Server 10 Suse Linux Enterprise Server 11 Internet Explorer Microsoft Internet Explorer IIS Microsoft Internet Information Services SQL Server 2005 Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition Express Edition Adobe Reader Adobe Reader RightFax RightFax Business Server Version 9 3 Intel Pentium III Processor Scanner Intel Pentium III Processor Network Scanner ScanSnap N1800 Carrier sheet Admin Tool ScanSnap Carrier Sheet Network Scanner Admin Tool User Editor Central Admin Console Network Scanner User Editor Scanner Central Admin Console Central Admin Server Scanner Central Admin Server Network Folder A folder that is set to save scanned data in the file server or FTP server SharePoint Folder A folder that is set to save scanned data in the SharePoint server Opening Help When the Help button is available on the window or dialog box that is displayed during the operation you can open Help by pressing it Help provides information about items on the screens and actions to take for the messages On the touch panel the Help button is displayed as 28 29 Chapter 1 Overview 1 1
407. w Help e ame cne ekar ge Active Directory Users and Computer example com 6 objets C Buitin builtinDomain computers Container Default container for upar department Organizational Domain Cont Organizational Default container for dom GF oreignSecur Container Default container for secu users Container Default container For upar or Computers department A section 4 section B H Domain Controllers ForeignSecurityPrincipals Users 131 4 9 Configuring the LDAP Settings For connecting with Global Catalog when Active Directory Global Catalog is selected in Step 2 The following shows an example where the parent domain name is example com and subdomain name is sub example com for the Search Base DN to be entered in Step 6 The italic text represents variable character strings LDAP Tree Example userPrincipalName sAMAccountName example com CN Users Administrator01 OU department OU section A User C User D OU section B User E sub example com CN Users Administrator02 Top sAMAccountName User K Bottom userPrincipalName i OU G User L i Example When searching in whole domain no Search Base DN setting or DC example DC com The LDAP search target differs as follows according to whether a user logs in with a sAMAccou
408. window Press the Name Format button to specify a file name from the File Names Save window For details about setting values refer to Setting a File Name Format for When Saving Scanned Data page 156 206 11 Press the OK button A job sequence is added to the Jobs List window E Cloning a Job Sequence This section describes how to clone a job sequence 1 Press the Job Sequences button The Jobs List window appears 2 Select the job sequence to be cloned 3 Press the Clone button The Job Details window appears 4 Clone the detailed job sequence settings 5 Press the OK button A job sequence is added to the Jobs List window E Editing a Job Sequence This section describes how to edit a job sequence 1 Press the Job Sequences button The Jobs List window appears N Select the job sequence to be edited Press the Edit button The Job Details window appears 9 4 Edit the detailed job sequence settings 5 Press the OK button The settings of the job sequence are changed 207 4 17 Setting a Job Sequence E Deleting a Job Sequence This section describes how to delete a job sequence 1 Press the Job Sequences button The Jobs List window appears Select the job sequence to be deleted Press the Delete button The confirmation window appears Press the OK button The job sequence is deleted E Filtering Job Sequences
409. xxxXxX Domain_name XXXXXXX Comprised of alphanumerics and the following symbols 1 GWR 7 However periods cannot be used in the following cases Using periods as a initial character Using periods as a last element Using periods consecutively IP_address Comprised of numbers separated by periods IP addresses within the following ranges may be used 1 0 0 1 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Host_name Domain_name Comprised of alphanumerics and hyphens only The initial character may not be a hyphen Comprised of alphanumerics and hyphens only and separated by periods Each name element may be up to 63 characters long and only alphabetic characters may be used for the last element 483 B 2 Scanner Configuration File Format The scanner configuration file format requirements differ for the following two cases For importing For exporting B 2 1 Scanner Configuration File Format for Importing This section describes the scanner configuration file format requirements for importing The file character set should be the same as the value on the Central Admin Console Central Admin Server Settings window The default value is UNICODE UTF 8 The file is in CSV format The values for each item are as follows Item Value and Format Remarks MAC Addres
410. ying the Login window For automatic login the user name and password specified in the Login Settings window is used Guest account validity Set whether or not to enable login with the guest account 1 Select System Settings gt Login Settings gt Login Settings The Login Settings window appears System Settings gt Login Settings Login Settings Y Enter the user login settings Authentication Mode LDAP only a Auto Login Off Guest Account Login Settings Standby Mode Admin Password Previous Cancel 107 4 7 Configuring the Login Related Settings 2 For Authentication Mode select an authentication mode When searching for authentication information in the LDAP server or local account the search order of authentication information can be selected If LDAP to Local or Local to LDAP is selected the operation becomes as follows If a password error occurred at the first authentication destination the authentication process moves to the next destination lf an authentication error occurred at the first and next authentication destinations a notification of the details of the error that occurred in the first destination is sent 3 For Auto Login select whether or not to enable automatic login The automatic login setting is applied immediately after an administrator logout To change the settings while the Auto Login is ON perform administrator log

Fujitsu N1800 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents